Introduction
A coisotropic submanifold of a Poisson manifold admits two complementary descriptions. Globally, its conormal Lie algebroid can, under suitable integrability assumptions, be integrated to a Lagrangian subgroupoid of a symplectic groupoid integrating the ambient manifold [10 , 5 , 6 ] . Infinitesimally, its Chevalley–Eilenberg complex carries the homotopy Poisson structure of Cattaneo and Felder [7 ] . These descriptions lead to different questions: whether the integrating subgroupoid is embedded, how it intersects other Lagrangian subgroupoids, and which features of the original geometry are retained by the homotopy Poisson algebra.
Shifted geometry provides a common setting for these questions [25 , 4 , 29 , 22 , 23 ] . A symplectic groupoid presents a 1-shifted symplectic differentiable stack, and a Lagrangian subgroupoid presents a 1-shifted Lagrangian morphism [35 , 2 ] . In the differential-geometric theory developed by the second author, a clean homotopy fibre product of two such Lagrangian carries a 0-shifted Poisson structure whenever the induced Dirac structure is smooth [21 ] . In previous work, we extended the integration and quantization picture to 1-shifted coisotropics under suitable hypotheses, constructing a flat P ∞ P_\infty P ∞ -algebra and a curved A ∞ A_\infty A ∞ -quantization [1 ] . Explicit examples require an understanding of the integrating subgroupoids, the cleanness of their homotopy fibre products, and the dependence of the higher brackets on choices.
In this paper, we study these questions for curves in Radko surfaces. A Radko surface is a compact oriented Poisson surface whose bivector vanishes transversely along a nonempty union of circles D D D [26 ] . We give an explicit description of its adjoint symplectic groupoid, relating the affine local model and the global gluing to the constructions of Gualtieri and Li [14 ] . Every curve in the surface is coisotropic, and its Lagrangian integrations are 1-shifted Lagrangians, but its contacts with D D D produce different behaviour: a curve may cross D D D transversely, have tangential contacts, or coincide with a component of D D D . This setting allows us to compute both the global integrations and the homotopy Poisson algebras explicitly.
Our results describe how these contacts govern the integrating Lagrangian subgroupoids, their shifted intersections, and the information retained by their homotopy Poisson algebras. In particular, we distinguish isomorphisms of the underlying L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -algebras from those induced by changes of tubular neighbourhood. This distinction is already visible on the Poisson sphere: a meridian and a circle tangent to the degeneracy equator have L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphic homotopy Poisson algebras, but only the meridian admits a tubular neighbourhood in which all brackets of arity at least two vanish (Example 6.21). We first state the general criterion that makes this distinction precise, before describing the global and infinitesimal results for curves.
Let N ⊂ M N \subset M N ⊂ M be coisotropic, and write a = C ∞ ( ∧ ∙ ν N ) \mathfrak{a}=C^\infty(\wedge^\bullet\nu_N) a = C ∞ ( ∧ ∙ ν N ) . A tubular neighbourhood ψ \psi ψ of N N N , that is, an open embedding into M M M of a neighbourhood of the zero section of ν N \nu_N ν N which is the identity on N N N and induces the identity on ν N \nu_N ν N , determines a flat P ∞ P_\infty P ∞ -structure λ ψ \lambda^\psi λ ψ on a \mathfrak{a} a , and we call ( a , λ ψ ) (\mathfrak{a},\lambda^\psi) ( a , λ ψ ) the homotopy Poisson algebra of ( N , ψ ) (N,\psi) ( N , ψ ) . Its unary bracket λ 1 \lambda_1 λ 1 is independent of ψ \psi ψ , and it is the Chevalley–Eilenberg differential of T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ up to sign. The higher brackets are obtained from the formal expansion σ ψ \sigma_\psi σ ψ of σ \sigma σ along N N N in the tubular neighbourhood ψ \psi ψ , as higher derived brackets [7 , 32 , 8 ] .
For the statement of the criterion, recall that an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism is a coalgebra automorphism F F F of S ( a [ 1 ] ) S(\mathfrak{a}[1]) S ( a [ 1 ]) intertwining the coderivations encoding the brackets. Its linear part is the first Taylor coefficient F 1 F_1 F 1 . A formal change of tubular neighbourhood is a formal diffeomorphism of ν N \nu_N ν N along N N N that induces the identity on N N N and on ν N \nu_N ν N . The construction recalled in § 2 associates to it a coalgebra automorphism with identity linear part, and an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism whenever the change carries one formal Poisson bivector to the other. We call such an isomorphism induced by a change of tubular neighbourhood .
When F 1 = id F_1=\operatorname{id} F 1 = id , its logarithm is the well-defined coderivation log F = ∑ k ≥ 1 ( − 1 ) k + 1 k ( F − id ) k \log F = \sum_{k\geq1}\frac{(-1)^{k+1}}{k}(F-\operatorname{id})^k log F = ∑ k ≥ 1 k ( − 1 ) k + 1 ( F − id ) k . The series is finite on each element of S ( a [ 1 ] ) S(\mathfrak{a}[1]) S ( a [ 1 ]) . A multiderivation is a graded symmetric multilinear map on a [ 1 ] \mathfrak{a}[1] a [ 1 ] satisfying a Leibniz rule in each argument for the product of a \mathfrak{a} a . Our first result gives an intrinsic criterion for an isomorphism to be induced by a formal change of neighbourhood.
Theorem A. Let ψ , ψ ′ \psi,\psi' ψ , ψ ′ be tubular neighbourhoods of a coisotropic submanifold of a Poisson manifold. An L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism F : ( a , λ ψ ) → ( a , λ ψ ′ ) F\colon(\mathfrak{a},\lambda^\psi)\to(\mathfrak{a},\lambda^{\psi'}) F : ( a , λ ψ ) → ( a , λ ψ ′ ) is induced by a change of tubular neighbourhood if and only if F 1 = id F_1=\operatorname{id} F 1 = id and the Taylor coefficients of positive arity of log F \log F log F are multiderivations of a \mathfrak{a} a .
The inducing formal change is unique. The logarithm is essential, since the Taylor coefficients of F F F itself need not be multiderivations. The theorem distinguishes abstract linearization of a homotopy Poisson algebra from linearization by a change of tubular neighbourhood. For coisotropic submanifolds of symplectic manifolds, Schätz and Zambon compare geometric equivalences with gauge equivalences of the associated L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -algebras [30 ] . Its proof, together with the comparison with the isomorphisms of Cattaneo and Schätz [8 ] , occupies § 2 .
We now return to a Radko surface ( Σ , σ ) (\Sigma,\sigma) ( Σ , σ ) with degeneracy locus D D D . These are precisely the compact oriented log symplectic surfaces with nonempty degeneracy locus [15 , 14 ] . Near a component D j D_j D j of D D D there are coordinates ( t , r ) ∈ S ℓ j 1 × ( − ϵ j , ϵ j ) (t,r)\in S^1_{\ell_j}\times(-\epsilon_j,\epsilon_j) ( t , r ) ∈ S ℓ j 1 × ( − ϵ j , ϵ j ) in which
σ = r ∂ ∂ r ∧ ∂ ∂ t , S ℓ j 1 = R / ℓ j Z . \sigma=r\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial t},\qquad S^1_{\ell_j}=\mathbb{R}/\ell_j\mathbb{Z}. σ = r ∂ r ∂ ∧ ∂ t ∂ , S ℓ j 1 = R / ℓ j Z .
The positive number ℓ j \ell_j ℓ j is the modular period of D j D_j D j , the period of the modular vector field X v o l X_{\mathrm{vol}} X vol [34 ] of σ \sigma σ along D j D_j D j [26 ] . Together with the oriented degeneracy locus and a regularized volume, the modular periods classify Radko structures [26 ] .
In a symplectic surface, the questions above have simple answers. The adjoint symplectic groupoid of a connected symplectic surface is its pair groupoid, two curves always have a clean homotopy fibre product, and every curve has a tubular neighbourhood whose homotopy Poisson algebra has no brackets of arity at least two. Along the degeneracy locus of a Radko surface, the rank of σ \sigma σ drops from 2 2 2 to 0 0 0 , so that a curve can meet D D D transversely, tangentially to any order, or contain a component of D D D .
Let G Σ \mathcal{G}_\Sigma G Σ denote the adjoint symplectic groupoid integrating ( Σ , σ ) (\Sigma,\sigma) ( Σ , σ ) . In § 3 , we give explicit formulas for this groupoid and its symplectic form, using the affine local model and the integration constructions of Gualtieri and Li [14 ] . Over each component of Σ ∖ D \Sigma\setminus D Σ ∖ D it is the pair groupoid, and its isotropy group at a point of D D D is the orientation-preserving affine group Aff + ( R ) = { ( a , b ) : a > 0 , b ∈ R } \operatorname{Aff}^+(\mathbb{R})=\{(a,b):a>0,\ b\in\mathbb{R}\} Aff + ( R ) = {( a , b ) : a > 0 , b ∈ R } , with ( a 2 , b 2 ) ( a 1 , b 1 ) = ( a 2 a 1 , b 1 + a 1 b 2 ) (a_2,b_2)(a_1,b_1)=(a_2a_1,b_1+a_1b_2) ( a 2 , b 2 ) ( a 1 , b 1 ) = ( a 2 a 1 , b 1 + a 1 b 2 ) . Near D j D_j D j , the groupoid G Σ \mathcal{G}_\Sigma G Σ is a quotient of the action groupoid of Aff + ( R ) \operatorname{Aff}^+(\mathbb{R}) Aff + ( R ) acting on S ℓ j 1 × R S^1_{\ell_j}\times\mathbb{R} S ℓ j 1 × R by ( a , b ) ⋅ ( t , r ) = ( t + b r , a r ) (a,b)\cdot(t,r)=(t+br,ar) ( a , b ) ⋅ ( t , r ) = ( t + b r , a r ) , by a discrete subgroupoid of loops which records the modular period (§§3.3 and 3.4). We call { ( 1 , b ) : b ∈ R } \{(1,b): b\in\mathbb{R}\} {( 1 , b ) : b ∈ R } the translation subgroup of Aff + ( R ) \operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) Aff + ( R ) , and the conjugates of { ( a , 0 ) : a > 0 } \{(a,0):a>0\} {( a , 0 ) : a > 0 } its dilation subgroups .
Throughout, a curve is a closed embedded one-dimensional submanifold. We call it admissible if each component is contained in Σ ∖ D \Sigma\setminus D Σ ∖ D , is a component of D D D , or meets D D D in finitely many points. We say that N N N is tangent to D D D at x ∈ N ∩ D x\in N\cap D x ∈ N ∩ D if T x N = T x D T_xN=T_xD T x N = T x D , which holds in particular if N N N contains the component of D D D through x x x . At a point of N ∩ D N\cap D N ∩ D , a component not contained in D D D has a tangential contact with D D D if it is tangent to D D D , and a transverse contact otherwise. We do not consider curves which meet D D D in infinitely many points without containing a component of it, for which N ∩ D N\cap D N ∩ D can be an arbitrary closed subset of D j D_j D j . Our second result integrates admissible curves inside the adjoint groupoid itself, and not only in the source-simply-connected one.
Theorem B. Let N N N be an admissible curve in a Radko surface. Then T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ integrates to an embedded Lagrangian subgroupoid L ⇒ N L\Rightarrow N L ⇒ N of G Σ \mathcal{G}_{\Sigma} G Σ , whose isotropy group at p ∈ N ∩ D p\in N\cap D p ∈ N ∩ D is the translation subgroup if N N N is tangent to D D D at p p p , and a dilation subgroup otherwise.
The subgroupoid L L L is source-connected, two points of N ∖ D N\setminus D N ∖ D are joined by an arrow of L L L exactly when they lie in the same component of N ∖ D N\setminus D N ∖ D , and the arrows with source in N ∩ D N\cap D N ∩ D are loops. In general, T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ only integrates to an immersed subgroupoid, the image of a morphism which need not be injective [24 ] , and the Lagrangian subgroupoid of [5 ] lives in the source-simply-connected integration. Here it is embedded in the adjoint integration, which is Hausdorff, so that L L L is a 1-shifted Lagrangian in an explicit Lie groupoid and can be intersected with others.
Given two admissible curves N 1 N_1 N 1 and N 2 N_2 N 2 , their subgroupoids L 1 L_1 L 1 and L 2 L_2 L 2 define a homotopy fibre product L 1 × G Σ h L 2 L_1\times^h_{\mathcal{G}_{\Sigma}}L_2 L 1 × G Σ h L 2 , which is a groupoid over the space of triples ( x , g , y ) (x,g,y) ( x , g , y ) with x ∈ N 1 x\in N_1 x ∈ N 1 , y ∈ N 2 y\in N_2 y ∈ N 2 and g g g an arrow of G Σ \mathcal{G}_{\Sigma} G Σ from x x x to y y y . It is clean if this space is a submanifold with the expected tangent spaces, and this is the condition under which the general theory produces a 0-shifted Poisson structure, since the relevant Dirac structure is then automatically smooth for 1-shifted Lagrangians. Cleanness is weaker than transversality, so this structure is in general Poisson and not symplectic. The cleanness of L 1 × G Σ h L 2 L_1\times^h_{\mathcal{G}_{\Sigma}}L_2 L 1 × G Σ h L 2 is controlled by the contacts of N 1 N_1 N 1 and N 2 N_2 N 2 with D D D at their common points.
Theorem C. Let N 1 N_1 N 1 and N 2 N_2 N 2 be admissible curves in a Radko surface. Then L 1 × G Σ h L 2 L_1\times^h_{\mathcal{G}_{\Sigma}}L_2 L 1 × G Σ h L 2 is clean if and only if, at every point of N 1 ∩ N 2 ∩ D N_1\cap N_2\cap D N 1 ∩ N 2 ∩ D , either both curves contain the component of D D D through this point, or exactly one of them is tangent to D D D .
This condition is not ordinary transversality of the curves in Σ \Sigma Σ : two transverse great circles on the Poisson sphere of Example 5.6 can have a non-clean homotopy fibre product. For a single curve, the shifted self-intersection L × G Σ h L L\times^h_{\mathcal{G}_{\Sigma}}L L × G Σ h L is clean if and only if every component of N N N which meets D D D is a component of D D D (Corollary 5.4).
When it is clean, the homotopy fibre product is Morita equivalent to a disjoint union of finitely many points and, for each common component D j D_j D j of D D D , of the trivial bundle of groups ( S ℓ j 1 × R ) × R (S^1_{\ell_j}\times\mathbb{R})\times\mathbb{R} ( S ℓ j 1 × R ) × R over a cylinder (Proposition 5.5). The 0-shifted Poisson structure of [21 Corollary 4.12] restricts to a symplectic form on this cylinder, for which the Hamiltonian vector field of a canonical function projects to the modular vector field of σ \sigma σ along D j D_j D j . The modular period is thus recovered as the period of this flow, although the symplectic cylinder alone does not determine it. The regularized volume does not enter, in agreement with the result of Bursztyn and Radko that, for a fixed oriented degeneracy locus, the modular periods determine a Radko structure up to gauge equivalence and Poisson diffeomorphism, and hence up to Morita equivalence [3 Theorems 6.2 and 6.3] .
We next compute the homotopy Poisson algebra of a component N c N_c N c of an admissible curve. The algebra a c = C ∞ ( N c ) ⊕ C ∞ ( ν N c ) \mathfrak{a}_c=C^\infty(N_c)\oplus C^\infty(\nu_{N_c}) a c = C ∞ ( N c ) ⊕ C ∞ ( ν N c ) is concentrated in degrees 0 and 1, and we write ( a c , λ 1 ) (\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1) ( a c , λ 1 ) for this algebra with λ 1 \lambda_1 λ 1 as its only bracket. In an adapted chart ( x , y ) (x,y) ( x , y ) for a tubular neighbourhood, write N c = { y = 0 } N_c=\{y=0\} N c = { y = 0 } , let e e e be the frame of ν N c \nu_{N_c} ν N c dual to y y y , and write
σ ψ = ( ∑ k ≥ 0 ν k ( x ) y k ) ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y . \sigma_\psi=\left(\sum_{k\geq0}\nu_k(x)y^k\right)\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}. σ ψ = ( k ≥ 0 ∑ ν k ( x ) y k ) ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ .
The higher brackets are expressed directly in terms of the coefficients υ k \upsilon_k υ k . Up to graded antisymmetry, the only possibly nonzero brackets are
λ n ψ ( f , g 1 e , … , g n − 1 e ) = ( n − 1 ) ! υ n − 1 ∂ f ∂ x g 1 ⋯ g n − 1 e , \lambda_n^\psi(f,g_1e,\ldots,g_{n-1}e)=(n-1)!\upsilon_{n-1}\frac{\partial f}{\partial x}g_1\cdots g_{n-1}e, λ n ψ ( f , g 1 e , … , g n − 1 e ) = ( n − 1 )! υ n − 1 ∂ x ∂ f g 1 ⋯ g n − 1 e ,
where f , g 1 , … , g n − 1 ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) f,g_1,\ldots,g_{n-1}\in C^\infty(N_c) f , g 1 , … , g n − 1 ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) and n ≥ 1 n\ge1 n ≥ 1 . In particular, λ 1 \lambda_1 λ 1 is determined by υ 0 \upsilon_0 υ 0 and the binary bracket by υ 1 \upsilon_1 υ 1 .
Suppose first that N c N_c N c is not contained in D D D . At each point p ∈ N c ∩ D p\in N_c\cap D p ∈ N c ∩ D , the contact multiplicity m p ∈ { 1 , 2 , … } ∪ { ∞ } m_p\in\{1,2,\ldots\}\cup\{\infty\} m p ∈ { 1 , 2 , … } ∪ { ∞ } is the order of vanishing on N c N_c N c of a local defining function of D D D , so that transverse contacts have multiplicity one. These multiplicities govern the cohomology of λ 1 \lambda_1 λ 1 and the L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism class of the homotopy Poisson algebra. Here L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphisms are understood algebraically: no continuity, locality or compatibility with the commutative products is required. The homotopy Poisson algebras carry their products throughout, but the abstract classification concerns their underlying L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -algebras. An L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism ( a c , λ ψ ) → ( a c , λ 1 ) (a_c,\lambda^\psi)\to(a_c,\lambda_1) ( a c , λ ψ ) → ( a c , λ 1 ) is induced by a change of tubular neighbourhood if λ 1 \lambda_1 λ 1 is the homotopy Poisson structure of a tubular neighbourhood ψ ′ ′ \psi'' ψ ′′ and the isomorphism is induced by a change from ψ \psi ψ to ψ ′ ′ \psi'' ψ ′′ as above.
Theorem D. Let N c N_c N c be a component of an admissible curve in a Radko surface, with N c ⊄ D N_c\not\subset D N c ⊂ D , and let ψ \psi ψ be a tubular neighbourhood of N c N_c N c .
(1) The algebra ( a c , λ ψ ) (a_c,\lambda^\psi) ( a c , λ ψ ) is L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphic to ( a c , λ 1 ) (a_c,\lambda_1) ( a c , λ 1 ) . Two such components have L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphic algebras if and only if they have the same total multiplicity ∑ p m p ∈ { 0 , 1 , 2 , … } ∪ { ∞ } \sum_p m_p\in\{0,1,2,\ldots\}\cup\{\infty\} ∑ p m p ∈ { 0 , 1 , 2 , … } ∪ { ∞ } .
(2) An L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism ( a c , λ ψ ) → ( a c , λ 1 ) (a_c,\lambda^\psi)\to(a_c,\lambda_1) ( a c , λ ψ ) → ( a c , λ 1 ) can be chosen to be induced by a change of tubular neighbourhood if and only if all contacts of N c N_c N c with D D D are transverse. For every tubular neighbourhood ψ \psi ψ , the binary bracket is λ 2 ψ ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v \lambda_2^\psi(f,v)=X(f)v λ 2 ψ ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v for a vector field X X X on N c N_c N c with X ( p ) = X v o l ( p ) X(p)=X_{\mathrm{vol}}(p) X ( p ) = X vol ( p ) at every tangential contact $p.
Here dim H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) = 1 + ∑ p m p \dim H^1(a_c,\lambda_1)=1+\sum_p m_p dim H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) = 1 + ∑ p m p when all multiplicities are finite, and H 1 H^1 H 1 has the dimension of the continuum otherwise. Every component has a tubular neighbourhood in which λ n = 0 \lambda_n=0 λ n = 0 for n ≥ 3 n\ge3 n ≥ 3 , so that its homotopy Poisson algebra is a differential graded Poisson algebra. When all contacts are transverse, ∣ N c ∩ D ∣ = 2 k |N_c\cap D|=2k ∣ N c ∩ D ∣ = 2 k , and in a suitable tubular neighbourhood, coordinate θ ∈ R / 2 π Z \theta\in\mathbb{R}/2\pi\mathbb{Z} θ ∈ R /2 π Z and frame e e e , the only nonzero bracket is λ 1 ( f ) = sin ( k θ ) ∂ f ∂ θ e \lambda_1(f)=\sin(k\theta)\frac{\partial f}{\partial\theta}e λ 1 ( f ) = sin ( k θ ) ∂ θ ∂ f e , or λ 1 ( f ) = ∂ f ∂ θ e \lambda_1(f)=\frac{\partial f}{\partial\theta}e λ 1 ( f ) = ∂ θ ∂ f e if k = 0 k=0 k = 0 . This agrees with the Mazzeo–Melrose formula for b b b -manifolds [15 Theorem 27] and with the b b b -symplectic normal form of Geudens and Zambon [12 ] . At a tangential contact of finite multiplicity m p ≥ 2 m_p\ge2 m p ≥ 2 , the jet of order m p − 2 m_p-2 m p − 2 of X X X at p p p is intrinsic, whereas its jet of order m p − 1 m_p-1 m p − 1 depends on the tubular neighbourhood.
A component N c = D j N_c=D_j N c = D j has different behaviour. Deformations of such Lagrangian submanifolds contained in the degeneracy locus are studied by Geudens and Zambon [13 ] . Its differential λ 1 \lambda_1 λ 1 vanishes, its binary bracket is λ 2 ( f , v ) = X v o l ( f ) v \lambda_2(f,v)=X_{\mathrm{vol}}(f)v λ 2 ( f , v ) = X vol ( f ) v for every tubular neighbourhood, and every flat L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -algebra L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphic to ( a c , λ ψ ) (a_c,\lambda^\psi) ( a c , λ ψ ) has a nonzero binary bracket (Propositions 6.14 and 6.16). All these algebras are L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphic to each other, whatever the modular period. The period is nevertheless recovered by every L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism whose linear part is compatible with the products, as the period of X v o l ∣ D j X_{\mathrm{vol}|D_j} X vol ∣ D j (Proposition 6.17).
For a connected admissible curve not contained in D D D , the L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism class of the homotopy Poisson algebra retains only a numerical invariant, the total contact multiplicity, which also governs the cohomology of T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ and, through the van Est map, the differentiable cohomology of the integrating subgroupoid when the curve meets D D D (Remark 6.8). The geometric isomorphisms of Theorem A retain more, namely the modular vector field at the tangential contacts, which is invisible to the abstract classification but obstructs geometric linearization. The global structures retain the modular periods, through the canonical function on the shifted self-intersections of the degeneracy curves, whose Hamiltonian flow has period ℓ j \ell_j ℓ j .
Organization of the paper. In § 2 , we recall the homotopy Poisson algebra of a coisotropic submanifold, study changes of tubular neighbourhood and prove Theorem A . In § 3 , we describe the adjoint symplectic groupoid of a Radko surface. In § 4 , we construct the Lagrangian subgroupoids of admissible curves and prove Theorem B . In § 5 , we determine the clean homotopy fibre products of these subgroupoids and their induced structures, and prove Theorem C . Finally, in § 6 , we compute and classify the homotopy Poisson algebras of curves and prove Theorem D.
Acknowledgments. Y.A.M. thanks the Institut des sciences mathématiques (ISM) for financial support. M.M. acknowledges support from a Discovery Grant (RGPIN-2023-04587) from the Natural Sciences and Engineering Research Council of Canada (NSERC).
Homotopy Poisson algebras and changes of tubular neighbourhood
In this section, we characterize the L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphisms between homotopy Poisson algebras of a coisotropic submanifold that are induced by changes of tubular neighbourhood, and prove Theorem A . Let ( M , σ ) (M,\sigma) ( M , σ ) be a Poisson manifold and let N ⊂ M N \subset M N ⊂ M be a coisotropic submanifold. We write
ν = T M ∣ N / T N , a = C ∞ ( ⋀ ν ) , a [ 1 ] k = a k + 1 . \nu=TM|_N/TN,\qquad\mathfrak{a}=C^\infty(\bigwedge\nu),\qquad\mathfrak{a}[1]^k=\mathfrak{a}^{k+1}. ν = T M ∣ N / T N , a = C ∞ ( ⋀ ν ) , a [ 1 ] k = a k + 1 .
A tubular neighbourhood of N N N determines a homotopy Poisson structure on a \mathfrak{a} a . We first recall the coalgebra operations needed to take logarithms of isomorphisms, then construct the homotopy Poisson brackets by higher derived brackets. Finally, we compare formal changes of neighbourhood with coalgebra automorphisms.
Coalgebras and ∞ \infty ∞ -isotopies
All vector spaces are real and Z \mathbb{Z} Z -graded, and all tensor operations use the Koszul sign rule. For homogeneous operators, we use the graded commutator [ T 1 , T 2 ] = T 1 ∘ T 2 − ( − 1 ) ∣ T 1 ∣ ∣ T 2 ∣ T 2 ∘ T 1 [T_1,T_2]=T_1\circ T_2-(-1)^{|T_1||T_2|}T_2\circ T_1 [ T 1 , T 2 ] = T 1 ∘ T 2 − ( − 1 ) ∣ T 1 ∣∣ T 2 ∣ T 2 ∘ T 1 . For a graded vector space V V V , let
S ( V ) = ⨁ n ≥ 0 S n V , S ≤ n V = ⨁ k = 0 n S k V . S(V)=\bigoplus_{n\geq0}S^nV,\qquad S^{\leq n}V=\bigoplus_{k=0}^{n}S^kV. S ( V ) = n ≥ 0 ⨁ S n V , S ≤ n V = k = 0 ⨁ n S k V .
We equip S ( V ) S(V) S ( V ) with its usual coproduct Δ \Delta Δ , counit and coaugmentation. It is the cofree conilpotent cocommutative coalgebra on V V V [18 , 20 ] . An element of S n V S^nV S n V has length n n n .
Coalgebra morphisms will have degree zero and preserve the counit and coaugmentation. Such a morphism F : S ( V ) → S ( W ) F:S(V)\to S(W) F : S ( V ) → S ( W ) and a homogeneous coderivation Q Q Q of S ( V ) S(V) S ( V ) are determined by their Taylor coefficients F n = pr W ∘ F ∣ S n V F_n=\operatorname{pr}_W\circ F|_{S^nV} F n = pr W ∘ F ∣ S n V , Q n = pr V ∘ Q ∣ S n V Q_n=\operatorname{pr}_V\circ Q|_{S^nV} Q n = pr V ∘ Q ∣ S n V . Here F 0 = 0 F_0=0 F 0 = 0 , whereas a coderivation may have a nonzero coefficient Q 0 ∈ V Q_0\in V Q 0 ∈ V . Conversely, every family of coefficients of the appropriate degree, with F 0 = 0 F_0=0 F 0 = 0 in the morphism case, determines such a map [18 §2 and Lemma 2.4] , [17 §4.1] . Explicitly,
F ( v 1 ⋯ v n ) = ∑ B ε ( B ) F # B 1 ( v B 1 ) ⋯ F # B k ( v B k ) , (1) F(v_1\cdots v_n)=\sum_{\mathcal{B}}\varepsilon(\mathcal{B})F_{\#B_1}(v_{B_1})\cdots F_{\#B_k}(v_{B_k}), \tag*{(1)} F ( v 1 ⋯ v n ) = B ∑ ε ( B ) F # B 1 ( v B 1 ) ⋯ F # B k ( v B k ) , (1)
where B = { B 1 , … , B k } \mathcal{B}=\{B_1,\ldots,B_k\} B = { B 1 , … , B k } runs over the partitions of { 1 , … , n } \{1,\ldots,n\} { 1 , … , n } into nonempty blocks. The factors in v B v_B v B are ordered by their indices, and ε ( B ) \varepsilon(\mathcal{B}) ε ( B ) is the Koszul sign of the corresponding permutation. Similarly,
Q ( v 1 ⋯ v n ) = ∑ I ⊂ { 1 , … , n } ε ( I ) Q # I ( v I ) v I c , (2) Q(v_1\cdots v_n)=\sum_{I\subset\{1,\ldots,n\}}\varepsilon(I)Q_{\#I}(v_I)v_{I^c}, \tag*{(2)} Q ( v 1 ⋯ v n ) = I ⊂ { 1 , … , n } ∑ ε ( I ) Q # I ( v I ) v I c , (2)
where ε ( I ) \varepsilon(I) ε ( I ) is the Koszul sign of v 1 ⋯ v n ↦ v I v I c v_1\cdots v_n\mapsto v_Iv_{I^c} v 1 ⋯ v n ↦ v I v I c , and the term indexed by I = ∅ I=\varnothing I = ∅ uses Q 0 = Q 0 ( 1 ) Q_0=Q_0(1) Q 0 = Q 0 ( 1 ) .
We use the symmetric convention: an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -structure on V V V is a coderivation Q Q Q of degree 1 1 1 with Q ∘ Q = 0 Q\circ Q=0 Q ∘ Q = 0 , and it is flat if Q 0 = 0 Q_0=0 Q 0 = 0 . An L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -morphism F : ( V , Q ) → ( V ′ , Q ′ ) F:(V,Q)\to(V',Q') F : ( V , Q ) → ( V ′ , Q ′ ) of flat L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -structures is a coalgebra morphism with F 0 = 0 F_0=0 F 0 = 0 and F ∘ Q = Q ′ ∘ F F\circ Q=Q'\circ F F ∘ Q = Q ′ ∘ F . It is an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism if it is bijective, and its linear part is F 1 F_1 F 1 [8 §2.1, Definition 2.2 and §3.1] .
When applying this convention to a graded algebra a \mathfrak{a} a , the coderivation acts on S ( a [ 1 ] ) S(\mathfrak{a}[1]) S ( a [ 1 ]) . In the rest of this subsection, a \mathfrak{a} a may be any graded commutative algebra. We write deg b \deg b deg b for the degree of a homogeneous element b ∈ a b\in\mathfrak{a} b ∈ a and ∣ b ∣ = deg b − 1 |b|=\deg b-1 ∣ b ∣ = deg b − 1 for its degree in a [ 1 ] \mathfrak{a}[1] a [ 1 ] .
Definition 2.1. Let n ≥ 1 n\geq1 n ≥ 1 . A graded symmetric map l : S n ( a [ 1 ] ) → a [ 1 ] l:S^n(\mathfrak{a}[1])\to\mathfrak{a}[1] l : S n ( a [ 1 ]) → a [ 1 ] of degree d d d is a multiderivation of a \mathfrak{a} a if, for all homogeneous b , c ∈ a b,c\in\mathfrak{a} b , c ∈ a and a 2 , … , a n ∈ a [ 1 ] a_2,\ldots,a_n\in\mathfrak{a}[1] a 2 , … , a n ∈ a [ 1 ] ,
l ( b c , a 2 , … , a n ) = ( − 1 ) deg c ( ∣ a 2 ∣ + ⋯ + ∣ a n ∣ ) l ( b , a 2 , … , a n ) c + ( − 1 ) d deg b b l ( c , a 2 , … , a n ) . (3) l(bc,a_2,\ldots,a_n)=(-1)^{\deg c(|a_2|+\cdots+|a_n|)}l(b,a_2,\ldots,a_n)c+(-1)^{d\deg b}bl(c,a_2,\ldots,a_n). \tag*{(3)} l ( b c , a 2 , … , a n ) = ( − 1 ) d e g c ( ∣ a 2 ∣ + ⋯ + ∣ a n ∣ ) l ( b , a 2 , … , a n ) c + ( − 1 ) d d e g b b l ( c , a 2 , … , a n ) . (3)
A flat L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -structure Q Q Q on a [ 1 ] \mathfrak{a}[1] a [ 1 ] is a flat P ∞ P_\infty P ∞ -structure on a \mathfrak{a} a if its Taylor coefficients Q n Q_n Q n , n ≥ 1 n\geq1 n ≥ 1 , are multiderivations.
By graded symmetry, a multiderivation satisfies a Leibniz rule in each argument,
l ( … , b c , … ) = ± l ( … , b , … ) c ± b l ( … , c , … ) , (4) l(\ldots,bc,\ldots)=\pm l(\ldots,b,\ldots)c\pm bl(\ldots,c,\ldots), \tag*{(4)} l ( … , b c , … ) = ± l ( … , b , … ) c ± b l ( … , c , … ) , (4)
with signs depending only on the degrees. For a = C ∞ ( ∧ ∙ ν ) a = C^\infty(\wedge^\bullet\nu) a = C ∞ ( ∧ ∙ ν ) , a multiderivation is therefore determined, over a chart with coordinates x μ x^\mu x μ on N N N and a frame ( e i ) (e_i) ( e i ) of ν \nu ν , by its values on the x μ x^\mu x μ and the e i e_i e i .
Let Aut 1 ( a ) \operatorname{Aut}_1(a) Aut 1 ( a ) be the set of degree-zero coalgebra morphisms F : S ( a [ 1 ] ) → S ( a [ 1 ] ) F:S(a[1])\to S(a[1]) F : S ( a [ 1 ]) → S ( a [ 1 ]) with F 0 = 0 F_0=0 F 0 = 0 and F 1 = id F_1=\operatorname{id} F 1 = id , called ∞ \infty ∞ -isotopies [11 Chapter 3] , and Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) \operatorname{Coder}_{\geq2}(a) Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) the Lie algebra of coderivations δ \delta δ of S ( a [ 1 ] ) S(a[1]) S ( a [ 1 ]) of degree 0 0 0 with δ 0 = δ 1 = 0 \delta_0=\delta_1=0 δ 0 = δ 1 = 0 . By (1) and (2) , F − id F-\operatorname{id} F − id and δ \delta δ map S n ( a [ 1 ] ) S^n(a[1]) S n ( a [ 1 ]) into S ≤ n − 1 ( a [ 1 ] ) S^{\leq n-1}(a[1]) S ≤ n − 1 ( a [ 1 ]) and vanish on S ≤ 1 ( a [ 1 ] ) S^{\leq1}(a[1]) S ≤ 1 ( a [ 1 ]) , so
( F − id ) n ∣ S ≤ n ( a [ 1 ] ) = 0 , δ n ∣ S ≤ n ( a [ 1 ] ) = 0. (5) (F-\operatorname{id})^n\big|_{S^{\leq n}(a[1])}=0,\qquad\delta^n\big|_{S^{\leq n}(a[1])}=0. \tag*{(5)} ( F − id ) n S ≤ n ( a [ 1 ]) = 0 , δ n S ≤ n ( a [ 1 ]) = 0. (5)
Hence the series log F = ∑ k ≥ 1 ( − 1 ) k + 1 k ( F − id ) k \log F=\sum_{k\geq1}\frac{(-1)^{k+1}}{k}(F-\operatorname{id})^k log F = ∑ k ≥ 1 k ( − 1 ) k + 1 ( F − id ) k and e δ = ∑ k ≥ 0 1 k ! δ k e^\delta=\sum_{k\geq0}\frac{1}{k!}\delta^k e δ = ∑ k ≥ 0 k ! 1 δ k are finite on each element.
The set Aut 1 ( a ) \operatorname{Aut}_1(a) Aut 1 ( a ) is a group [11 Chapter 3] . To see that log F \log F log F is a coderivation, write
Δ ∘ ( F − id ) k = ( F ⊗ F − id ⊗ id ) k ∘ Δ , \Delta\circ(F-\operatorname{id})^k=(F\otimes F-\operatorname{id}\otimes\operatorname{id})^k\circ\Delta, Δ ∘ ( F − id ) k = ( F ⊗ F − id ⊗ id ) k ∘ Δ ,
log ( F ⊗ F ) = log ( F ⊗ id ) + log ( id ⊗ F ) . \log(F\otimes F)=\log(F\otimes\operatorname{id})+\log(\operatorname{id}\otimes F). log ( F ⊗ F ) = log ( F ⊗ id ) + log ( id ⊗ F ) .
The second identity follows because F ⊗ id F\otimes\operatorname{id} F ⊗ id and id ⊗ F \operatorname{id}\otimes F id ⊗ F commute, and all series are finite on each length filtration step. It follows that
Δ ∘ log F = ( ( log F ) ⊗ id + id ⊗ ( log F ) ) ∘ Δ . \Delta\circ\log F=((\log F)\otimes\operatorname{id}+\operatorname{id}\otimes(\log F))\circ\Delta. Δ ∘ log F = (( log F ) ⊗ id + id ⊗ ( log F )) ∘ Δ.
Thus log F ∈ Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) \log F\in\operatorname{Coder}_{\geq2}(a) log F ∈ Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) . Conversely, for δ ∈ Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) \delta\in\operatorname{Coder}_{\geq2}(a) δ ∈ Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) , the coderivation identity gives Δ ∘ e δ = ( e δ ⊗ e δ ) ∘ Δ \Delta\circ e^\delta=(e^\delta\otimes e^\delta)\circ\Delta Δ ∘ e δ = ( e δ ⊗ e δ ) ∘ Δ . Since e δ e^\delta e δ is the identity on S ≤ 1 ( a [ 1 ] ) S^{\leq1}(a[1]) S ≤ 1 ( a [ 1 ]) , it belongs to Aut 1 ( a ) \operatorname{Aut}_1(a) Aut 1 ( a ) . The identities exp ∘ log = id \exp\circ\log=\operatorname{id} exp ∘ log = id and log ∘ exp = id \log\circ\exp=\operatorname{id} log ∘ exp = id therefore give a bijection
log : Aut 1 ( a ) ⟶ Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) , log − 1 = exp . (6) \log:\operatorname{Aut}_1(a)\longrightarrow\operatorname{Coder}_{\geq2}(a),\qquad\log^{-1}=\exp. \tag*{(6)} log : Aut 1 ( a ) ⟶ Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) , log − 1 = exp . (6)
Taking the components of length one in log F = ( F − id ) − 1 2 ( F − id ) 2 + ⋯ \log F=(F-\operatorname{id})-\frac{1}{2}(F-\operatorname{id})^2+\cdots log F = ( F − id ) − 2 1 ( F − id ) 2 + ⋯ , (1) gives, for F ∈ Aut 1 ( a ) F\in\operatorname{Aut}_1(a) F ∈ Aut 1 ( a ) ,
( log F ) 2 ( a 1 , a 2 ) = F 2 ( a 1 , a 2 ) , (7) (\log F)_2(a_1,a_2)=F_2(a_1,a_2), \tag*{(7)} ( log F ) 2 ( a 1 , a 2 ) = F 2 ( a 1 , a 2 ) , (7)
( log F ) 3 ( a 1 , a 2 , a 3 ) = F 3 ( a 1 , a 2 , a 3 ) − 1 2 ∑ ε F 2 ( F 2 ( a i , a j ) , a k ) , (8) (\log F)_3(a_1,a_2,a_3)=F_3(a_1,a_2,a_3)-\frac{1}{2}\sum_{\varepsilon}F_2(F_2(a_i,a_j),a_k), \tag*{(8)} ( log F ) 3 ( a 1 , a 2 , a 3 ) = F 3 ( a 1 , a 2 , a 3 ) − 2 1 ε ∑ F 2 ( F 2 ( a i , a j ) , a k ) , (8)
where the sum runs over the decompositions { 1 , 2 , 3 } = { i < j } ⊔ { k } \{1,2,3\}=\{i<j\}\sqcup\{k\} { 1 , 2 , 3 } = { i < j } ⊔ { k } , and ε \varepsilon ε is the Koszul sign of a 1 a 2 a 3 ↦ a i a j a k a_1a_2a_3\mapsto a_ia_ja_k a 1 a 2 a 3 ↦ a i a j a k .
Since all series are finite on each S ≤ n ( a [ 1 ] ) S^{\leq n}(a[1]) S ≤ n ( a [ 1 ]) , identities of formal power series give, for δ , δ ′ ∈ Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) \delta,\delta'\in\operatorname{Coder}_{\geq2}(a) δ , δ ′ ∈ Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) and a coderivation Q Q Q with Q 0 = 0 Q_0=0 Q 0 = 0 ,
e δ ∘ Q ∘ e − δ = ∑ k ≥ 0 1 k ! ad δ k ( Q ) , e δ ∘ e δ ′ = e BCH ( δ , δ ′ ) . (9) \begin{aligned}
e^\delta\circ Q\circ e^{-\delta}&=\sum_{k\geq0}\frac{1}{k!}\operatorname{ad}_\delta^k(Q),\\
e^\delta\circ e^{\delta'}&=e^{\operatorname{BCH}(\delta,\delta')}. \tag*{(9)}
\end{aligned} e δ ∘ Q ∘ e − δ e δ ∘ e δ ′ = k ≥ 0 ∑ k ! 1 ad δ k ( Q ) , = e BCH ( δ , δ ′ ) . (9)
where BCH is the Baker–Campbell–Hausdorff series, and the series converge coefficientwise, since ad δ \operatorname{ad}_\delta ad δ raises the lowest non-vanishing arity by at least one.
The homotopy Poisson algebra of a coisotropic submanifold
We now recall the higher-derived-bracket construction in the formal neighbourhood of N N N . The formal setting is needed because the brackets depend on all normal derivatives of the ambient Poisson bivector.
Let I \mathcal I I be the ideal of smooth functions on ν \nu ν vanishing on its zero section. The algebra of formal functions along N N N is
O ^ = l i m ← k ≥ 1 C ∞ ( tot ( ν ) ) / I k . \widehat{\mathcal O}=\varprojlim_{k\geq1}C^\infty(\operatorname{tot}(\nu))/\mathcal I^k. O = k ≥ 1 lim C ∞ ( tot ( ν )) / I k .
We use the same symbol I \mathcal I I for the kernel of the restriction O ^ → C ∞ ( N ) \widehat{\mathcal O}\to C^\infty(N) O → C ∞ ( N ) . Let X ∙ ( ν ) \mathfrak X^\bullet(\nu) X ∙ ( ν ) be the corresponding completion of the multivector fields on ν \nu ν . In local coordinates x μ x^\mu x μ on N N N , with a frame ( e i ) (e_i) ( e i ) of ν \nu ν and dual fibre coordinates y i y^i y i , its coefficients are formal power series in y y y with coefficients smooth in x x x . Functions on N N N are identified with their pullbacks to ν \nu ν , and formal vector fields X ( ν ) \mathfrak X(\nu) X ( ν ) act as continuous derivations of O ^ \widehat{\mathcal O} O .
We write h = X ( ν ) [ 1 ] \mathfrak h=\mathfrak X(\nu)[1] h = X ( ν ) [ 1 ] , a graded Lie algebra for the Schouten bracket. Thus a k k k -vector field has degree ∣ u ∣ = k − 1 |u|=k-1 ∣ u ∣ = k − 1 in h \mathfrak h h . Our bracket convention is fixed by
[ X , f ] = X ( f ) , [ X , Y ] = X ∘ Y − Y ∘ X , (10) [X,f]=X(f),\qquad[X,Y]=X\circ Y-Y\circ X, \tag*{(10)} [ X , f ] = X ( f ) , [ X , Y ] = X ∘ Y − Y ∘ X , (10)
for formal vector fields X , Y X,Y X , Y and formal functions f f f . So [ X , u ] [X,u] [ X , u ] is the Lie derivative of u u u along X X X , and, by the Leibniz rule,
[ u , f ] = ( − 1 ) ∣ u ∣ ι d f u . (11) [u,f]=(-1)^{|u|}\iota_{df}u. \tag*{(11)} [ u , f ] = ( − 1 ) ∣ u ∣ ι df u . (11)
where ι d f ( X ∧ Y ) = X ( f ) Y − Y ( f ) X \iota_{df}(X\wedge Y)=X(f)Y-Y(f)X ι df ( X ∧ Y ) = X ( f ) Y − Y ( f ) X .
Definition 2.2. Let E \mathcal{E} E be the Euler vector field of ν \nu ν . A formal multivector field u u u has weight w w w if [ E , u ] = w u [\mathcal{E},u]=wu [ E , u ] = w u .
In coordinates, x μ x^\mu x μ and ∂ ∂ x μ \frac{\partial}{\partial x^\mu} ∂ x μ ∂ have weight 0 0 0 , y i y^i y i has weight 1 1 1 , and ∂ ∂ y i \frac{\partial}{\partial y^i} ∂ y i ∂ has weight − 1 -1 − 1 . We write u ( w ) u_{(w)} u ( w ) for the component of weight w w w of u u u , and X ≥ k ( ν ) \mathfrak{X}_{\geq k}(\nu) X ≥ k ( ν ) for the set of formal vector fields Z Z Z with Z ( w ) = 0 Z_{(w)}=0 Z ( w ) = 0 for w < k w<k w < k .
A k k k -vector field has weights ≥ − k \geq-k ≥ − k , and weights add under the Schouten bracket, so X ≥ 1 ( ν ) \mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) X ≥ 1 ( ν ) is a Lie subalgebra and ad Z \operatorname{ad}_Z ad Z raises the weight filtration for Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) Z\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) . In coordinates,
Z = Z μ ∂ ∂ x μ + Z i ∂ ∂ y i ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) ⟺ Z μ ∈ I and Z i ∈ I 2 . (12) Z=Z^\mu\frac{\partial}{\partial x^\mu}+Z^i\frac{\partial}{\partial y^i}\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu)\Longleftrightarrow Z^\mu\in\mathcal{I}\text{ and }Z^i\in\mathcal{I}^2. \tag*{(12)} Z = Z μ ∂ x μ ∂ + Z i ∂ y i ∂ ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) ⟺ Z μ ∈ I and Z i ∈ I 2 . (12)
Definition 2.3. A formal diffeomorphism φ \varphi φ of ν \nu ν along N N N is specified by a continuous unital R \mathbb{R} R -algebra automorphism φ ∗ \varphi^* φ ∗ of O ^ \widehat{\mathcal{O}} O , with ( φ ∘ φ ′ ) ∗ = φ ′ ∗ ∘ φ ∗ (\varphi\circ\varphi')^*=\varphi'^*\circ\varphi^* ( φ ∘ φ ′ ) ∗ = φ ′ ∗ ∘ φ ∗ . It is a formal change of tubular neighbourhood if φ ∗ \varphi^* φ ∗ induces the identity on O ^ / I = C ∞ ( N ) \widehat{\mathcal{O}}/\mathcal{I}=C^\infty(N) O / I = C ∞ ( N ) and on I / I 2 = C ∞ ( ν ∗ ) \mathcal{I}/\mathcal{I}^2=C^\infty(\nu^*) I / I 2 = C ∞ ( ν ∗ ) . These form a group Diff 1 ( ν ) \operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) Diff 1 ( ν ) .
In coordinates, the condition reads φ ∗ ( x μ ) − x μ ∈ I \varphi^*(x^\mu)-x^\mu\in\mathcal{I} φ ∗ ( x μ ) − x μ ∈ I and φ ∗ ( y i ) − y i ∈ I 2 \varphi^*(y^i)-y^i\in\mathcal{I}^2 φ ∗ ( y i ) − y i ∈ I 2 . If γ \gamma γ is a diffeomorphism between neighbourhoods of the zero section which is the identity on N N N and induces the identity on ν \nu ν , then f ↦ f ∘ γ f\mapsto f\circ\gamma f ↦ f ∘ γ defines an element of Diff 1 ( ν ) \operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) Diff 1 ( ν ) , the expansion of γ \gamma γ . An element φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν ) \varphi\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν ) acts on X ∙ ( ν ) \mathfrak{X}^\bullet(\nu) X ∙ ( ν ) by the automorphism φ ∗ \varphi^* φ ∗ of Gerstenhaber algebras which is φ ∗ X = φ ∗ ∘ X ∘ ( φ ∗ ) − 1 \varphi^*X=\varphi^*\circ X\circ(\varphi^*)^{-1} φ ∗ X = φ ∗ ∘ X ∘ ( φ ∗ ) − 1 on vector fields. For the expansion of γ \gamma γ , it is the pullback γ ∗ = ( γ − 1 ) ∗ \gamma^*=(\gamma^{-1})_* γ ∗ = ( γ − 1 ) ∗ of multivector fields, where γ ∗ \gamma_* γ ∗ is the pushforward.
For Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) Z\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) , we write e Z e^Z e Z for the formal diffeomorphism whose pullback on functions is the operator exp ( Z ) \exp(Z) exp ( Z ) . Accordingly, log φ \log\varphi log φ denotes the formal vector field log ( φ ∗ ) \log(\varphi^*) log ( φ ∗ ) . The next lemma justifies this notation.
Lemma 2.4. (1) For Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) Z\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) , the series e Z = ∑ k 1 k ! Z k e^Z=\sum_k\frac{1}{k!}Z^k e Z = ∑ k k ! 1 Z k converges on O ^ \widehat{\mathcal{O}} O and defines an element of Diff 1 ( ν ) \operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) Diff 1 ( ν ) .
(2) The map exp : X ≥ 1 ( ν ) → Diff 1 ( ν ) \exp:\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu)\to\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) exp : X ≥ 1 ( ν ) → Diff 1 ( ν ) is bijective, with inverse log \log log .
(3) For φ = e Z \varphi=e^Z φ = e Z and u ∈ X ∙ ( ν ) u\in\mathfrak{X}^\bullet(\nu) u ∈ X ∙ ( ν ) , one has
φ ∗ u = e ad Z u . (13) \varphi^*u=e^{\operatorname{ad}_Z}u. \tag*{(13)} φ ∗ u = e ad Z u . (13)
Proof. By (12) , Z Z Z maps I w \mathcal{I}^w I w into I w + 1 \mathcal{I}^{w+1} I w + 1 , so e Z e^Z e Z converges, is an automorphism with inverse e − Z e^{-Z} e − Z , and lies in Diff 1 ( ν ) \operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) Diff 1 ( ν ) . Conversely, for φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν ) \varphi\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν ) , writing f ∈ I w f\in\mathcal{I}^w f ∈ I w as ∑ ∣ β ∣ = w y β f β \sum_{|\beta|=w}y^\beta f_\beta ∑ ∣ β ∣ = w y β f β shows that φ ∗ − id \varphi^*-\operatorname{id} φ ∗ − id maps I w \mathcal{I}^w I w into I w + 1 \mathcal{I}^{w+1} I w + 1 . Thus log φ ∗ \log\varphi^* log φ ∗ converges. To check the derivation property, work modulo I k \mathcal{I}^k I k and write A = φ ∗ − id A=\varphi^*-\operatorname{id} A = φ ∗ − id . The finite binomial series ( id + A ) t (\operatorname{id}+A)^t ( id + A ) t is polynomial in t t t and is multiplicative for every nonnegative integer t t t , hence for every real t t t . Differentiating at t = 0 t=0 t = 0 shows that log φ ∗ \log\varphi^* log φ ∗ is a continuous derivation of O ^ \widehat{\mathcal{O}} O , hence a formal vector field determined by its values on the x μ x^\mu x μ and y i y^i y i . It lies in X ≥ 1 ( ν ) \mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) X ≥ 1 ( ν ) by (12) . For (3), both sides are automorphisms of X ∙ ( ν ) \mathfrak{X}^\bullet(\nu) X ∙ ( ν ) agreeing on functions and vector fields, by (10) .
By Definition 2.3 , ( e Z ∘ e Z ′ ) ∗ = e Z ′ e Z (e^Z\circ e^{Z'})^*=e^{Z'}e^Z ( e Z ∘ e Z ′ ) ∗ = e Z ′ e Z on O ^ \widehat{\mathcal{O}} O , so
e Z ∘ e Z ′ = e BCH ( Z ′ , Z ) . (14) e^Z\circ e^{Z'}=e^{\operatorname{BCH}(Z',Z)}. \tag*{(14)} e Z ∘ e Z ′ = e BCH ( Z ′ , Z ) . (14)
and the Lie algebra of Diff 1 ( ν ) \operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) Diff 1 ( ν ) is X ≥ 1 ( ν ) \mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) X ≥ 1 ( ν ) with the opposite bracket.
A tubular neighbourhood of N N N is an open embedding ψ \psi ψ into M M M of a neighbourhood of the zero section of ν \nu ν which is the identity on N N N and induces the identity on ν \nu ν . We write σ ψ ∈ X 2 ( ν ) \sigma_\psi\in\mathfrak{X}^2(\nu) σ ψ ∈ X 2 ( ν ) for the expansion along N N N of the pullback ψ ∗ σ = ( ψ − 1 ) ∗ σ \psi^*\sigma=(\psi^{-1})_*\sigma ψ ∗ σ = ( ψ − 1 ) ∗ σ . For two tubular neighbourhoods, the transition φ ψ ψ ′ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν ) \varphi_{\psi\psi'}\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) φ ψ ψ ′ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν ) is the expansion of ψ − 1 ∘ ψ ′ \psi^{-1}\circ\psi' ψ − 1 ∘ ψ ′ , and
φ ψ ψ ′ ∗ σ ψ = σ ψ ′ . (15) \varphi_{\psi\psi'}^*\sigma_\psi=\sigma_{\psi'}. \tag*{(15)} φ ψ ψ ′ ∗ σ ψ = σ ψ ′ . (15)
We write
Diff 1 ( ψ , ψ ′ ) = { φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν ) : φ ∗ σ ψ = σ ψ ′ } . \operatorname{Diff}_1(\psi,\psi')=\{\varphi\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu):\varphi^*\sigma_\psi=\sigma_{\psi'}\}. Diff 1 ( ψ , ψ ′ ) = { φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν ) : φ ∗ σ ψ = σ ψ ′ } .
We now embed a [ 1 ] \mathfrak{a}[1] a [ 1 ] in h \mathfrak{h} h , as in [7 §2.6] and [8 §4.1] . A section a = a i 1 ⋯ i k ( x ) e i 1 ∧ ⋯ ∧ e i k a=a^{i_1\cdots i_k}(x)e_{i_1}\wedge\cdots\wedge e_{i_k} a = a i 1 ⋯ i k ( x ) e i 1 ∧ ⋯ ∧ e i k of Λ k ν \Lambda^k\nu Λ k ν is identified with the vertical k k k -vector field a i 1 ⋯ i k ( x ) ∂ ∂ y i 1 ∧ ⋯ ∧ ∂ ∂ y i k a^{i_1\cdots i_k}(x)\frac{\partial}{\partial y^{i_1}}\wedge\cdots\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y^{i_k}} a i 1 ⋯ i k ( x ) ∂ y i 1 ∂ ∧ ⋯ ∧ ∂ y i k ∂ . Let P : h → a [ 1 ] P:\mathfrak{h}\to\mathfrak{a}[1] P : h → a [ 1 ] be the restriction to N N N followed by the projection onto Λ ∙ ν \Lambda^\bullet\nu Λ ∙ ν , so that in coordinates P P P sets y = 0 y=0 y = 0 and removes the terms containing some ∂ ∂ x μ \frac{\partial}{\partial x^\mu} ∂ x μ ∂ , and let p = ker P \mathfrak{p}=\ker P p = ker P . Then ( h , a [ 1 ] , P ) (\mathfrak{h},\mathfrak{a}[1],P) ( h , a [ 1 ] , P ) is a V-algebra [8 Definition 2.3] : a [ 1 ] \mathfrak{a}[1] a [ 1 ] is an abelian subalgebra, p \mathfrak{p} p is a subalgebra, and h = a [ 1 ] ⊕ p \mathfrak{h}=\mathfrak{a}[1]\oplus\mathfrak{p} h = a [ 1 ] ⊕ p .
Definition 2.5. For u ∈ h u\in\mathfrak{h} u ∈ h , let D u \mathcal{D}_u D u be the coderivation of S ( a [ 1 ] ) S(\mathfrak{a}[1]) S ( a [ 1 ]) with Taylor coefficients
( D u ) 0 = P ( u ) , ( D u ) n ( a 1 , … , a n ) = P [ ⋯ [ [ u , a 1 ] , a 2 ] , … , a n ] , n ≥ 1. (\mathcal{D}_u)_0=P(u),\qquad(\mathcal{D}_u)_n(a_1,\ldots,a_n)=P[\cdots[[u,a_1],a_2],\ldots,a_n],\quad n\geq1. ( D u ) 0 = P ( u ) , ( D u ) n ( a 1 , … , a n ) = P [ ⋯ [[ u , a 1 ] , a 2 ] , … , a n ] , n ≥ 1.
These coefficients are graded symmetric, since a [ 1 ] \mathfrak{a}[1] a [ 1 ] is abelian, and D u \mathcal{D}u D u has degree ∣ u ∣ |u| ∣ u ∣ . For the frame element e i e_i e i and the coordinate x μ x^\mu x μ , the brackets with e i e_i e i and x μ x^\mu x μ are, by (11) ,
[ u , e i ] = − ∂ u ∂ y i , [ u , x μ ] = ( − 1 ) ∣ u ∣ ι d x μ u , (16) [u,e_i] = -\frac{\partial u}{\partial y^i}, \qquad[u,x^\mu] = (-1)^{|u|}\iota_{dx^\mu}u, \tag*{(16)} [ u , e i ] = − ∂ y i ∂ u , [ u , x μ ] = ( − 1 ) ∣ u ∣ ι d x μ u , (16)
where ∂ u ∂ y i \frac{\partial u}{\partial y^i} ∂ y i ∂ u is the derivative of the coefficients of u u u . We use two results of Voronov. For every odd u ∈ h u\in\mathfrak{h} u ∈ h , [ D u , D u ] = D [ u , u ] [\mathcal{D}u,\mathcal{D}u]=\mathcal{D}[u,u] [ D u , D u ] = D [ u , u ] [32 Theorem 1] . For u , v ∈ p u,v\in\mathfrak{p} u , v ∈ p ,
D [ u , v ] = [ D u , D v ] (17) \mathcal{D}[u,v]=[\mathcal{D}u,\mathcal{D}v] \tag*{(17)} D [ u , v ] = [ D u , D v ] (17)
[33 §5, Theorem 3] , since D u \mathcal{D}u D u is the coderivation attached by Voronov to the derivation ad u \operatorname{ad}_u ad u of h \mathfrak{h} h preserving p \mathfrak{p} p .
We write Coder ( S ( a [ 1 ] ) ) \operatorname{Coder}(\mathcal{S}(\mathfrak{a}[1])) Coder ( S ( a [ 1 ])) for the space of coderivations of S ( a [ 1 ] ) \mathcal{S}(\mathfrak{a}[1]) S ( a [ 1 ]) , and MultiDer ( a ) \operatorname{MultiDer}(\mathfrak{a}) MultiDer ( a ) for the space of coderivations of degree 0 0 0 whose coefficients of positive arity are multiderivations. Since a [ 1 ] \mathfrak{a}[1] a [ 1 ] is abelian and P P P is multiplicative, the Leibniz rule of the Schouten bracket shows that ( D u ) n (\mathcal{D}u)_n ( D u ) n is a multiderivation of a \mathfrak{a} a of degree ∣ u ∣ |u| ∣ u ∣ , for every u ∈ h u\in\mathfrak{h} u ∈ h and n ≥ 1 n\geq1 n ≥ 1 . The Fourier transform of Cattaneo and Felder [7 Theorem 4.1 and Proposition 4.4] identifies formal multivectors with their higher derived brackets. In the form needed here, (16) shows that the coefficients of D u \mathcal{D}u D u determine all normal derivatives of the coefficients of u u u . Consequently, D : h → Coder ( S ( a [ 1 ] ) ) \mathcal{D}:\mathfrak{h}\to\operatorname{Coder}(\mathcal{S}(\mathfrak{a}[1])) D : h → Coder ( S ( a [ 1 ])) is injective and restricts to a bijection
D : X ( ν ) ⟶ MultiDer ( a ) . (18) \mathcal{D}:\mathfrak{X}(\nu)\longrightarrow\operatorname{MultiDer}(\mathfrak{a}). \tag*{(18)} D : X ( ν ) ⟶ MultiDer ( a ) . (18)
With our conventions, (16) and [ Z , x μ ] = Z μ [Z,x^\mu]=Z^\mu [ Z , x μ ] = Z μ give, for Z = Z μ ∂ ∂ x μ + Z i ∂ ∂ y i Z=Z^\mu\frac{\partial}{\partial x^\mu}+Z^i\frac{\partial}{\partial y^i} Z = Z μ ∂ x μ ∂ + Z i ∂ y i ∂ ,
( D Z ) n ( e i 1 , … , e i n ) = ( − 1 ) n ∂ n Z i ∂ y i 1 ⋯ ∂ y i n ( x , 0 ) e i , (19) (\mathcal{D}Z)_n(e_{i_1},\ldots,e_{i_n})=(-1)^n\frac{\partial^n Z^i}{\partial y^{i_1}\cdots\partial y^{i_n}}(x,0)e_i, \tag*{(19)} ( D Z ) n ( e i 1 , … , e i n ) = ( − 1 ) n ∂ y i 1 ⋯ ∂ y i n ∂ n Z i ( x , 0 ) e i , (19)
( D Z ) n ( e i 1 , … , e i n − 1 , x μ ) = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ∂ n − 1 Z μ ∂ y i 1 ⋯ ∂ y i n − 1 ( x , 0 ) . (20) (\mathcal{D}Z)_n(e_{i_1},\ldots,e_{i_{n-1}},x^\mu)=(-1)^{n-1}\frac{\partial^{n-1}Z^\mu}{\partial y^{i_1}\cdots\partial y^{i_{n-1}}}(x,0). \tag*{(20)} ( D Z ) n ( e i 1 , … , e i n − 1 , x μ ) = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ∂ y i 1 ⋯ ∂ y i n − 1 ∂ n − 1 Z μ ( x , 0 ) . (20)
Since a multiderivation is determined by its values on the x μ x^\mu x μ and the e i e_i e i , which are symmetric in the frame arguments, these formulas also show that every element of MultiDer ( a ) \operatorname{MultiDer}(\mathfrak{a}) MultiDer ( a ) is of the form D Z \mathcal{D}Z D Z , the local vector fields Z Z Z gluing by injectivity of D \mathcal{D} D .
The weights of u u u control the arities of D u \mathcal{D}u D u .
Lemma 2.6. Let u ∈ h u\in\mathfrak{h} u ∈ h be homogeneous of degree d d d . Then ( D u ) n = ( D u ( n − 1 − d ) ) n (\mathcal{D}u)_n=(\mathcal{D}u_{(n-1-d)})_n ( D u ) n = ( D u ( n − 1 − d ) ) n for every n ≥ 0 n\geq0 n ≥ 0 . In particular, the following hold.
For a vector field Z Z Z , ( D Z ) n (\mathcal{D}Z)_n ( D Z ) n depends only on Z ( n − 1 ) Z_{(n-1)} Z ( n − 1 ) , and X ≥ 1 ( ν ) = { Z ∈ X ( ν ) : ( D Z ) 0 = ( D Z ) 1 = 0 } \mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu)=\{Z\in\mathfrak{X}(\nu):(\mathcal{D}Z)_0=(\mathcal{D}Z)_1=0\} X ≥ 1 ( ν ) = { Z ∈ X ( ν ) : ( D Z ) 0 = ( D Z ) 1 = 0 } . Hence D \mathcal{D} D is an injective morphism of Lie algebras from X ≥ 1 ( ν ) \mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) X ≥ 1 ( ν ) to Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) \operatorname{Coder}_{\geq2}(\mathfrak{a}) Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) , with image MultiDer ( a ) ∩ Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) \operatorname{MultiDer}(\mathfrak{a})\cap\operatorname{Coder}_{\geq2}(\mathfrak{a}) MultiDer ( a ) ∩ Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) .
For a bivector π \pi π , ( D π ) n (\mathcal{D}\pi)_n ( D π ) n depends only on π ( n − 2 ) \pi_{(n-2)} π ( n − 2 ) , and P ( π ) = 0 P(\pi)=0 P ( π ) = 0 if and only if π ( − 2 ) = 0 \pi_{(-2)}=0 π ( − 2 ) = 0 . In particular, σ ψ \sigma_\psi σ ψ has weight ≥ − 1 \geq-1 ≥ − 1 , since P ( σ ψ ) = 1 2 σ ψ ( d y j , d y k ) ∣ N e j ∧ e k = 0 P(\sigma_\psi)=\frac{1}{2}\sigma_\psi(dy^j,dy^k)|_N e_j\wedge e_k=0 P ( σ ψ ) = 2 1 σ ψ ( d y j , d y k ) ∣ N e j ∧ e k = 0 for N N N coisotropic [1 Lemma 5.17] .
Proof. A section of ⋀ k ν \bigwedge^k\nu ⋀ k ν has degree k − 1 k-1 k − 1 and weight − k -k − k , and P P P only retains terms of degree m − 1 m-1 m − 1 and weight − m -m − m . Counting degrees and weights, P [ ⋯ [ u ( w ) , a 1 ] , … , a n ] = 0 P[\cdots[u_{(w)},a_1],\ldots,a_n]=0 P [ ⋯ [ u ( w ) , a 1 ] , … , a n ] = 0 unless w = n − 1 − d w=n-1-d w = n − 1 − d . For (1), d = 0 d=0 d = 0 , so ( D Z ) 0 (\mathcal{D}Z)_0 ( D Z ) 0 and ( D Z ) 1 (\mathcal{D}Z)_1 ( D Z ) 1 depend only on Z ( − 1 ) Z_{(-1)} Z ( − 1 ) and Z ( 0 ) Z_{(0)} Z ( 0 ) , and vanish exactly when Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) Z\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) by (18) . Since X ≥ 1 ( ν ) ⊂ p \mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu)\subset\mathfrak{p} X ≥ 1 ( ν ) ⊂ p by (12) , the rest follows from (17) and (18) . For (2), d = 1 d=1 d = 1 and P ( π ) = π ( − 2 ) P(\pi)=\pi_{(-2)} P ( π ) = π ( − 2 ) . □
In particular, D \mathcal{D} D is continuous from the weight filtration to the arity filtration, so it commutes with convergent Lie series in X ≥ 1 ( ν ) \mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) X ≥ 1 ( ν ) .
For a formal Poisson bivector π \pi π with P ( π ) = 0 P(\pi)=0 P ( π ) = 0 , we set Q π = D π Q_\pi=\mathcal{D}\pi Q π = D π , and Q ψ = Q σ ψ Q_\psi=Q_{\sigma_\psi} Q ψ = Q σ ψ . By Voronov’s identity, Q π ∘ Q π = 1 2 D [ π , π ] = 0 Q_\pi\circ Q_\pi=\frac{1}{2}\mathcal{D}[\pi,\pi]=0 Q π ∘ Q π = 2 1 D [ π , π ] = 0 , so Q π Q_\pi Q π is a flat L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -structure on a [ 1 ] \mathfrak{a}[1] a [ 1 ] , and a flat P ∞ P_\infty P ∞ -structure on a \mathfrak{a} a , since the ( D u ) n (\mathcal{D}u)_n ( D u ) n are multiderivations. On the unshifted algebra, we set
λ n ψ ( a 1 , … , a n ) = ( − 1 ) 1 + ∑ i = 1 n ( n − i ) ∣ a i ∣ ( Q ψ ) n ( a 1 , … , a n ) . (21) \lambda^\psi_n(a_1,\ldots,a_n)=(-1)^{1+\sum_{i=1}^{n}(n-i)|a_i|}(Q_\psi)_n(a_1,\ldots,a_n). \tag*{(21)} λ n ψ ( a 1 , … , a n ) = ( − 1 ) 1 + ∑ i = 1 n ( n − i ) ∣ a i ∣ ( Q ψ ) n ( a 1 , … , a n ) . (21)
These maps have degree 2 − n 2-n 2 − n , are graded antisymmetric, and are derivations in the last argument. We call ( a , λ ψ ) (\mathfrak{a},\lambda^\psi) ( a , λ ψ ) the homotopy Poisson algebra of ( N , ψ ) (N,\psi) ( N , ψ ) , and write λ n \lambda_n λ n for λ n ψ \lambda^\psi_n λ n ψ when ψ \psi ψ is fixed.
The brackets are explicit in coordinates. Let { f , g } = σ ψ ( d f , d g ) \{f,g\}=\sigma_\psi(df,dg) { f , g } = σ ψ ( df , d g ) . For f , g ∈ C ∞ ( N ) f,g\in C^\infty(N) f , g ∈ C ∞ ( N ) , (16) and (11) give
λ n ( e i 1 , … , e i n − 2 , f , g ) = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ∂ n − 2 { f , g } ∂ y i 1 ⋯ ∂ y i n − 2 ∣ y = 0 , n ≥ 2 , λ n ( e i 1 , … , e i n − 1 , f ) = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ∂ n − 1 { f , y j } ∂ y i 1 ⋯ ∂ y i n − 1 ∣ y = 0 e j , n ≥ 1 , λ n ( e i 1 , … , e i n ) = ( − 1 ) n − 1 2 ∂ n { y j , y k } ∂ y i 1 ⋯ ∂ y i n ∣ y = 0 e j ∧ e k , n ≥ 0. (22) \begin{aligned}
\lambda_n(e_{i_1},\ldots,e_{i_{n-2}},f,g)&=(-1)^{n-1}\left.\frac{\partial^{n-2}\{f,g\}}{\partial y^{i_1}\cdots\partial y^{i_{n-2}}}\right|_{y=0}, && n\geq2,\\
\lambda_n(e_{i_1},\ldots,e_{i_{n-1}},f)&=(-1)^{n-1}\left.\frac{\partial^{n-1}\{f,y^j\}}{\partial y^{i_1}\cdots\partial y^{i_{n-1}}}\right|_{y=0}e_j, && n\geq1,\\
\lambda_n(e_{i_1},\ldots,e_{i_n})&=\frac{(-1)^{n-1}}{2}\left.\frac{\partial^n\{y^j,y^k\}}{\partial y^{i_1}\cdots\partial y^{i_n}}\right|_{y=0}e_j\wedge e_k, && n\geq0. \tag*{(22)}
\end{aligned} λ n ( e i 1 , … , e i n − 2 , f , g ) λ n ( e i 1 , … , e i n − 1 , f ) λ n ( e i 1 , … , e i n ) = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ∂ y i 1 ⋯ ∂ y i n − 2 ∂ n − 2 { f , g } y = 0 , = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ∂ y i 1 ⋯ ∂ y i n − 1 ∂ n − 1 { f , y j } y = 0 e j , = 2 ( − 1 ) n − 1 ∂ y i 1 ⋯ ∂ y i n ∂ n { y j , y k } y = 0 e j ∧ e k , n ≥ 2 , n ≥ 1 , n ≥ 0. (22)
These are the formulas of [7 Proposition 2.1] up to the sign ( − 1 ) m + 1 (-1)^{m+1} ( − 1 ) m + 1 , where m m m is the number of arguments in C ∞ ( N ) C^\infty(N) C ∞ ( N ) .
Remark 2.7. The differential λ 1 ψ \lambda^\psi_1 λ 1 ψ does not depend on ψ \psi ψ , and − λ 1 ψ -\lambda^\psi_1 − λ 1 ψ is the Chevalley–Eilenberg differential of the conormal Lie algebroid T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ with the conventions of § 3.1 [8 Remark 4.2] . Indeed, both are derivations, and for f ∈ C ∞ ( N ) f\in C^\infty(N) f ∈ C ∞ ( N ) and ξ ∈ T N ∘ \xi\in TN^\circ ξ ∈ T N ∘ the second formula of (22) gives ⟨ λ 1 ψ ( f ) , ξ ⟩ = σ ( d f , ξ ) = − σ ( ξ , d f ) \langle\lambda^\psi_1(f),\xi\rangle=\sigma(df,\xi)=-\sigma(\xi,df) ⟨ λ 1 ψ ( f ) , ξ ⟩ = σ ( df , ξ ) = − σ ( ξ , df ) , and similarly on the frame e i e_i e i . So the algebra automorphism a ↦ ( − 1 ) deg a a a\mapsto(-1)^{\deg a}a a ↦ ( − 1 ) d e g a a of a \mathfrak a a identifies ( a , λ 1 ψ ) (\mathfrak a,\lambda^\psi_1) ( a , λ 1 ψ ) with the Chevalley–Eilenberg complex of T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ .
Changes of tubular neighbourhood
We now integrate D \mathcal D D to a map Φ : Diff 1 ( ν ) → Aut 1 ( a ) \Phi:\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu)\to\operatorname{Aut}_1(\mathfrak a) Φ : Diff 1 ( ν ) → Aut 1 ( a ) and prove Theorem A. By Lemma 2.6(1), (14) , (6) and Lemma 2.4, we may set
Φ ( φ ) = exp ( D log φ ) ∈ Aut 1 ( a ) , that is, Φ ( e Z ) = e D Z . (23) \Phi(\varphi)=\exp(\mathcal D_{\log\varphi})\in\operatorname{Aut}_1(\mathfrak a),\qquad\text{that is,}\qquad\Phi(e^Z)=e^{\mathcal D_Z}. \tag*{(23)} Φ ( φ ) = exp ( D l o g φ ) ∈ Aut 1 ( a ) , that is, Φ ( e Z ) = e D Z . (23)
Proposition 2.8. Let φ , φ ′ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν ) \varphi,\varphi'\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) φ , φ ′ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν ) , and let π \pi π be a formal Poisson bivector with P ( π ) = 0 P(\pi)=0 P ( π ) = 0 .
Φ ( φ ) ∘ Q π ∘ Φ ( φ ) − 1 = Q φ ∗ π \Phi(\varphi)\circ Q_\pi\circ\Phi(\varphi)^{-1}=Q_{\varphi_*\pi} Φ ( φ ) ∘ Q π ∘ Φ ( φ ) − 1 = Q φ ∗ π .
Φ ( φ ∘ φ ′ ) = Φ ( φ ′ ) ∘ Φ ( φ ) \Phi(\varphi\circ\varphi')=\Phi(\varphi')\circ\Phi(\varphi) Φ ( φ ∘ φ ′ ) = Φ ( φ ′ ) ∘ Φ ( φ ) .
Φ \Phi Φ is injective.
If φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ψ , ψ ′ ) \varphi\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\psi,\psi') φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ψ , ψ ′ ) , then Φ ( φ ) \Phi(\varphi) Φ ( φ ) is an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism ( a , λ ψ ) → ( a , λ ψ ′ ) (\mathfrak a,\lambda^\psi)\to(\mathfrak a,\lambda^{\psi'}) ( a , λ ψ ) → ( a , λ ψ ′ ) .
Proof. Let Z = log φ Z=\log\varphi Z = log φ and Z ′ = log φ ′ Z'=\log\varphi' Z ′ = log φ ′ . By Lemma 2.6(2), π \pi π has weight ≥ − 1 \geq-1 ≥ − 1 , so ad Z k π \operatorname{ad}_Z^k\pi ad Z k π has weight ≥ k − 1 \geq k-1 ≥ k − 1 and D ad Z k π \mathcal D_{\operatorname{ad}_Z^k\pi} D ad Z k π vanishes in arities ≤ k \leq k ≤ k . Since Z , π ∈ p Z,\pi\in\mathfrak p Z , π ∈ p , (9) , (17) and (13) give
Φ ( φ ) ∘ D π ∘ Φ ( φ ) − 1 = ∑ k ≥ 0 1 k ! ad D Z k ( D π ) = ∑ k ≥ 0 1 k ! D ad Z k π = D e ad Z π = D φ ∗ π . \begin{aligned}
\Phi(\varphi)\circ\mathcal D_\pi\circ\Phi(\varphi)^{-1}
&=\sum_{k\geq0}\frac{1}{k!}\operatorname{ad}_{\mathcal D_Z}^k(\mathcal D_\pi)\\
&=\sum_{k\geq0}\frac{1}{k!}\mathcal D_{\operatorname{ad}_Z^k\pi}\\
&=\mathcal D_{e^{\operatorname{ad}_Z}\pi}\\
&=\mathcal D_{\varphi_*\pi}.
\end{aligned} Φ ( φ ) ∘ D π ∘ Φ ( φ ) − 1 = k ≥ 0 ∑ k ! 1 ad D Z k ( D π ) = k ≥ 0 ∑ k ! 1 D ad Z k π = D e ad Z π = D φ ∗ π .
and P ( φ ∗ π ) = 0 P(\varphi_*\pi)=0 P ( φ ∗ π ) = 0 since φ ∗ π \varphi_*\pi φ ∗ π has weight ≥ − 1 \geq-1 ≥ − 1 . For (2), (14) , (9) and (17) give
Φ ( φ ′ ) ∘ Φ ( φ ) = e D Z ′ e D Z = e BCH ( D Z ′ , D Z ) = e D BCH ( Z ′ , Z ) = Φ ( φ ∘ φ ′ ) . \Phi(\varphi')\circ\Phi(\varphi)=e^{\mathcal D_{Z'}}e^{\mathcal D_Z}=e^{\operatorname{BCH}(\mathcal D_{Z'},\mathcal D_Z)}=e^{\mathcal D_{\operatorname{BCH}(Z',Z)}}=\Phi(\varphi\circ\varphi'). Φ ( φ ′ ) ∘ Φ ( φ ) = e D Z ′ e D Z = e BCH ( D Z ′ , D Z ) = e D BCH ( Z ′ , Z ) = Φ ( φ ∘ φ ′ ) .
Part (3) follows from (6) , (18) and Lemma 2.4, and (4) from (1) with π = σ ψ \pi=\sigma_\psi π = σ ψ . □
Corollary 2.9. For tubular neighbourhoods ψ , ψ ′ , ψ ′ ′ \psi,\psi',\psi'' ψ , ψ ′ , ψ ′′ , the map Φ ( φ ψ ψ ′ ) \Phi(\varphi_{\psi\psi'}) Φ ( φ ψ ψ ′ ) is an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism ( a , λ ψ ) → ( a , λ ψ ′ ) (\mathfrak a,\lambda^\psi)\to(\mathfrak a,\lambda^{\psi'}) ( a , λ ψ ) → ( a , λ ψ ′ ) with identity linear part. These isomorphisms satisfy
Φ ( φ ψ ′ ψ ′ ′ ) ∘ Φ ( φ ψ ψ ′ ) = Φ ( φ ψ ψ ′ ′ ) . \Phi(\varphi_{\psi'\psi''})\circ\Phi(\varphi_{\psi\psi'})=\Phi(\varphi_{\psi\psi''}). Φ ( φ ψ ′ ψ ′′ ) ∘ Φ ( φ ψ ψ ′ ) = Φ ( φ ψ ψ ′′ ) .
Proof. This follows from (15) , Proposition 2.8(2) and (4), and φ ψ ψ ′ ′ = φ ψ ψ ′ ∘ φ ψ ′ ψ ′ ′ \varphi_{\psi\psi''}=\varphi_{\psi\psi'}\circ\varphi_{\psi'\psi''} φ ψ ψ ′′ = φ ψ ψ ′ ∘ φ ψ ′ ψ ′′ . □
We next compare Φ \Phi Φ with the L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphisms attached by Cattaneo and Schätz to isotopies of tubular neighbourhoods [8 ] . A family ( φ τ ) τ ∈ [ 0 , 1 ] (\varphi_\tau)_{\tau\in[0,1]} ( φ τ ) τ ∈ [ 0 , 1 ] in Diff 1 ( ν ) \operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) Diff 1 ( ν ) is smooth if, in coordinates, the coefficients of φ ∗ ( x i ) \varphi_*(x^i) φ ∗ ( x i ) and φ ∗ ( y i ) \varphi_*(y^i) φ ∗ ( y i ) depend smoothly on ( τ , x ) (\tau,x) ( τ , x ) , and similarly for families of multidifferential operators. We use the formula for the derivative of the exponential map [28 ]
( d d τ e B τ ) ∘ e − B τ = ∑ k ≥ 0 1 ( k + 1 ) ! ad B τ k ( d d τ B τ ) . (24) \left(\frac{d}{d\tau}e^{B_\tau}\right)\circ e^{-B_\tau}
=\sum_{k\geq0}\frac{1}{(k+1)!}\operatorname{ad}_{B_\tau}^k\left(\frac{d}{d\tau}B_\tau\right). \tag*{(24)} ( d τ d e B τ ) ∘ e − B τ = k ≥ 0 ∑ ( k + 1 )! 1 ad B τ k ( d τ d B τ ) . (24)
for a smooth family of operators B τ B_\tau B τ which either lowers an exhaustive increasing filtration or raises a complete decreasing filtration by at least one step. Indeed, all series are then finite on each filtration step, respectively modulo each filtration step, and the usual proof applies.
Lemma 2.10. Let ( φ τ ) (\varphi_\tau) ( φ τ ) be a smooth family in Diff 1 ( ν ) \operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) Diff 1 ( ν ) with φ 0 = id \varphi_0=\operatorname{id} φ 0 = id , and Z τ = log φ τ Z_\tau=\log\varphi_\tau Z τ = log φ τ . Then Y τ = ( d d τ φ τ ∗ ) ∘ ( φ τ ∗ ) − 1 Y_\tau=\left(\frac{d}{d\tau}\varphi_\tau^*\right)\circ(\varphi_\tau^*)^{-1} Y τ = ( d τ d φ τ ∗ ) ∘ ( φ τ ∗ ) − 1 is the vector field
Y τ = ∑ k ≥ 0 1 ( k + 1 ) ! ad Z τ k ( d Z τ d τ ) ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) , Y_\tau=\sum_{k\geq0}\frac{1}{(k+1)!}\operatorname{ad}_{Z_\tau}^{k}\left(\frac{dZ_\tau}{d\tau}\right)\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu), Y τ = k ≥ 0 ∑ ( k + 1 )! 1 ad Z τ k ( d τ d Z τ ) ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) , d d τ φ τ ∗ = ad Y τ φ τ ∗ on h . \frac{d}{d\tau}\varphi_\tau^*=\operatorname{ad}_{Y_\tau}\varphi_\tau^*\quad\text{on }\mathfrak{h}. d τ d φ τ ∗ = ad Y τ φ τ ∗ on h .
Proof. Each weight component of log φ τ ∗ \log\varphi_\tau^* log φ τ ∗ is a polynomial in finitely many jets of φ τ ∗ ( x μ ) \varphi_\tau^*(x^\mu) φ τ ∗ ( x μ ) and φ τ ∗ ( y i ) \varphi_\tau^*(y^i) φ τ ∗ ( y i ) , so Z τ Z_\tau Z τ is smooth in τ \tau τ . On O ^ \widehat{\mathcal{O}} O , φ τ ∗ = e Z τ \varphi_\tau^*=e^{Z_\tau} φ τ ∗ = e Z τ and Z τ Z_\tau Z τ raises the weight filtration, so (24) gives Y τ ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) Y_\tau\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) Y τ ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) , a closed Lie subalgebra. On h \mathfrak{h} h , φ τ ∗ = e ad Z τ \varphi_\tau^*=e^{\operatorname{ad}_{Z_\tau}} φ τ ∗ = e ad Z τ by (13) , and (24) with B τ = ad Z τ B_\tau=\operatorname{ad}_{Z_\tau} B τ = ad Z τ gives ad Y τ \operatorname{ad}_{Y_\tau} ad Y τ , since ad \operatorname{ad} ad is a morphism of Lie algebras. □
Let ψ τ = ψ ∘ γ τ \psi_\tau=\psi\circ\gamma_\tau ψ τ = ψ ∘ γ τ be an isotopy of tubular neighbourhoods, with γ 0 = id \gamma_0=\operatorname{id} γ 0 = id , and let φ τ \varphi_\tau φ τ be the expansion of γ τ \gamma_\tau γ τ . By (15) and Lemma 2.10, the automorphisms φ τ ∗ \varphi_\tau^* φ τ ∗ carry σ ψ \sigma_\psi σ ψ to σ ψ τ \sigma_{\psi_\tau} σ ψ τ , with generator ad Y τ \operatorname{ad}_{Y_\tau} ad Y τ in the sense of [8 eq.(7)] . Since Y τ ∈ p Y_\tau\in\mathfrak{p} Y τ ∈ p , the derivation ad Y τ \operatorname{ad}_{Y_\tau} ad Y τ preserves p \mathfrak{p} p , which is condition (9) of [8 ] . The Cauchy problem (10) of [8 ] has only the zero solution, since P [ Y τ , a ] = ( D Y τ ) 1 ( a ) = 0 P[Y_\tau,a]=(DY_\tau)_1(a)=0 P [ Y τ , a ] = ( D Y τ ) 1 ( a ) = 0 . So the L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism of [8 Theorems 3.2 and 4.3] attached to the isotopy is R 1 R_1 R 1 , where R τ R_\tau R τ solves the Cauchy problem [8 eq.(14)]
d d τ R τ = D Y τ ∘ R τ , R 0 = id . (25) \frac{d}{d\tau}R_\tau= D_{Y_\tau}\circ R_\tau,\qquad R_0=\operatorname{id}. \tag*{(25)} d τ d R τ = D Y τ ∘ R τ , R 0 = id . (25)
Proposition 2.11. Let ( φ τ ) (\varphi_\tau) ( φ τ ) be a smooth family in Diff 1 ( ν ) \operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu) Diff 1 ( ν ) with φ 0 = id \varphi_0=\operatorname{id} φ 0 = id . The solution of (25) is R τ = Φ ( φ τ ) R_\tau=\Phi(\varphi_\tau) R τ = Φ ( φ τ ) . In particular, the Cattaneo–Schätz isomorphism of an isotopy is Φ ( φ 1 ) \Phi(\varphi_1) Φ ( φ 1 ) , and it depends only on φ 1 \varphi_1 φ 1 .
Proof. By Lemma 2.10, (17) and Lemma 2.6,
D Y τ = ∑ k ≥ 0 1 ( k + 1 ) ! ad D Z τ k ( d d τ D Z τ ) . D_{Y_\tau}=\sum_{k\geq0}\frac{1}{(k+1)!}\operatorname{ad}_{D_{Z_\tau}}^{k}\left(\frac{d}{d\tau}D_{Z_\tau}\right). D Y τ = k ≥ 0 ∑ ( k + 1 )! 1 ad D Z τ k ( d τ d D Z τ ) .
By (24) on S ( a [ 1 ] ) S(\mathfrak{a}[1]) S ( a [ 1 ]) with B τ = D Z τ B_\tau=D_{Z_\tau} B τ = D Z τ , which lowers the length filtration, this is ( d d τ e D Z τ ) ∘ e − D Z τ \left(\frac{d}{d\tau}e^{D_{Z_\tau}}\right)\circ e^{-D_{Z_\tau}} ( d τ d e D Z τ ) ∘ e − D Z τ . So Φ ( φ τ ) \Phi(\varphi_\tau) Φ ( φ τ ) solves (25) , and the solution is unique by [8 Proposition 3.4] . □
An L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism F : ( a , λ ψ ) → ( a , λ ψ ′ ) F:(\mathfrak{a},\lambda^\psi)\to(\mathfrak{a},\lambda^{\psi'}) F : ( a , λ ψ ) → ( a , λ ψ ′ ) is induced by a change of tubular neighbourhood if F = Φ ( φ ) F=\Phi(\varphi) F = Φ ( φ ) for some φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ψ , ψ ′ ) \varphi\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\psi,\psi') φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ψ , ψ ′ ) .
Proposition 2.12. Let F : ( a , λ ψ ) → ( a , λ ψ ′ ) F:(\mathfrak{a},\lambda^\psi)\to(\mathfrak{a},\lambda^{\psi'}) F : ( a , λ ψ ) → ( a , λ ψ ′ ) be an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism. The following are equivalent.
F F F is induced by a change of tubular neighbourhood.
F = e D Z F=e^{D_Z} F = e D Z for some Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) Z\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) .
F 1 = id F_1=\operatorname{id} F 1 = id , and every Taylor coefficient of positive arity of log F \log F log F is a multiderivation of a \mathfrak{a} a .
In that case, the element φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ψ , ψ ′ ) \varphi\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\psi,\psi') φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ψ , ψ ′ ) with F = Φ ( φ ) F=\Phi(\varphi) F = Φ ( φ ) is unique.
Proof. By definition, (1) implies (2), and (2) implies (3) by Lemma 2.6(1) and (6) . Assume (3). Then F ∈ Aut 1 ( a ) F\in\operatorname{Aut}_1(\mathfrak{a}) F ∈ Aut 1 ( a ) and log F ∈ MultiDer ( a ) ∩ Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) \log F\in\operatorname{MultiDer}(\mathfrak{a})\cap\operatorname{Coder}_{\geq2}(\mathfrak{a}) log F ∈ MultiDer ( a ) ∩ Coder ≥ 2 ( a ) , so log F = D Z \log F=D_Z log F = D Z for a unique Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) Z\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) by Lemma 2.6(1). Set φ = e Z \varphi=e^Z φ = e Z , so that F = Φ ( φ ) F=\Phi(\varphi) F = Φ ( φ ) . Since F F F is an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism, Proposition 2.8 (1) gives
D φ ∗ σ ψ = F ∘ Q ψ ∘ F − 1 = Q ψ ′ = D σ ψ ′ . D_{\varphi^*\sigma_\psi}=F\circ Q_\psi\circ F^{-1}=Q_{\psi'}=D_{\sigma_{\psi'}}. D φ ∗ σ ψ = F ∘ Q ψ ∘ F − 1 = Q ψ ′ = D σ ψ ′ .
Injectivity in (18) therefore gives φ ∗ σ ψ = σ ψ ′ \varphi^*\sigma_\psi=\sigma_{\psi'} φ ∗ σ ψ = σ ψ ′ , which proves (1). Uniqueness is Proposition 2.8 (3). □
Proof of Theorem A. This is the equivalence of (1) and (3) in Proposition 2.12 . □
Remark 2.13. The element φ \varphi φ of Proposition 2.12 need not be the transition φ ψ / ψ ′ \varphi_{\psi/\psi'} φ ψ / ψ ′ . Indeed, Diff 1 ( ψ , ψ ′ ) = φ ψ / ψ ′ ∘ Diff 1 ( ψ ′ , ψ ′ ) \operatorname{Diff}_1(\psi,\psi')=\varphi_{\psi/\psi'}\circ\operatorname{Diff}_1(\psi',\psi') Diff 1 ( ψ , ψ ′ ) = φ ψ / ψ ′ ∘ Diff 1 ( ψ ′ , ψ ′ ) , and by (13) the stabilizer Diff 1 ( ψ ′ , ψ ′ ) \operatorname{Diff}_1(\psi',\psi') Diff 1 ( ψ ′ , ψ ′ ) consists of the e X e^X e X with X ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) X\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) X ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν ) and [ X , σ ψ ′ ] = 0 [X,\sigma_{\psi'}]=0 [ X , σ ψ ′ ] = 0 , since the component of lowest weight of e ad X σ ψ ′ − σ ψ ′ e^{\operatorname{ad}_X}\sigma_{\psi'}-\sigma_{\psi'} e ad X σ ψ ′ − σ ψ ′ is that of [ X , σ ψ ′ ] [X,\sigma_{\psi'}] [ X , σ ψ ′ ] . For instance, for a formal function g g g of weight ≥ 2 \geq2 ≥ 2 , the Hamiltonian vector field X g = σ ψ ′ ♯ ( d g ) X_g=\sigma_{\psi'}^\sharp(dg) X g = σ ψ ′ ♯ ( d g ) lies in X ≥ 1 ( ν ) \mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu) X ≥ 1 ( ν ) and commutes with σ ψ ′ \sigma_{\psi'} σ ψ ′ .
Remark 2.14. An induced isomorphism need not have multiderivations as Taylor coefficients. Let M = R 4 M=\mathbb{R}^{4} M = R 4 with σ = ∂ ∂ x 1 ∧ ∂ ∂ y 1 + ∂ ∂ x 2 ∧ ∂ ∂ y 2 \sigma=\frac{\partial}{\partial x_{1}}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y_{1}}+\frac{\partial}{\partial x_{2}}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y_{2}} σ = ∂ x 1 ∂ ∧ ∂ y 1 ∂ + ∂ x 2 ∂ ∧ ∂ y 2 ∂ , let N = { y = 0 } N=\{y=0\} N = { y = 0 } , with frame e i = ∂ ∂ y i e_i=\frac{\partial}{\partial y_i} e i = ∂ y i ∂ , and let ψ \psi ψ be the identity. Let Z = 1 2 ( ( y 1 ) 2 ∂ ∂ y 1 + ( y 2 ) 2 ∂ ∂ y 2 ) Z=\frac{1}{2}\left((y^{1})^{2}\frac{\partial}{\partial y_{1}}+(y^{2})^{2}\frac{\partial}{\partial y_{2}}\right) Z = 2 1 ( ( y 1 ) 2 ∂ y 1 ∂ + ( y 2 ) 2 ∂ y 2 ∂ ) , whose time-one flow is γ ( x , y ) = ( x , y 1 1 − y 1 / 2 , y 2 1 − y 2 / 2 ) \gamma(x,y)=\left(x,\frac{y^{1}}{1-y^{1}/2},\frac{y^{2}}{1-y^{2}/2}\right) γ ( x , y ) = ( x , 1 − y 1 /2 y 1 , 1 − y 2 /2 y 2 ) , and ψ ′ = ψ ∘ γ \psi'=\psi\circ\gamma ψ ′ = ψ ∘ γ . The expansion of γ \gamma γ is e Z = Φ ψ ψ ′ e^{Z}=\Phi_{\psi\psi'} e Z = Φ ψ ψ ′ , so F = Φ ( e Z ) F=\Phi(e^{Z}) F = Φ ( e Z ) is induced, by (15) . Let δ = D Z \delta=D_Z δ = D Z , which is concentrated in arity 2 by Lemma 2.6 (1). The Lie derivative of ∂ ∂ y 1 ∧ ∂ ∂ y 2 \frac{\partial}{\partial y_{1}}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y_{2}} ∂ y 1 ∂ ∧ ∂ y 2 ∂ along Z Z Z is − ( y 1 + y 2 ) ∂ ∂ y 1 ∧ ∂ ∂ y 2 -(y^{1}+y^{2})\frac{\partial}{\partial y_{1}}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y_{2}} − ( y 1 + y 2 ) ∂ y 1 ∂ ∧ ∂ y 2 ∂ , so (19) and (16) give
δ 2 ( e 1 , e 1 ) = e 1 , δ 2 ( e 2 , e 2 ) = e 2 , δ 2 ( e 1 , e 2 ) = 0 , δ 2 ( e 1 ∧ e 2 , e j ) = e 1 ∧ e 2 . \delta_2(e_1,e_1)=e_1,\qquad\delta_2(e_2,e_2)=e_2,\qquad\delta_2(e_1,e_2)=0,\qquad\delta_2(e_1\wedge e_2,e_j)=e_1\wedge e_2. δ 2 ( e 1 , e 1 ) = e 1 , δ 2 ( e 2 , e 2 ) = e 2 , δ 2 ( e 1 , e 2 ) = 0 , δ 2 ( e 1 ∧ e 2 , e j ) = e 1 ∧ e 2 .
By (7) and (8) with ( log F ) 3 = 0 (\log F)_3=0 ( log F ) 3 = 0 , we get F 3 = 1 2 ∑ ε δ 2 ( δ 2 ( a i , a j ) , a k ) F_3=\frac{1}{2}\sum_{\varepsilon}\delta_2(\delta_2(a_i,a_j),a_k) F 3 = 2 1 ∑ ε δ 2 ( δ 2 ( a i , a j ) , a k ) , with all Koszul signs equal to + 1 +1 + 1 for the arguments below. Hence F 3 ( e 1 ∧ e 2 , e 1 , e 2 ) = e 1 ∧ e 2 F_3(e_1\wedge e_2,e_1,e_2)=e_1\wedge e_2 F 3 ( e 1 ∧ e 2 , e 1 , e 2 ) = e 1 ∧ e 2 , while F 3 ( e 1 , e 1 , e 2 ) = 1 2 δ 2 ( e 1 , e 2 ) = 0 F_3(e_1,e_1,e_2)=\frac{1}{2}\delta_2(e_1,e_2)=0 F 3 ( e 1 , e 1 , e 2 ) = 2 1 δ 2 ( e 1 , e 2 ) = 0 and F 3 ( e 2 , e 1 , e 2 ) = 0 F_3(e_2,e_1,e_2)=0 F 3 ( e 2 , e 1 , e 2 ) = 0 . If F 3 F_3 F 3 were a multiderivation, (4) would give F 3 ( e 1 ∧ e 2 , e 1 , e 2 ) = 0 F_3(e_1\wedge e_2,e_1,e_2)=0 F 3 ( e 1 ∧ e 2 , e 1 , e 2 ) = 0 .
The adjoint symplectic groupoid of a Radko surface
In this section, we give an explicit coordinate description of the adjoint symplectic groupoid of a Radko surface ( Σ , σ ) (\Sigma,\sigma) ( Σ , σ ) , using the integration theory of Gualtieri and Li [14 ] . This fixes the ambient symplectic groupoid G Σ \mathcal{G}_{\Sigma} G Σ in which we will construct the Lagrangian integrations of admissible curves in §4 and compute their homotopy fibre products in §5.
Conventions and Radko surfaces
We first fix our conventions and recall the normal form of a Radko surface near its degeneracy locus.
For a bivector π \pi π on a manifold M M M , we use the same symbol for the bundle map
π : T ∗ M ⟶ T M , π ( ξ ) = ι ξ π = π ( ξ , ⋅ ) . \pi:T^{*}M\longrightarrow TM,\qquad\pi(\xi)=\iota_{\xi}\pi=\pi(\xi,\cdot). π : T ∗ M ⟶ T M , π ( ξ ) = ι ξ π = π ( ξ , ⋅ ) .
If π \pi π is Poisson, our conventions for the Poisson bracket and Hamiltonian vector fields are { f , g } = π ( d f , d g ) \{f,g\}=\pi(df,dg) { f , g } = π ( df , d g ) , X f = π ( d f ) X_f=\pi(df) X f = π ( df ) . The cotangent Lie algebroid T π ∗ M T_{\pi}^{*}M T π ∗ M has anchor π \pi π and bracket [ d f , d g ] = d { f , g } [df,dg]=d\{f,g\} [ df , d g ] = d { f , g } . A 2-form ω \omega ω and a bivector π \pi π are inverse if
ι π ( ξ ) ω = ξ for every ξ ∈ T ∗ M . \iota_{\pi(\xi)}\omega=\xi\qquad\text{for every }\xi\in T^{*}M. ι π ( ξ ) ω = ξ for every ξ ∈ T ∗ M .
Equivalently, their graphs agree:
Γ ω = { ( v , ι v ω ) : v ∈ T M } = { ( π ( ξ ) , ξ ) : ξ ∈ T ∗ M } . \Gamma_{\omega}=\{(v,\iota_v\omega):v\in TM\}=\{(\pi(\xi),\xi):\xi\in T^{*}M\}. Γ ω = {( v , ι v ω ) : v ∈ T M } = {( π ( ξ ) , ξ ) : ξ ∈ T ∗ M } .
We then write π = ω − 1 \pi=\omega^{-1} π = ω − 1 . In particular, ι X f ω = d f \iota_{X_f}\omega=df ι X f ω = df .
Following [14 ] , we allow the arrow manifold of a Lie groupoid G ⇒ M G\Rightarrow M G ⇒ M to be non-Hausdorff. We compose g g g and h h h in the order g h gh g h when s ( g ) = t ( h ) s(g)=t(h) s ( g ) = t ( h ) , and write G x G_x G x for the isotropy group at x ∈ M x\in M x ∈ M . For an open set U ⊂ M U\subset M U ⊂ M , the restriction is G ∣ U = s − 1 ( U ) ∩ t − 1 ( U ) G|_U=s^{-1}(U)\cap t^{-1}(U) G ∣ U = s − 1 ( U ) ∩ t − 1 ( U ) . The source-connected part G ∘ G^{\circ} G ∘ is the union, over x ∈ M x\in M x ∈ M , of the connected components of s − 1 ( x ) s^{-1}(x) s − 1 ( x ) containing 1 x 1_x 1 x . The Lie algebroid Lie ( G ) \operatorname{Lie}(G) Lie ( G ) is ker d s \ker ds ker d s along the units, with anchor d t dt d t and bracket induced by right-invariant vector fields.
A symplectic groupoid is a Lie groupoid equipped with a symplectic form Ω \Omega Ω which is multiplicative :
m ∗ Ω = pr 1 ∗ Ω + pr 2 ∗ Ω , m^{*}\Omega=\operatorname{pr}_{1}^{*}\Omega+\operatorname{pr}_{2}^{*}\Omega, m ∗ Ω = pr 1 ∗ Ω + pr 2 ∗ Ω ,
where m m m is multiplication and pr 1 , pr 2 \operatorname{pr}_{1},\operatorname{pr}_{2} pr 1 , pr 2 are the projections from the space of composable pairs. It integrates ( M , π ) (M,\pi) ( M , π ) if the target map t : ( G , Ω − 1 ) → ( M , π ) t:(G,\Omega^{-1})\to(M,\pi) t : ( G , Ω − 1 ) → ( M , π ) is Poisson. In this case,
Lie ( G ) ⟶ T π ∗ M , v ⟼ ι v Ω ∣ T M \operatorname{Lie}(G)\longrightarrow T_{\pi}^{*}M,\qquad v\longmapsto\iota_v\Omega|_{TM} Lie ( G ) ⟶ T π ∗ M , v ⟼ ι v Ω ∣ T M
is an isomorphism of Lie algebroids, and the induced Dirac structure
{ ( d t ( v ) , ι v Ω ∣ T M ) : v ∈ Lie ( G ) } \left\{(dt(v),\iota_v\Omega|_{TM}):v\in\operatorname{Lie}(G)\right\} { ( d t ( v ) , ι v Ω ∣ T M ) : v ∈ Lie ( G ) }
is the graph of π \pi π . These are the conventions of [21 ] , §§2.1 and 3.1, Lemma 3.1, Example 3.8 and Remark 4.9. Gualtieri and Li use the opposite convention, in which s s s is Poisson [14 §1] .
A Radko surface is a compact oriented surface Σ \Sigma Σ with a Poisson bivector σ \sigma σ which vanishes transversely along a nonempty curve D D D and is nondegenerate on Σ ∖ D \Sigma\setminus D Σ ∖ D [26 ] . Writing σ = f σ 0 \sigma=f\sigma_0 σ = f σ 0 with σ 0 \sigma_0 σ 0 a nowhere vanishing bivector, this means that d f ≠ 0 df\ne0 df = 0 along D = f − 1 ( 0 ) D=f^{-1}(0) D = f − 1 ( 0 ) . We do not assume Σ \Sigma Σ connected.
The degeneracy locus D = f − 1 ( 0 ) D=f^{-1}(0) D = f − 1 ( 0 ) is a closed one-dimensional submanifold of the compact surface Σ \Sigma Σ , hence a finite union of circles D 1 , … , D n D D_1,\ldots,D_{n_D} D 1 , … , D n D (Figure 1 ). Its normal bundles ν D j \nu_{D_j} ν D j are trivial, since both Σ \Sigma Σ and D j D_j D j are orientable. Write V i V_i V i for the connected components of Σ ∖ D \Sigma\setminus D Σ ∖ D and ω i \omega_i ω i for the inverse of σ \sigma σ on V i V_i V i . The symplectic leaves are the V i V_i V i and the individual points of D D D . Thus the components D j D_j D j and all leaves contained in them are compact, so ( Σ , σ ) (\Sigma,\sigma) ( Σ , σ ) is a proper log symplectic surface in the sense of [14 Definition 1.10] .
Figure 1. A Radko surface and its degeneracy locus.
A log symplectic manifold is linearizable along its degeneracy locus [14 Theorem 1.12] , and the linear models of a proper one are classified in [14 Proposition 1.11] . In dimension two, the leaves in D j D_j D j and ν D j \nu_{D_j} ν D j is trivial. The local model is therefore determined by one number ℓ j > 0 \ell_j > 0 ℓ j > 0 , the modular period of D j D_j D j (see (27) below).
More explicitly, Radko’s normal form [26 §2.4, eq. (4)] , see also [26 Lemma 2] , gives coordinates
( θ , r ) ∈ ( R / 2 π Z ) × ( − c j , c j ) , D j = { r = 0 } , σ = 2 π ℓ j r ∂ ∂ r ∧ ∂ ∂ θ . (\theta,r) \in(\mathbb{R}/2\pi\mathbb{Z}) \times(-c_j,c_j), \qquad D_j = \{r=0\}, \qquad\sigma= \frac{2\pi}{\ell_j}r\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial\theta}. ( θ , r ) ∈ ( R /2 π Z ) × ( − c j , c j ) , D j = { r = 0 } , σ = ℓ j 2 π r ∂ r ∂ ∧ ∂ θ ∂ .
Set t = ℓ j θ / ( 2 π ) t=\ell_j\theta/(2\pi) t = ℓ j θ / ( 2 π ) and S ℓ j 1 = R / ℓ j Z S^1_{\ell_j}=\mathbb{R}/\ell_j\mathbb{Z} S ℓ j 1 = R / ℓ j Z . We identify a neighbourhood U j U_j U j of D j D_j D j with the Poisson cylinder
( S ℓ j 1 × ( − c j , c j ) , r ∂ ∂ r ∧ ∂ ∂ t ) , \left(S^1_{\ell_j}\times(-c_j,c_j),\ r\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial t}\right), ( S ℓ j 1 × ( − c j , c j ) , r ∂ r ∂ ∧ ∂ t ∂ ) ,
with D j = S ℓ j 1 × { 0 } D_j=S^1_{\ell_j}\times\{0\} D j = S ℓ j 1 × { 0 } . It will be convenient to extend this local model to the whole cylinder
U ^ j = S ℓ j 1 × R , σ = r ∂ ∂ r ∧ ∂ ∂ t , (26) \widehat{U}_j=S^1_{\ell_j}\times\mathbb{R},\qquad\sigma=r\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial t}, \tag*{(26)} U j = S ℓ j 1 × R , σ = r ∂ r ∂ ∧ ∂ t ∂ , (26)
so that U j = S ℓ j 1 × ( − c j , c j ) U_j=S^1_{\ell_j}\times(-c_j,c_j) U j = S ℓ j 1 × ( − c j , c j ) is an open Poisson submanifold of U ^ j \widehat{U}_j U j . Since the D j D_j D j are pairwise disjoint compact sets, we choose the c j c_j c j so that the U j U_j U j are pairwise disjoint. Then U j ∩ D = D j = { r = 0 } U_j\cap D=D_j=\{r=0\} U j ∩ D = D j = { r = 0 } .
On { r ≠ 0 } \{r\ne0\} { r = 0 } , the inverse symplectic form is ω = 1 r d t ∧ d r \omega=\frac{1}{r}\,dt\wedge dr ω = r 1 d t ∧ d r . Indeed,
σ ( d r ) = r ∂ ∂ t , ι σ ( d r ) ω = d r , σ ( d t ) = − r ∂ ∂ r , ι σ ( d t ) ω = d t . \sigma(dr)=r\frac{\partial}{\partial t},\qquad\iota_{\sigma(dr)}\omega=dr,\qquad\sigma(dt)=-r\frac{\partial}{\partial r},\qquad\iota_{\sigma(dt)}\omega=dt. σ ( d r ) = r ∂ t ∂ , ι σ ( d r ) ω = d r , σ ( d t ) = − r ∂ r ∂ , ι σ ( d t ) ω = d t .
The normal-form identification is Poisson, so ω i = ω \omega_i=\omega ω i = ω on U j ∩ V i U_j\cap V_i U j ∩ V i .
Let vol \operatorname{vol} vol be a volume form on a neighbourhood of D j D_j D j . With the convention X f = σ ( d f ) X_f=\sigma(df) X f = σ ( df ) , so that X f ( g ) = σ ( d f , d g ) X_f(g)=\sigma(df,dg) X f ( g ) = σ ( df , d g ) , the modular vector field X vol X_{\operatorname{vol}} X vol of σ \sigma σ [34 ] is defined by X vol ( f ) = div ( X f ) X_{\operatorname{vol}}(f)=\operatorname{div}(X_f) X vol ( f ) = div ( X f ) , where divergence is defined by d ( ι X vol ) = div ( X ) vol d(\iota_X\operatorname{vol})=\operatorname{div}(X)\operatorname{vol} d ( ι X vol ) = div ( X ) vol .
The restriction of X vol X_{\operatorname{vol}} X vol to D j D_j D j does not depend on the volume form [26 §2.4] , since changing vol \operatorname{vol} vol changes X vol X_{\operatorname{vol}} X vol by a Hamiltonian vector field, which vanishes along D j D_j D j . On U j U_j U j , take vol = d r ∧ d t \operatorname{vol}=dr\wedge dt vol = d r ∧ d t . Then X f = r ∂ f ∂ r ∂ ∂ t − r ∂ f ∂ t ∂ ∂ r X_f=r\frac{\partial f}{\partial r}\frac{\partial}{\partial t}-r\frac{\partial f}{\partial t}\frac{\partial}{\partial r} X f = r ∂ r ∂ f ∂ t ∂ − r ∂ t ∂ f ∂ r ∂ and div ( X f ) = − ∂ f ∂ t \operatorname{div}(X_f)=-\frac{\partial f}{\partial t} div ( X f ) = − ∂ t ∂ f , so that
X vol ∣ D j = − ∂ ∂ t . (27) X_{\operatorname{vol}}\big|_{D_j}=-\frac{\partial}{\partial t}. \tag*{(27)} X vol D j = − ∂ t ∂ . (27)
In particular, the modular period ℓ j \ell_j ℓ j is the period of the modular vector field along D j D_j D j .
We next show that each leaf V i V_i V i meets each cylinder U j U_j U j in at most one of the two components of U j ∖ D j U_j\setminus D_j U j ∖ D j . Write σ = f σ 0 \sigma=f\sigma_0 σ = f σ 0 as above. The function f f f has constant sign on each V i V_i V i . On U j U_j U j , σ 0 = u ∂ ∂ r ∧ ∂ ∂ t \sigma_0=u\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial t} σ 0 = u ∂ r ∂ ∧ ∂ t ∂ with u u u nowhere vanishing, so f = r / u f=r/u f = r / u has opposite signs on the components { r > 0 } \{r>0\} { r > 0 } and { r < 0 } \{r<0\} { r < 0 } of U j ∖ D j U_j\setminus D_j U j ∖ D j . Each of them is connected and contained in Σ ∖ D \Sigma\setminus D Σ ∖ D , hence in a single leaf, and the two leaves are distinct. Therefore
V i ∩ U j ∈ { ∅ , S ℓ j 1 × ( 0 , c j ) , S ℓ j 1 × ( − c j , 0 ) } . (28) V_i\cap U_j\in\left\{\varnothing,\ S^1_{\ell_j}\times(0,c_j),\ S^1_{\ell_j}\times(-c_j,0)\right\}. \tag*{(28)} V i ∩ U j ∈ { ∅ , S ℓ j 1 × ( 0 , c j ) , S ℓ j 1 × ( − c j , 0 ) } . (28)
If V i V_i V i meets no U j U_j U j , then its closure misses D D D , since ⋃ j U j \bigcup_j U_j ⋃ j U j is a neighbourhood of D D D , so V i V_i V i is open and closed in Σ \Sigma Σ . Hence each V i V_i V i is a component of the compact surface Σ \Sigma Σ or contains one of the 2 n D 2n_D 2 n D components of the sets U j ∖ D j U_j\setminus D_j U j ∖ D j , and there are finitely many leaves V i V_i V i .
Adjoint integrations
We recall the description of source-connected integrations used to identify G Σ \mathcal{G}_{\Sigma} G Σ [14 ] . Let E E E be an integrable Lie algebroid over M M M . Its source-connected integrations, with their identifications of Lie algebroids with E E E , form a category Gpd ( E ) \operatorname{Gpd}(E) Gpd ( E ) . Morphisms induce the identity on E E E . There is at most one morphism between two objects, and every such morphism is a surjective local diffeomorphism [14 Definition 1.19 and the discussion following it] . The initial object is the source-simply-connected integration G s s c \mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{ssc}} G ssc . The terminal object, when it exists, is the adjoint integration G a d j \mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{adj}} G adj .
Let Λ ( G s s c ) \Lambda(\mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{ssc}}) Λ ( G ssc ) be the poset, ordered by inclusion, of wide Lie subgroupoids N ⊂ G s s c \mathcal{N} \subset\mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{ssc}} N ⊂ G ssc which are discrete , meaning that s ∣ N s|_{\mathcal{N}} s ∣ N is a local diffeomorphism, totally disconnected , meaning that s = t s=t s = t on N \mathcal{N} N , and normal . By [14 Theorems 1.14 and 1.20] , the assignment
Λ ( G s s c ) ⟶ Gpd ( E ) , N ⟼ G s s c / N \Lambda(\mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{ssc}}) \longrightarrow\operatorname{Gpd}(E), \qquad\mathcal{N} \longmapsto\mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{ssc}}/\mathcal{N} Λ ( G ssc ) ⟶ Gpd ( E ) , N ⟼ G ssc / N
is an equivalence. The quotient map is a surjective local diffeomorphism, and the quotient is Hausdorff if G s s c \mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{ssc}} G ssc is Hausdorff and N \mathcal{N} N is closed. In particular, a greatest element N ∈ Λ ( G s s c ) \mathcal{N} \in\Lambda(\mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{ssc}}) N ∈ Λ ( G ssc ) determines the adjoint integration: G a d j = G s s c / N \mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{adj}}=\mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{ssc}}/\mathcal{N} G adj = G ssc / N .
To pass from local to global integrations, an open cover O \mathcal{O} O of M M M is an orbit cover if every orbit of E E E is contained in one of its members. For O , O ′ ∈ O O,O' \in\mathcal{O} O , O ′ ∈ O , let G ~ O \widetilde{\mathcal{G}}_{O} G O and G ~ O O ′ \widetilde{\mathcal{G}}_{OO'} G O O ′ be the source-simply-connected integrations of E ∣ O E|_{O} E ∣ O and E ∣ O ∩ O ′ E|_{O\cap O'} E ∣ O ∩ O ′ . The restriction map
res O , O ′ : Λ ( G ~ O ) ⟶ Λ ( G ~ O O ′ ) \operatorname{res}_{O,O'}:\Lambda(\widetilde{\mathcal{G}}_{O})\longrightarrow\Lambda(\widetilde{\mathcal{G}}_{OO'}) res O , O ′ : Λ ( G O ) ⟶ Λ ( G O O ′ )
sends N \mathcal{N} N to the preimage of N ∩ ( G ~ O ∣ O ∩ O ′ ) c \mathcal{N}\cap(\widetilde{\mathcal{G}}_{O|O\cap O'})^{c} N ∩ ( G O ∣ O ∩ O ′ ) c under the canonical morphism
G ~ O O ′ ⟶ ( G ~ O ∣ O ∩ O ′ ) c . \widetilde{\mathcal{G}}_{OO'}\longrightarrow(\widetilde{\mathcal{G}}_{O|O\cap O'})^{c}. G O O ′ ⟶ ( G O ∣ O ∩ O ′ ) c .
A family ( N O ) O ∈ O (\mathcal{N}_{O})_{O\in\mathcal{O}} ( N O ) O ∈ O is compatible if
res O , O ′ ( N O ) = res O ′ , O ( N O ′ ) for all O , O ′ ∈ O . \operatorname{res}_{O,O'}(\mathcal{N}_{O})=\operatorname{res}_{O',O}(\mathcal{N}_{O'})
\quad\text{for all }O,O'\in\mathcal{O}. res O , O ′ ( N O ) = res O ′ , O ( N O ′ ) for all O , O ′ ∈ O .
For a locally finite orbit cover, compatible families glue to source-connected integrations G \mathcal{G} G satisfying ( G ∣ O ) c = G ~ O / N O (\mathcal{G}|_{O})^{c}=\widetilde{\mathcal{G}}_{O}/\mathcal{N}_{O} ( G ∣ O ) c = G O / N O . This gives an equivalence between compatible families, ordered by inclusion, and Gpd ( E ) \operatorname{Gpd}(E) Gpd ( E ) [14 Theorem 3.4 and Corollary 3.7] . We will use the following gluing criterion : if each Λ ( G ~ O ) \Lambda(\widetilde{\mathcal{G}}_{O}) Λ ( G O ) has a greatest element N O \mathcal{N}_{O} N O and these elements form a compatible family, then the glued groupoid is the adjoint integration of E E E . Indeed, every compatible family is contained in ( N O ) (\mathcal{N}_{O}) ( N O ) .
The action groupoid of Aff + ( R ) \operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) Aff + ( R )
We first describe the source-simply-connected symplectic integration of the cylinder ( U ^ j , σ ) (\widehat{U}_{j},\sigma) ( U j , σ ) in (26) , and then take the quotient giving its adjoint integration. This is the surface case of the action-groupoid model in [14 §A.2] .
The cotangent Lie algebroid T σ ∗ U ^ j T^{*}_{\sigma}\widehat{U}_{j} T σ ∗ U j has the global frame ( d r , d t ) (dr,dt) ( d r , d t ) , with
σ ( d r ) = r ∂ ∂ t , σ ( d t ) = − r ∂ ∂ r , [ d r , d t ] = d ( σ ( d r , d t ) ) = d r . \sigma(dr)=r\frac{\partial}{\partial t},\qquad\sigma(dt)=-r\frac{\partial}{\partial r},\qquad[dr,dt]=d\bigl(\sigma(dr,dt)\bigr)=dr. σ ( d r ) = r ∂ t ∂ , σ ( d t ) = − r ∂ r ∂ , [ d r , d t ] = d ( σ ( d r , d t ) ) = d r .
So its anchor is onto where r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 and vanishes along D j = { r = 0 } D_{j}=\{r=0\} D j = { r = 0 } , and the isotropy Lie algebra T x ∗ U ^ j T^{*}_{x}\widehat{U}_{j} T x ∗ U j at every x ∈ D j x\in D_{j} x ∈ D j is isomorphic to the Lie algebra a f f ( R ) \mathfrak{aff}(\mathbb{R}) aff ( R ) of the group Aff + ( R ) \operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) Aff + ( R ) introduced below.
The group Aff + ( R ) = { ( a , b ) : a > 0 , b ∈ R } \operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R})=\{(a,b):a>0,\ b\in\mathbb{R}\} Aff + ( R ) = {( a , b ) : a > 0 , b ∈ R } has the product
( a 2 , b 2 ) ( a 1 , b 1 ) = ( a 2 a 1 , b 1 + a 1 b 2 ) (29) (a_{2},b_{2})(a_{1},b_{1})=(a_{2}a_{1},b_{1}+a_{1}b_{2}) \tag*{(29)} ( a 2 , b 2 ) ( a 1 , b 1 ) = ( a 2 a 1 , b 1 + a 1 b 2 ) (29)
with unit ( 1 , 0 ) (1,0) ( 1 , 0 ) and inverse ( a , b ) − 1 = ( a − 1 , − b / a ) (a,b)^{-1}=(a^{-1},-b/a) ( a , b ) − 1 = ( a − 1 , − b / a ) . It is isomorphic to the group of orientation-preserving affine transformations of R \mathbb{R} R by ( a , b ) ↦ ( x ↦ ( x − b ) / a ) (a,b)\mapsto(x\mapsto(x-b)/a) ( a , b ) ↦ ( x ↦ ( x − b ) / a ) . We call { ( 1 , b ) : b ∈ R } \{(1,b):b\in\mathbb{R}\} {( 1 , b ) : b ∈ R } its translation subgroup , and the conjugates of { ( a , 0 ) : a > 0 } \{(a,0):a>0\} {( a , 0 ) : a > 0 } its dilation subgroups . The group acts on U ^ j \widehat{U}_{j} U j on the left by ( a , b ) ⋅ ( t , r ) = ( t + b r , a r ) (a,b)\cdot(t,r)=(t+br,ar) ( a , b ) ⋅ ( t , r ) = ( t + b r , a r ) . Let G j = Aff + ( R ) × U ^ j ⇉ U ^ j \mathcal{G}_{j}=\operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R})\times\widehat{U}_{j}\rightrightarrows\widehat{U}_{j} G j = Aff + ( R ) × U j ⇉ U j be the action groupoid. We write its arrows as ( a , b , t , r ) (a,b,t,r) ( a , b , t , r ) , so that
s ( a , b , t , r ) = ( t , r ) , s(a,b,t,r)=(t,r), s ( a , b , t , r ) = ( t , r ) ,
t ( a , b , t , r ) = ( t + b r , a r ) , t(a,b,t,r)=(t+br,ar), t ( a , b , t , r ) = ( t + b r , a r ) ,
1 ( t , r ) = ( 1 , 0 , t , r ) , 1_{(t,r)}=(1,0,t,r), 1 ( t , r ) = ( 1 , 0 , t , r ) ,
( a 2 , b 2 , t + b 1 r , a 1 r ) ( a 1 , b 1 , t , r ) = ( a 2 a 1 , b 1 + a 1 b 2 , t , r ) . (a_{2},b_{2},t+b_{1}r,a_{1}r)(a_{1},b_{1},t,r)=(a_{2}a_{1},b_{1}+a_{1}b_{2},t,r). ( a 2 , b 2 , t + b 1 r , a 1 r ) ( a 1 , b 1 , t , r ) = ( a 2 a 1 , b 1 + a 1 b 2 , t , r ) .
As a manifold, G j = Aff + ( R ) × U ^ j \mathcal{G}_j=\operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R})\times\widehat{U}_j G j = Aff + ( R ) × U j , so G j \mathcal{G}_j G j is Hausdorff, and every source fibre is diffeomorphic to R 2 \mathbb{R}^2 R 2 . On Aff + ( R ) \operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) Aff + ( R ) we use the global coordinate α = log a \alpha=\log a α = log a . Since a r ≠ 0 ar\ne0 a r = 0 if and only if r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 , we have s − 1 ( { r ≠ 0 } ) = t − 1 ( { r ≠ 0 } ) s^{-1}(\{r\ne0\})=t^{-1}(\{r\ne0\}) s − 1 ({ r = 0 }) = t − 1 ({ r = 0 }) , a dense open subgroupoid of G j \mathcal{G}_j G j .
Let ζ 1 , ζ 2 ∈ a f f ( R ) \zeta_1,\zeta_2\in\mathfrak{aff}(\mathbb{R}) ζ 1 , ζ 2 ∈ aff ( R ) be the velocities at 0 0 0 of the curves α ↦ ( e α , 0 ) \alpha\mapsto(e^\alpha,0) α ↦ ( e α , 0 ) and b ↦ ( 1 , b ) b\mapsto(1,b) b ↦ ( 1 , b ) . The Lie algebroid Lie ( G j ) \operatorname{Lie}(\mathcal{G}_j) Lie ( G j ) is the trivial vector bundle a f f ( R ) × U ^ j \mathfrak{aff}(\mathbb{R})\times\widehat{U}_j aff ( R ) × U j , and the anchors of ζ 1 \zeta_1 ζ 1 and ζ 2 \zeta_2 ζ 2 are r ∂ ∂ r r\frac{\partial}{\partial r} r ∂ r ∂ and r ∂ ∂ t r\frac{\partial}{\partial t} r ∂ t ∂ . The anchor preserves brackets and is injective on the dense set { r ≠ 0 } \{r\ne0\} { r = 0 } . Since [ r ∂ ∂ r , r ∂ ∂ t ] = r ∂ ∂ t \left[r\frac{\partial}{\partial r},r\frac{\partial}{\partial t}\right]=r\frac{\partial}{\partial t} [ r ∂ r ∂ , r ∂ t ∂ ] = r ∂ t ∂ , we obtain [ ζ 1 , ζ 2 ] = ζ 2 [\zeta_1,\zeta_2]=\zeta_2 [ ζ 1 , ζ 2 ] = ζ 2 in Lie ( G j ) \operatorname{Lie}(\mathcal{G}_j) Lie ( G j ) by continuity. Define
χ : T ∗ U ^ j ⟶ Lie ( G j ) , χ ( d r ) = ζ 2 , χ ( d t ) = − ζ 1 . (30) \chi:T^*\widehat{U}_j\longrightarrow\operatorname{Lie}(\mathcal{G}_j),\qquad\chi(dr)=\zeta_2,\qquad\chi(dt)=-\zeta_1. \tag*{(30)} χ : T ∗ U j ⟶ Lie ( G j ) , χ ( d r ) = ζ 2 , χ ( d t ) = − ζ 1 . (30)
The map χ \chi χ is an isomorphism of vector bundles and intertwines the anchors. It preserves brackets on the global frame, since
[ χ ( d r ) , χ ( d t ) ] = [ ζ 2 , − ζ 1 ] = ζ 2 = χ ( [ d r , d t ] ) . [\chi(dr),\chi(dt)]=[\zeta_2,-\zeta_1]=\zeta_2=\chi([dr,dt]). [ χ ( d r ) , χ ( d t )] = [ ζ 2 , − ζ 1 ] = ζ 2 = χ ([ d r , d t ]) .
The Leibniz rule then shows that χ \chi χ is an isomorphism of Lie algebroids. As the source fibres of G j \mathcal{G}_j G j are diffeomorphic to R 2 \mathbb{R}^2 R 2 , this identifies G j \mathcal{G}_j G j with the source-simply-connected integration of T ∗ U ^ j T^*\widehat{U}_j T ∗ U j .
Lemma 3.1. The 2 2 2 -form
Ω = d t ∧ d α + d b ∧ d r + b d r ∧ d α + r d b ∧ d α (31) \Omega=dt\wedge d\alpha+db\wedge dr+b\,dr\wedge d\alpha+r\,db\wedge d\alpha \tag*{(31)} Ω = d t ∧ d α + d b ∧ d r + b d r ∧ d α + r d b ∧ d α (31) on G j \mathcal{G}_j G j is closed, multiplicative and symplectic, and the target map is Poisson. Thus ( G j , Ω ) (\mathcal{G}_j,\Omega) ( G j , Ω ) is the source-simply-connected symplectic groupoid integrating ( U ^ j , σ ) (\widehat{U}_j,\sigma) ( U j , σ ) , and v ↦ ι v Ω ∣ T U ^ j v\mapsto\iota_v\Omega|_{T\widehat{U}_j} v ↦ ι v Ω ∣ T U j is the inverse of χ \chi χ . Moreover, Ω = t ∗ ω − s ∗ ω \Omega=t^*\omega-s^*\omega Ω = t ∗ ω − s ∗ ω on s − 1 ( { r ≠ 0 } ) s^{-1}(\{r\ne0\}) s − 1 ({ r = 0 }) .
Proof. Up to sign, Ω \Omega Ω is the multiplicative symplectic form of Radko and Shlyakhtenko [27 §5.2, (5–1)] , written there on ( R 2 , x ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y ) (\mathbb{R}^2,x\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}) ( R 2 , x ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ ) , and the sign comes from the opposite convention for the inverse of a bivector. Since Ω ∧ Ω = 2 d t ∧ d α ∧ d b ∧ d r \Omega\wedge\Omega=2\,dt\wedge d\alpha\wedge db\wedge dr Ω ∧ Ω = 2 d t ∧ d α ∧ d b ∧ d r , the form Ω \Omega Ω is nondegenerate. On s − 1 ( { r ≠ 0 } ) s^{-1}(\{r\ne0\}) s − 1 ({ r = 0 }) , d ( t + b r ) = d t + b d r + r d b d(t+br)=dt+b\,dr+r\,db d ( t + b r ) = d t + b d r + r d b and d ( a r ) / a r = d α + d r / r d(ar)/ar=d\alpha+dr/r d ( a r ) / a r = d α + d r / r , so
t ∗ ω = ( d t + b d r + r d b ) ∧ ( d α + d r r ) = Ω + 1 r d t ∧ d r = Ω + s ∗ ω . \begin{aligned}
t^*\omega=(dt+b\,dr+r\,db)\wedge\left(d\alpha+\frac{dr}{r}\right) \\
&=\Omega+\frac{1}{r}dt\wedge dr \\
&=\Omega+s^*\omega.
\end{aligned} t ∗ ω = ( d t + b d r + r d b ) ∧ ( d α + r d r ) = Ω + r 1 d t ∧ d r = Ω + s ∗ ω .
So Ω = ( t , s ) ∗ ( ω ⊕ ( − ω ) ) \Omega=(t,s)^*(\omega\oplus(-\omega)) Ω = ( t , s ) ∗ ( ω ⊕ ( − ω )) on the dense open subgroupoid s − 1 ( { r ≠ 0 } ) s^{-1}(\{r\ne0\}) s − 1 ({ r = 0 }) , hence Ω \Omega Ω is closed and multiplicative by continuity. Moreover, ( t , s ) (t,s) ( t , s ) is a local diffeomorphism into { r ≠ 0 } × { r ≠ 0 } \{r\ne0\}\times\{r\ne0\} { r = 0 } × { r = 0 } , and Ω − 1 \Omega^{-1} Ω − 1 is ( t , s ) (t,s) ( t , s ) -related to σ ⊕ ( − σ ) \sigma\oplus(-\sigma) σ ⊕ ( − σ ) . So Ω − 1 \Omega^{-1} Ω − 1 and σ \sigma σ are t t t -related on this dense set, and everywhere by continuity. The groupoid G j \mathcal{G}_j G j is source-simply-connected by the paragraph after (30) . At a unit, b = 0 b=0 b = 0 , ζ 1 = ∂ ∂ α \zeta_1=\frac{\partial}{\partial\alpha} ζ 1 = ∂ α ∂ and ζ 2 = ∂ ∂ b \zeta_2=\frac{\partial}{\partial b} ζ 2 = ∂ b ∂ . Formula (31) therefore gives
ι ζ 1 Ω ∣ T U ^ j = − d t = χ − 1 ( ζ 1 ) , \iota_{\zeta_1}\Omega|_{T\widehat{U}_j}=-dt=\chi^{-1}(\zeta_1), ι ζ 1 Ω ∣ T U j = − d t = χ − 1 ( ζ 1 ) ,
ι ζ 2 Ω ∣ T U ^ j = d r = χ − 1 ( ζ 2 ) . \iota_{\zeta_2}\Omega|_{T\widehat{U}_j}=dr=\chi^{-1}(\zeta_2). ι ζ 2 Ω ∣ T U j = d r = χ − 1 ( ζ 2 ) .
The adjoint integration is obtained by quotienting G j \mathcal{G}_j G j by the following subgroupoid of loops. Its discrete isotropy away from D j D_j D j records the modular period ℓ j \ell_j ℓ j .
Lemma 3.2. The subset
N j = { ( 1 , 0 , t , 0 ) : t ∈ S ℓ j 1 } ⊔ { ( 1 , k ℓ j / r , t , r ) : k ∈ Z , t ∈ S ℓ j 1 , r ≠ 0 } N_j=\{(1,0,t,0):t\in S^1_{\ell_j}\}\ \sqcup\ \{(1,k\ell_j/r,t,r):k\in\mathbb{Z},\ t\in S^1_{\ell_j},\ r\ne0\} N j = {( 1 , 0 , t , 0 ) : t ∈ S ℓ j 1 } ⊔ {( 1 , k ℓ j / r , t , r ) : k ∈ Z , t ∈ S ℓ j 1 , r = 0 } is a closed wide Lie subgroupoid of G j \mathcal{G}_j G j , with isotropy groups N j , ( t , 0 ) = { ( 1 , 0 ) } N_{j,(t,0)}=\{(1,0)\} N j , ( t , 0 ) = {( 1 , 0 )} and N j , ( t , r ) = { ( 1 , k ℓ j / r ) : k ∈ Z } = G j , ( t , r ) N_{j,(t,r)}=\{(1,k\ell_j/r):k\in\mathbb{Z}\}=\mathcal{G}_{j,(t,r)} N j , ( t , r ) = {( 1 , k ℓ j / r ) : k ∈ Z } = G j , ( t , r ) for r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 . Moreover, s ∣ N j : N j → U ^ j s|_{N_j}:N_j\to\widehat{U}_j s ∣ N j : N j → U j is a local diffeomorphism, so N j N_j N j is discrete.
Proof. For r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 and k ∈ Z k\in\mathbb{Z} k ∈ Z , let g k ( t , r ) = ( 1 , k ℓ j / r , t , r ) g_k(t,r)=(1,k\ell_j/r,t,r) g k ( t , r ) = ( 1 , k ℓ j / r , t , r ) . Then
t ( g k ( t , r ) ) = ( t + k ℓ j , r ) = ( t , r ) , g k ( t , r ) g k ′ ( t , r ) = g k + k ′ ( t , r ) , g k ( t , r ) − 1 = g − k ( t , r ) . t(g_k(t,r))=(t+k\ell_j,r)=(t,r),\qquad g_k(t,r)g_{k'}(t,r)=g_{k+k'}(t,r),\qquad g_k(t,r)^{-1}=g_{-k}(t,r). t ( g k ( t , r )) = ( t + k ℓ j , r ) = ( t , r ) , g k ( t , r ) g k ′ ( t , r ) = g k + k ′ ( t , r ) , g k ( t , r ) − 1 = g − k ( t , r ) .
Since N j N_j N j only contains units over r = 0 r=0 r = 0 , it is a wide subgroupoid. For r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 , ( a , b , t , r ) (a,b,t,r) ( a , b , t , r ) is a loop if and only if a r = r ar=r a r = r and t + b r = t t+br=t t + b r = t in S ℓ j 1 S^1_{\ell_j} S ℓ j 1 , that is, a = 1 a=1 a = 1 and b ∈ ( ℓ j / r ) Z b\in(\ell_j/r)\mathbb{Z} b ∈ ( ℓ j / r ) Z . Fix n 0 = ( 1 , b 0 , t 0 , r 0 ) ∈ N j n_0=(1,b_0,t_0,r_0)\in\mathcal{N}_j n 0 = ( 1 , b 0 , t 0 , r 0 ) ∈ N j . If r 0 ≠ 0 r_0\ne0 r 0 = 0 , let k 0 ∈ Z k_0\in\mathbb{Z} k 0 ∈ Z with b 0 = k 0 ℓ j / r 0 b_0=k_0\ell_j/r_0 b 0 = k 0 ℓ j / r 0 , let ε 0 = ℓ j / ( 3 ∣ r 0 ∣ ) \varepsilon_0=\ell_j/(3|r_0|) ε 0 = ℓ j / ( 3∣ r 0 ∣ ) , and set
B = { ( t , r ) : ∣ r − r 0 ∣ < ∣ r 0 ∣ / 2 } , B ~ = { ( a , b , t , r ) : ∣ a − 1 ∣ < 1 2 , ( t , r ) ∈ B , ∣ b − k 0 ℓ j r ∣ < ε 0 } . B=\{(t,r):|r-r_0|<|r_0|/2\},\qquad\widetilde{B}=\{(a,b,t,r):|a-1|<\tfrac{1}{2},\ (t,r)\in B,\ |b-\tfrac{k_0\ell_j}{r}|<\varepsilon_0\}. B = {( t , r ) : ∣ r − r 0 ∣ < ∣ r 0 ∣/2 } , B = {( a , b , t , r ) : ∣ a − 1∣ < 2 1 , ( t , r ) ∈ B , ∣ b − r k 0 ℓ j ∣ < ε 0 } .
Then ( a , b , t , r ) ↦ ( a − 1 , b − k 0 ℓ j / r ) (a,b,t,r)\mapsto(a-1,b-k_0\ell_j/r) ( a , b , t , r ) ↦ ( a − 1 , b − k 0 ℓ j / r ) is a submersion from the open neighbourhood B ~ \widetilde{B} B of n 0 n_0 n 0 to R 2 \mathbb{R}^2 R 2 . For ( t , r ) ∈ B (t,r)\in B ( t , r ) ∈ B , consecutive values of k ℓ j / r k\ell_j/r k ℓ j / r differ by ℓ j / ∣ r ∣ > 2 ℓ j / ( 3 ∣ r 0 ∣ ) = 2 ε 0 \ell_j/|r|>2\ell_j/(3|r_0|)=2\varepsilon_0 ℓ j /∣ r ∣ > 2 ℓ j / ( 3∣ r 0 ∣ ) = 2 ε 0 , so N j ∩ B ~ = { ( 1 , k 0 ℓ j / r , t , r ) : ( t , r ) ∈ B } \mathcal{N}_j\cap\widetilde{B}=\{(1,k_0\ell_j/r,t,r):(t,r)\in B\} N j ∩ B = {( 1 , k 0 ℓ j / r , t , r ) : ( t , r ) ∈ B } is the zero set of this submersion. If r 0 = 0 r_0=0 r 0 = 0 , let B = { ( t , r ) : ∣ r ∣ < ℓ j / 2 } B=\{(t,r):|r|<\ell_j/2\} B = {( t , r ) : ∣ r ∣ < ℓ j /2 } , B ~ = { ( a , b , t , r ) : ∣ a − 1 ∣ < 1 2 , ( t , r ) ∈ B , ∣ b ∣ < 1 } \widetilde{B}=\{(a,b,t,r):|a-1|<\tfrac{1}{2},\ (t,r)\in B,\ |b|<1\} B = {( a , b , t , r ) : ∣ a − 1∣ < 2 1 , ( t , r ) ∈ B , ∣ b ∣ < 1 } , and use the submersion ( a , b , t , r ) ↦ ( a − 1 , b ) (a,b,t,r)\mapsto(a-1,b) ( a , b , t , r ) ↦ ( a − 1 , b ) . Since ∣ k ℓ j / r ∣ > 2 |k\ell_j/r|>2 ∣ k ℓ j / r ∣ > 2 for 0 < ∣ r ∣ < ℓ j / 2 0<|r|<\ell_j/2 0 < ∣ r ∣ < ℓ j /2 and k ≠ 0 k\ne0 k = 0 , the set N j ∩ B ~ \mathcal{N}_j\cap\widetilde{B} N j ∩ B is the set of units over B B B , the zero set of this submersion. So N j \mathcal{N}_j N j is an embedded submanifold, hence a Lie subgroupoid. In both cases, N j ∩ B ~ \mathcal{N}_j\cap\widetilde{B} N j ∩ B is the image of a smooth section of s s s over B B B , so s ∣ N j s|_{\mathcal{N}_j} s ∣ N j is a local diffeomorphism.
For closedness, let ( 1 , b i , t i , r i ) ∈ N j (1,b_i,t_i,r_i)\in\mathcal{N}_j ( 1 , b i , t i , r i ) ∈ N j converge to ( a , b , t , r ) (a,b,t,r) ( a , b , t , r ) . Then a = 1 a=1 a = 1 . If r i = 0 r_i=0 r i = 0 for infinitely many i i i , then b i = 0 b_i=0 b i = 0 for these i i i , so ( a , b , t , r ) = ( 1 , 0 , t , 0 ) ∈ N j (a,b,t,r)=(1,0,t,0)\in\mathcal{N}_j ( a , b , t , r ) = ( 1 , 0 , t , 0 ) ∈ N j . Otherwise, we may assume r i ≠ 0 r_i\ne0 r i = 0 and b i = k i ℓ j / r i b_i=k_i\ell_j/r_i b i = k i ℓ j / r i with k i ∈ Z k_i\in\mathbb{Z} k i ∈ Z . If r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 , then k i = b i r i / ℓ j → b r / ℓ j k_i=b_i r_i/\ell_j\to br/\ell_j k i = b i r i / ℓ j → b r / ℓ j , so k i = k k_i=k k i = k eventually and b = k ℓ j / r b=k\ell_j/r b = k ℓ j / r . If r = 0 r=0 r = 0 , then k i ℓ j = b i r i → 0 k_i\ell_j=b_i r_i\to0 k i ℓ j = b i r i → 0 , so k i = 0 k_i=0 k i = 0 eventually and b = 0 b=0 b = 0 . □
Lemma 3.3. The subgroupoid N j \mathcal{N}_j N j is the greatest element of Λ ( G j ) \Lambda(\mathcal{G}_j) Λ ( G j ) .
Proof. By Lemma 3.2, N j \mathcal{N}_j N j is discrete and consists of loops. Let g = ( a , b , t , r ) g=(a,b,t,r) g = ( a , b , t , r ) be an arrow from x = ( t , r ) x=(t,r) x = ( t , r ) to y = ( t + b r , a r ) y=(t+br,ar) y = ( t + b r , a r ) . If r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 , then a r ≠ 0 ar\ne0 a r = 0 , so N j , x = G j , x \mathcal{N}_{j,x}=\mathcal{G}_{j,x} N j , x = G j , x and N j , y = G j , y \mathcal{N}_{j,y}=\mathcal{G}_{j,y} N j , y = G j , y by Lemma 3.2, and g G j , x g − 1 = G j , y g\mathcal{G}_{j,x}g^{-1}=\mathcal{G}_{j,y} g G j , x g − 1 = G j , y . If r = 0 r=0 r = 0 , then y = x y=x y = x and N j , x \mathcal{N}_{j,x} N j , x is trivial. In either case g N j , x g − 1 = N j , y g\mathcal{N}_{j,x}g^{-1}=\mathcal{N}_{j,y} g N j , x g − 1 = N j , y , so N j \mathcal{N}_j N j is normal.
Let N ′ ∈ Λ ( G j ) \mathcal{N}'\in\Lambda(\mathcal{G}_j) N ′ ∈ Λ ( G j ) . Since s = t s=t s = t on N ′ \mathcal{N}' N ′ , N ′ = ⋃ x N x ′ \mathcal{N}'=\bigcup_x\mathcal{N}'_x N ′ = ⋃ x N x ′ with N x ′ ⊂ G j , x \mathcal{N}'_x\subset\mathcal{G}_{j,x} N x ′ ⊂ G j , x . Since s ∣ N ′ s|_{\mathcal{N}'} s ∣ N ′ is a local diffeomorphism, each N x ′ = ( s ∣ N ′ ) − 1 ( x ) \mathcal{N}'_x=(s|_{\mathcal{N}'})^{-1}(x) N x ′ = ( s ∣ N ′ ) − 1 ( x ) is a discrete subgroup of G j , x \mathcal{G}_{j,x} G j , x , normal since N ′ \mathcal{N}' N ′ is normal. For x = ( t , r ) x=(t,r) x = ( t , r ) with r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 , Lemma 3.2 gives N x ′ ⊂ G j , x = N j , x \mathcal{N}'_x\subset\mathcal{G}_{j,x}=\mathcal{N}_{j,x} N x ′ ⊂ G j , x = N j , x . For x = ( t , 0 ) x=(t,0) x = ( t , 0 ) , N x ′ \mathcal{N}'_x N x ′ is central in the connected group G j , x = Aff + ( R ) \mathcal{G}_{j,x}=\operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) G j , x = Aff + ( R ) , whose centre is trivial, so N x ′ = { ( 1 , 0 ) } = N j , x \mathcal{N}'_x=\{(1,0)\}=\mathcal{N}_{j,x} N x ′ = {( 1 , 0 )} = N j , x . Hence N ′ ⊂ N j \mathcal{N}'\subset\mathcal{N}_j N ′ ⊂ N j . □
Proposition 3.4. The quotient G ‾ j = G j / N j ⇒ U ^ j \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j=\mathcal{G}_j/\mathcal{N}_j\Rightarrow\widehat{U}_j G j = G j / N j ⇒ U j is a Hausdorff Lie groupoid, and it is the adjoint integration of T ∗ U ^ j T^*\widehat{U}_j T ∗ U j . The quotient map q j : G j → G ‾ j q_j:\mathcal{G}_j\to\overline{\mathcal{G}}_j q j : G j → G j is a surjective local diffeomorphism, and there is a unique 2 2 2 -form Ω ‾ j \overline{\Omega}_j Ω j on G ‾ j \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j G j with
q j ∗ Ω ‾ j = Ω . (32) q_j^*\overline{\Omega}_j=\Omega. \tag*{(32)} q j ∗ Ω j = Ω. (32) The pair ( G ‾ j , Ω ‾ j ) (\overline{\mathcal{G}}_j,\overline{\Omega}_j) ( G j , Ω j ) is a symplectic groupoid integrating ( U ^ j , σ ) (\widehat{U}_j,\sigma) ( U j , σ ) .
Proof. By Lemmas 3.2 and 3.3 , N j \mathcal{N}_j N j is a closed greatest element of Λ ( G j ) \Lambda(\mathcal{G}_j) Λ ( G j ) , and G j \mathcal{G}_j G j is the source-simply-connected integration of T ∗ U ^ j T^*\widehat{U}_j T ∗ U j by the paragraph after (30) . Since G j \mathcal{G}_j G j is Hausdorff, [14 Theorems 1.14 and 1.20] show that G ‾ j \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j G j is a Hausdorff Lie groupoid and the adjoint integration, with q j q_j q j a surjective local diffeomorphism.
For k ∈ Z k\in\mathbb{Z} k ∈ Z , let R k ( g ) = g ⋅ ( 1 , k ℓ j / r , t , r ) R_k(g)=g\cdot(1,k\ell_j/r,t,r) R k ( g ) = g ⋅ ( 1 , k ℓ j / r , t , r ) on s − 1 ( { r ≠ 0 } ) s^{-1}(\{r\ne0\}) s − 1 ({ r = 0 }) , where s ( g ) = ( t , r ) s(g)=(t,r) s ( g ) = ( t , r ) . Then R k ( a , b , t , r ) = ( a , b + k ℓ j / r , t , r ) R_k(a,b,t,r)=(a,b+k\ell_j/r,t,r) R k ( a , b , t , r ) = ( a , b + k ℓ j / r , t , r ) , so the terms d t ∧ d a d t\wedge d a d t ∧ d a and d b ∧ d r d b\wedge d r d b ∧ d r of (31) are unchanged, while
R k ∗ Ω − Ω = k ℓ j r d r ∧ d a + r ( − k ℓ j r 2 d r ) ∧ d a = 0. R_k^*\Omega-\Omega=\frac{k\ell_j}{r}\,dr\wedge da+r\left(-\frac{k\ell_j}{r^2}\,dr\right)\wedge da=0. R k ∗ Ω − Ω = r k ℓ j d r ∧ d a + r ( − r 2 k ℓ j d r ) ∧ d a = 0. To descend the form, let ϕ \phi ϕ be a local diffeomorphism between open subsets of G j \mathcal{G}_j G j with q j ∘ ϕ = q j q_j\circ\phi=q_j q j ∘ ϕ = q j . Since the fibres of q j q_j q j are the N j \mathcal{N}_j N j -orbits, ϕ ( g ) = g n ( g ) \phi(g)=g\,n(g) ϕ ( g ) = g n ( g ) for the smooth map n ( g ) = g − 1 ϕ ( g ) n(g)=g^{-1}\phi(g) n ( g ) = g − 1 ϕ ( g ) into N j \mathcal{N}_j N j , and s ∘ n = s s\circ n=s s ∘ n = s . Near g 0 g_0 g 0 with s ( g 0 ) ∈ { r ≠ 0 } s(g_0)\in\{r\ne0\} s ( g 0 ) ∈ { r = 0 } , the integer k k k with n ( g ) = ( 1 , k ℓ j / r , s ( g ) ) n(g)=(1,k\ell_j/r,s(g)) n ( g ) = ( 1 , k ℓ j / r , s ( g )) is locally constant, so ϕ = R k \phi=R_k ϕ = R k . Near g 0 g_0 g 0 with s ( g 0 ) ∈ { r = 0 } s(g_0)\in\{r=0\} s ( g 0 ) ∈ { r = 0 } , n ( g 0 ) n(g_0) n ( g 0 ) is a unit, so, by Lemma 3.2 with r 0 = 0 r_0=0 r 0 = 0 , hence is a unit, and ϕ = id \phi=\operatorname{id} ϕ = id . So ϕ ∗ Ω = Ω \phi^*\Omega=\Omega ϕ ∗ Ω = Ω .
For open sets O ⊂ G j O\subset\mathcal{G}_j O ⊂ G j on which q j q_j q j is injective, the forms ( ( q j ∣ O ) − 1 ) ∗ Ω ((q_j|_O)^{-1})^*\Omega (( q j ∣ O ) − 1 ) ∗ Ω on q j ( O ) q_j(O) q j ( O ) differ on overlaps by a map ϕ \phi ϕ as above, so they glue to a 2 2 2 -form Ω ‾ j \overline{\Omega}_j Ω j satisfying (32) , which is unique.
Since q j q_j q j is a local diffeomorphism compatible with the structure maps, Ω ‾ j \overline{\Omega}_j Ω j is closed and nondegenerate and the target map of G ‾ j \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j G j is Poisson by Lemma 3.1. To check multiplicativity, let m ‾ \overline{m} m denote multiplication on G ‾ j \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j G j . The induced map q j × q j q_j\times q_j q j × q j between the spaces of composable pairs is a surjective local diffeomorphism,
( q j × q j ) ∗ m ‾ ∗ Ω ‾ j = m ∗ Ω (q_j\times q_j)^*\overline{m}^*\overline{\Omega}_j=m^*\Omega ( q j × q j ) ∗ m ∗ Ω j = m ∗ Ω = pr 1 ∗ Ω + pr 2 ∗ Ω =\operatorname{pr}_1^*\Omega+\operatorname{pr}_2^*\Omega = pr 1 ∗ Ω + pr 2 ∗ Ω = ( q j × q j ) ∗ ( pr 1 ∗ Ω ‾ j + pr 2 ∗ Ω ‾ j ) . =(q_j\times q_j)^*(\operatorname{pr}_1^*\overline{\Omega}_j+\operatorname{pr}_2^*\overline{\Omega}_j). = ( q j × q j ) ∗ ( pr 1 ∗ Ω j + pr 2 ∗ Ω j ) . Hence Ω ‾ j \overline{\Omega}_j Ω j is multiplicative. □
The gluing in §3.4 uses the restrictions of these groupoids to the open sets U I = S ℓ j 1 × I ⊂ U ^ j U_I=S^1_{\ell_j}\times I\subset\widehat{U}_j U I = S ℓ j 1 × I ⊂ U j , where I ⊂ R I\subset\mathbb{R} I ⊂ R is an open interval. Since the target of ( a , b , t , r ) (a,b,t,r) ( a , b , t , r ) is ( t + b r , a r ) (t+br,ar) ( t + b r , a r ) , we have G j ∣ U I = { ( a , b , t , r ) : r ∈ I , a r ∈ I } \mathcal{G}_j|_{U_I}=\{(a,b,t,r):r\in I,\ ar\in I\} G j ∣ U I = {( a , b , t , r ) : r ∈ I , a r ∈ I } .
Lemma 3.5. Let I ⊂ R I\subset\mathbb{R} I ⊂ R be an open interval. Then G j ∣ U I \mathcal{G}_j|_{U_I} G j ∣ U I is the source-simply-connected integration of T σ ∗ U I T^*_\sigma U_I T σ ∗ U I , and N j ∩ G j ∣ U I \mathcal{N}_j\cap\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_I} N j ∩ G j ∣ U I is a closed greatest element of Λ ( G j ∣ U I ) \Lambda(\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_I}) Λ ( G j ∣ U I ) . The restriction G ‾ j ∣ U I \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_{U_I} G j ∣ U I is the quotient G j ∣ U I / ( N j ∩ G j ∣ U I ) \mathcal{G}_j|_{U_I}/(\mathcal{N}_j\cap\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_I}) G j ∣ U I / ( N j ∩ G j ∣ U I ) . It is source-connected, it is the adjoint integration of T σ ∗ U I T^*_\sigma U_I T σ ∗ U I , and the restriction of Ω ‾ j \overline{\Omega}_j Ω j is a multiplicative symplectic form on it.
Proof. The restriction G j ∣ U I \mathcal{G}_j|_{U_I} G j ∣ U I is an open subgroupoid with Lie algebroid T σ ∗ U I T^*_\sigma U_I T σ ∗ U I . Its source fibre over ( t , r ) ∈ U I (t,r)\in U_I ( t , r ) ∈ U I is { a > 0 : a r ∈ I } × R \{a>0:ar\in I\}\times\mathbb{R} { a > 0 : a r ∈ I } × R . The first factor is an open interval containing 1 1 1 , so every source fibre is diffeomorphic to R 2 \mathbb{R}^2 R 2 . The subgroupoid N j ∩ G j ∣ U I \mathcal{N}_j\cap\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_I} N j ∩ G j ∣ U I is closed, discrete, totally disconnected and normal. Restriction to U I U_I U I does not change the isotropy groups, and the proof of Lemma 3.3 only uses them.
Since q j q_j q j commutes with s s s and t t t , q j − 1 ( G ‾ j ∣ U I ) = G j ∣ U I q_j^{-1}(\overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_{U_I})=\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_I} q j − 1 ( G j ∣ U I ) = G j ∣ U I , and the fibres of the surjective local diffeomorphism q j : G j ∣ U I → G ‾ j ∣ U I q_j:\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_I}\to\overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_{U_I} q j : G j ∣ U I → G j ∣ U I are the orbits of N j ∩ G j ∣ U I \mathcal{N}_j\cap\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_I} N j ∩ G j ∣ U I . So G ‾ j ∣ U I \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_{U_I} G j ∣ U I is source-connected, as the image of G j ∣ U I \mathcal{G}_j|_{U_I} G j ∣ U I , and it is the adjoint integration by [14 Theorems 1.14 and 1.20] . The last claim holds since G ‾ j ∣ U I \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_{U_I} G j ∣ U I is an open subgroupoid of G ‾ j \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j G j . □
The adjoint symplectic groupoid G Σ \mathcal{G}_\Sigma G Σ
We now recover the adjoint integration of the surface by gluing these coordinate models. We apply the criterion of § 3.2 to E = T σ ∗ Σ E=T^*_\sigma\Sigma E = T σ ∗ Σ . This Lie algebroid is integrable since ( Σ , σ ) (\Sigma,\sigma) ( Σ , σ ) is a proper log symplectic manifold [14 Theorem 2.15] . Since σ \sigma σ is injective on the dense set Σ ∖ D \Sigma\setminus D Σ ∖ D , an isomorphism of Lie algebroids Lie ( G ) → T σ ∗ Σ \operatorname{Lie}(\mathcal{G})\to T^*_\sigma\Sigma Lie ( G ) → T σ ∗ Σ covering the identity is determined by the anchors. So it is unique if it exists, and we omit it from the notation.
The cover { V i } i ∪ { U j } j \{V_i\}_i\cup\{U_j\}_j { V i } i ∪ { U j } j is a finite orbit cover, since the leaves are the finitely many V i V_i V i and the points of D D D . Over V i V_i V i , σ \sigma σ is nondegenerate, so the anchor identifies T σ ∗ V i T^*_\sigma V_i T σ ∗ V i with T V i TV_i T V i , whose source-simply-connected integration is the fundamental groupoid Π 1 ( V i ) \Pi_1(V_i) Π 1 ( V i ) . The greatest element of Λ ( Π 1 ( V i ) ) \Lambda(\Pi_1(V_i)) Λ ( Π 1 ( V i )) is its full isotropy N V i \mathcal{N}_{V_i} N V i , which is closed, and Π 1 ( V i ) / N V i = V i × V i \Pi_1(V_i)/\mathcal{N}_{V_i}=V_i\times V_i Π 1 ( V i ) / N V i = V i × V i [14 Example 1.23] . Over U j U_j U j , by Lemma 3.5 with I = ( − c j , c j ) I=(-c_j,c_j) I = ( − c j , c j ) , the source-simply-connected integration is G j ∣ U j \mathcal{G}_j|_{U_j} G j ∣ U j , and N j ∩ G j ∣ U j \mathcal{N}_j\cap\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_j} N j ∩ G j ∣ U j is a closed greatest element of Λ ( G j ∣ U j ) \Lambda(\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_j}) Λ ( G j ∣ U j ) , with quotient G ‾ j ∣ U j \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_{U_j} G j ∣ U j .
The family ( N V i ) i ∪ ( N j ∩ G j ∣ U j ) j (\mathcal{N}_{V_i})_i\cup(\mathcal{N}_j\cap\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_j})_j ( N V i ) i ∪ ( N j ∩ G j ∣ U j ) j is compatible. Indeed, the V i V_i V i are pairwise disjoint, and so are the U j U_j U j , so, by (28) , the remaining overlaps are the components U U U of the sets U j ∖ D j U_j\setminus D_j U j ∖ D j , with U ⊂ V i U\subset V_i U ⊂ V i for a unique i i i . Then U = U I U=U_I U = U I with I = ( 0 , c j ) I=(0,c_j) I = ( 0 , c j ) or I = ( − c j , 0 ) I=(-c_j,0) I = ( − c j , 0 ) , and T σ ∗ U ≃ T U T^*_\sigma U\simeq TU T σ ∗ U ≃ T U , so the source-simply-connected integration over U U U is Π 1 ( U ) \Pi_1(U) Π 1 ( U ) , with full isotropy Iso ( Π 1 ( U ) ) \operatorname{Iso}(\Pi_1(U)) Iso ( Π 1 ( U )) . Since N V i \mathcal{N}_{V_i} N V i is the full isotropy and the canonical morphism Π 1 ( U ) → ( Π 1 ( V i ) ) U \Pi_1(U)\to(\Pi_1(V_i))_U Π 1 ( U ) → ( Π 1 ( V i ) ) U covers the identity, res V i , U ( N V i ) = Iso ( Π 1 ( U ) ) \operatorname{res}_{V_i,U}(\mathcal{N}_{V_i})=\operatorname{Iso}(\Pi_1(U)) res V i , U ( N V i ) = Iso ( Π 1 ( U )) . By Lemma 3.5, G j ∣ U ≃ Π 1 ( U ) \mathcal{G}_j|_U\simeq\Pi_1(U) G j ∣ U ≃ Π 1 ( U ) , and, by Lemma 3.2, N j ∩ G j ∣ U \mathcal{N}_j\cap\mathcal{G}_j|_U N j ∩ G j ∣ U is the full isotropy of G j ∣ U \mathcal{G}_j|_U G j ∣ U , so res U , V i ( N j ∩ G j ∣ U j ) = Iso ( Π 1 ( U ) ) \operatorname{res}_{U,V_i}(\mathcal{N}_j\cap\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_j})=\operatorname{Iso}(\Pi_1(U)) res U , V i ( N j ∩ G j ∣ U j ) = Iso ( Π 1 ( U )) .
Proposition 3.6. The family ( N V i ) i ∪ ( N j ∩ G j ∣ U j ) j (\mathcal{N}_{V_i})_i\cup(\mathcal{N}_j\cap\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_j})_j ( N V i ) i ∪ ( N j ∩ G j ∣ U j ) j glues to the adjoint integration G Σ \mathcal{G}_\Sigma G Σ of T σ ∗ Σ T^*_\sigma\Sigma T σ ∗ Σ , and G Σ \mathcal{G}_\Sigma G Σ is Hausdorff. There is a unique 2 2 2 -form Ω Σ \Omega_\Sigma Ω Σ on G Σ \mathcal{G}_\Sigma G Σ with
G Σ ∣ V i = V i × V i , Ω Σ ∣ V i × V i = t ∗ ω i − s ∗ ω i , \mathcal{G}_\Sigma|_{V_i}=V_i\times V_i,
\qquad\Omega_\Sigma|_{V_i\times V_i}=t^*\omega_i-s^*\omega_i, G Σ ∣ V i = V i × V i , Ω Σ ∣ V i × V i = t ∗ ω i − s ∗ ω i , G Σ ∣ U j = G ‾ j ∣ U j , Ω Σ ∣ G ‾ j ∣ U j = Ω ‾ j , \mathcal{G}_\Sigma|_{U_j}=\overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_{U_j},
\qquad\Omega_\Sigma|_{\overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_{U_j}}=\overline{\Omega}_j, G Σ ∣ U j = G j ∣ U j , Ω Σ ∣ G j ∣ U j = Ω j , and ( G Σ , Ω Σ ) (\mathcal{G}_\Sigma,\Omega_\Sigma) ( G Σ , Ω Σ ) is a symplectic groupoid integrating ( Σ , σ ) (\Sigma,\sigma) ( Σ , σ ) . Over U j U_j U j , the isomorphism Lie ( G Σ ) → T σ ∗ Σ \operatorname{Lie}(\mathcal{G}_\Sigma)\to T^*_\sigma\Sigma Lie ( G Σ ) → T σ ∗ Σ , v ↦ ι v Ω Σ v\mapsto\iota_v\Omega_\Sigma v ↦ ι v Ω Σ , corresponds under q j q_j q j to the inverse of χ \chi χ .
Proof. By compatibility and the gluing criterion of § 3.2 , the family glues to the adjoint integration G Σ \mathcal{G}_\Sigma G Σ , with ( G Σ ∣ V i ) c = V i × V i (\mathcal{G}_\Sigma|_{V_i})^c=V_i\times V_i ( G Σ ∣ V i ) c = V i × V i and ( G Σ ∣ U j ) c = G ‾ j ∣ U j (\mathcal{G}_\Sigma|_{U_j})^c=\overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_{U_j} ( G Σ ∣ U j ) c = G j ∣ U j . Since G Σ \mathcal{G}_\Sigma G Σ is source-connected, its orbits are the leaves. For x ∈ V i x\in V_i x ∈ V i , the source fibre of G Σ ∣ V i \mathcal{G}_\Sigma|_{V_i} G Σ ∣ V i over x x x is the connected fibre s − 1 ( x ) s^{-1}(x) s − 1 ( x ) , so G Σ ∣ V i = V i × V i \mathcal{G}_\Sigma|_{V_i}=V_i\times V_i G Σ ∣ V i = V i × V i and t t t maps s − 1 ( x ) s^{-1}(x) s − 1 ( x ) bijectively onto V i V_i V i . If moreover x ∈ U j x\in U_j x ∈ U j , the source fibre of G Σ ∣ U j \mathcal{G}_\Sigma|_{U_j} G Σ ∣ U j over x x x is s − 1 ( x ) ∩ t − 1 ( U j ) ≃ V i ∩ U j s^{-1}(x)\cap t^{-1}(U_j)\simeq V_i\cap U_j s − 1 ( x ) ∩ t − 1 ( U j ) ≃ V i ∩ U j , which is connected by (28) . If x ∈ D j x\in D_j x ∈ D j , it is s − 1 ( x ) s^{-1}(x) s − 1 ( x ) , since the orbit of x x x is { x } \{x\} { x } . Hence G Σ ∣ U j = G ‾ j ∣ U j \mathcal{G}_\Sigma|_{U_j}=\overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_{U_j} G Σ ∣ U j = G j ∣ U j .
The open subgroupoids G Σ ∣ V i \mathcal{G}_\Sigma|_{V_i} G Σ ∣ V i and G Σ ∣ U j \mathcal{G}_\Sigma|_{U_j} G Σ ∣ U j cover G Σ \mathcal{G}_\Sigma G Σ . They also cover composable pairs: both arrows of a composable pair ( g , h ) (g,h) ( g , h ) lie in V i V_i V i if s ( g ) = t ( h ) ∈ V i s(g)=t(h)\in V_i s ( g ) = t ( h ) ∈ V i , and both are loops in G ‾ j ∣ U j \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_{U_j} G j ∣ U j if s ( g ) ∈ D j s(g)\in D_j s ( g ) ∈ D j . The only nonempty overlaps are the G Σ ∣ U \mathcal{G}_\Sigma|_U G Σ ∣ U , with U U U as above, and ( t , s ) (t,s) ( t , s ) is injective on them. Therefore, t ∗ ω i − s ∗ ω i t^*\omega_i-s^*\omega_i t ∗ ω i − s ∗ ω i and Ω ‾ j \overline{\Omega}_j Ω j both equal t ∗ ω − s ∗ ω t^*\omega-s^*\omega t ∗ ω − s ∗ ω , by Lemma 3.1, (32) and ω i = ω \omega_i=\omega ω i = ω on U U U , so they patch to a unique 2 2 2 -form Ω Σ \Omega_\Sigma Ω Σ .
Closedness, nondegeneracy, multiplicativity and the Poisson property of t t t can be checked on the pieces, and hold over U j U_j U j by Proposition 3.4 and Lemma 3.5, and over V i V_i V i since t ∗ ω i − s ∗ ω i = ( t , s ) ∗ ( ω i ⊕ ( − ω i ) ) t^*\omega_i-s^*\omega_i=(t,s)^*(\omega_i\oplus(-\omega_i)) t ∗ ω i − s ∗ ω i = ( t , s ) ∗ ( ω i ⊕ ( − ω i )) and t = pr 1 ∘ ( t , s ) t=\operatorname{pr}_1\circ(t,s) t = pr 1 ∘ ( t , s ) , as in the proof of Lemma 3.1. The last assertion follows from Lemmas 3.1 and (32) .
:::
For the Hausdorff property, let g ≠ g ′ g \ne g' g = g ′ in G Σ G_\Sigma G Σ . If ( t , s ) ( g ) ≠ ( t , s ) ( g ′ ) (t,s)(g) \ne(t,s)(g') ( t , s ) ( g ) = ( t , s ) ( g ′ ) , then ( t , s ) (t,s) ( t , s ) separates g g g and g ′ g' g ′ . Otherwise, s ( g ) = s ( g ′ ) = x s(g) = s(g') = x s ( g ) = s ( g ′ ) = x and t ( g ) = t ( g ′ ) = y t(g) = t(g') = y t ( g ) = t ( g ′ ) = y . If x ∈ V i x \in V_i x ∈ V i , then g = g ′ = ( y , x ) g = g' = (y,x) g = g ′ = ( y , x ) in V i × V i V_i \times V_i V i × V i , a contradiction. So x ∈ D j x \in D_j x ∈ D j for some j j j , and g , g ′ g,g' g , g ′ lie in the open subgroupoid G j ∣ U j \mathcal{G}_j|_{U_j} G j ∣ U j , which is Hausdorff by Proposition 3.4. □
Gualtieri and Li also obtain the adjoint integration of a proper log symplectic manifold as a symplectic pair groupoid [14 Theorem 2.15 and Corollary 2.19] , which is isomorphic to G Σ G_\Sigma G Σ by uniqueness of the adjoint integration. At x ∈ D j x \in D_j x ∈ D j , the subgroupoid N j \mathcal{N}_j N j is trivial over { r = 0 } \{r=0\} { r = 0 } , so q j q_j q j maps G j , x = Aff + ( R ) \mathcal{G}_{j,x} = \operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) G j , x = Aff + ( R ) isomorphically onto G Σ , x G_{\Sigma,x} G Σ , x . We use it to identify G Σ , x G_{\Sigma,x} G Σ , x with Aff + ( R ) \operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) Aff + ( R ) .
Since G Σ G_\Sigma G Σ is source-connected, t ( g ) t(g) t ( g ) lies in the leaf through s ( g ) s(g) s ( g ) , which is { s ( g ) } \{s(g)\} { s ( g )} if s ( g ) ∈ D s(g) \in D s ( g ) ∈ D , and V i V_i V i if s ( g ) ∈ V i s(g) \in V_i s ( g ) ∈ V i , in which case g ∈ G Σ ∣ V i = V i × V i g \in G_\Sigma|_{V_i} = V_i \times V_i g ∈ G Σ ∣ V i = V i × V i by Proposition 3.6. Hence, for every arrow g g g of G Σ G_\Sigma G Σ ,
t ( g ) = s ( g ) if s ( g ) ∈ D , (33) t(g) = s(g) \qquad\text{if } s(g) \in D, \tag*{(33)} t ( g ) = s ( g ) if s ( g ) ∈ D , (33)
g = ( t ( g ) , s ( g ) ) ∈ V i × V i if s ( g ) ∈ V i . (34) g = (t(g),s(g)) \in V_i \times V_i \qquad\text{if } s(g) \in V_i. \tag*{(34)} g = ( t ( g ) , s ( g )) ∈ V i × V i if s ( g ) ∈ V i . (34)
Lagrangian subgroupoids of admissible curves
In this section, we construct the Lagrangian integrations of curves inside the adjoint symplectic groupoid G Σ G_\Sigma G Σ . Let N ⊂ Σ N \subset\Sigma N ⊂ Σ be a curve, meaning a closed embedded one-dimensional submanifold. Every such curve is coisotropic, so its conormal bundle T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ is a Lie subalgebroid of T ∗ Σ T^*\Sigma T ∗ Σ . For an admissible curve, we will integrate this subalgebroid to an embedded Lagrangian subgroupoid of G Σ G_\Sigma G Σ and prove Theorem B. The construction supplies the subgroupoids used in §§§ 5 and § 6 .
Admissible curves
We first fix the types of components of N N N and local coordinates at the points of N ∩ D N \cap D N ∩ D . The curve N N N has finitely many components N c N_c N c , each diffeomorphic to a circle.
Definition 4.1. A curve N N N is admissible if every component N c N_c N c is of one of the following types:
N c ⊂ Σ ∖ D N_c \subset\Sigma\setminus D N c ⊂ Σ ∖ D ;
N c = D j N_c = D_j N c = D j for some j j j ;
N c ∩ D N_c \cap D N c ∩ D is a nonempty finite set.
The curve N N N is tangent to D D D at x ∈ N ∩ D x \in N \cap D x ∈ N ∩ D if T x N = T x D T_xN = T_xD T x N = T x D . For a component N c N_c N c of type (3), a contact at x ∈ N c ∩ D x \in N_c \cap D x ∈ N c ∩ D is tangential if T x N = T x D T_xN = T_xD T x N = T x D , and transverse otherwise.
Figure 2 shows a component with two transverse contacts p p p , q q q , and a component with a single tangential contact p p p . From now on, N N N is admissible. For N c N_c N c of type (3), we write C c = N c ∩ D C_c = N_c \cap D C c = N c ∩ D . Let N 0 N_0 N 0 and N D N_D N D be the unions of the components of type (1) and (2), and let C C C be the union of the sets C c C_c C c , which is finite. For N c N_c N c of type (3), removing the ∣ C c ∣ ≥ 1 |C_c| \ge1 ∣ C c ∣ ≥ 1 points of C c C_c C c from the circle N c N_c N c leaves ∣ C c ∣ |C_c| ∣ C c ∣ open arcs, contained in Σ ∖ D \Sigma\setminus D Σ ∖ D . Writing K \mathcal{K} K for the set of all these arcs, we obtain
Figure 2. Transverse and tangential contacts.
N = N 0 ⊔ N D ⊔ ( ⨆ K ∈ K K ) ⊔ C . (35) N = N_0 \sqcup N_D \sqcup\left(\bigsqcup_{K \in\mathcal{K}} K\right) \sqcup C. \tag*{(35)} N = N 0 ⊔ N D ⊔ ( K ∈ K ⨆ K ) ⊔ C . (35)
A box around p ∈ D j p \in D_j p ∈ D j is an open set W = J × I ⊂ U j W = J \times I \subset U_j W = J × I ⊂ U j containing p p p , where J ⊂ S ℓ j 1 J \subset S^1_{\ell_j} J ⊂ S ℓ j 1 is an open arc of length less than ℓ j \ell_j ℓ j and I ⊂ ( − c j , c j ) I \subset(-c_j,c_j) I ⊂ ( − c j , c j ) is an open interval. Choose a lift J ~ ⊂ R \widetilde{J} \subset\mathbb{R} J ⊂ R of J J J . We identify J J J with this lift whenever we use real coordinates, take derivatives, or write expressions such as t + b r t + br t + b r and t − γ ( r ) t - \gamma(r) t − γ ( r ) . In particular, a condition such as t + b r ∈ J ~ t + br \in\widetilde{J} t + b r ∈ J refers to the real-valued expression, before reduction modulo ℓ j \ell_j ℓ j .
Lemma 4.2. Let N c N_c N c be of type (3), and let p ∈ N c ∩ D j p \in N_c \cap D_j p ∈ N c ∩ D j be a transverse contact. Translating t t t , assume p = ( 0 , 0 ) p=(0,0) p = ( 0 , 0 ) . There are a box W = J × I W=J\times I W = J × I around p p p and a smooth function γ : I → J \gamma:I\to J γ : I → J with γ ( 0 ) = 0 \gamma(0)=0 γ ( 0 ) = 0 such that, in the coordinates ( s , r ) (s,r) ( s , r ) on W W W with s = t − γ ( r ) s=t-\gamma(r) s = t − γ ( r ) ,
σ = r ∂ ∂ r ∧ ∂ ∂ s , D j ∩ W = { r = 0 } , N c ∩ W = { s = 0 } = { ( γ ( r ) , r ) : r ∈ I } . \sigma=r\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial s},\qquad D_j\cap W=\{r=0\},\qquad N_c\cap W=\{s=0\}=\{(\gamma(r),r):r\in I\}. σ = r ∂ r ∂ ∧ ∂ s ∂ , D j ∩ W = { r = 0 } , N c ∩ W = { s = 0 } = {( γ ( r ) , r ) : r ∈ I } .
Lemma 4.3. Let N c N_c N c be of type (3), and let p ∈ N c ∩ D j p\in N_c\cap D_j p ∈ N c ∩ D j be a tangential contact. Translating t t t , assume p = ( 0 , 0 ) p=(0,0) p = ( 0 , 0 ) . There are a box W = J × I W=J\times I W = J × I around p p p , with I = ( − ε , ε ) I=(-\varepsilon,\varepsilon) I = ( − ε , ε ) , and a smooth function h : J → I h:J\to I h : J → I with h ( 0 ) = h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 h(0)=h'(0)=0 h ( 0 ) = h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 and h ( t ) ≠ 0 h(t)\ne0 h ( t ) = 0 for t ≠ 0 t\ne0 t = 0 , such that in the coordinates (26)
D j ∩ W = { r = 0 } , N c ∩ W = { ( t , h ( t ) ) : t ∈ J } . D_j\cap W=\{r=0\},\qquad N_c\cap W=\{(t,h(t)):t\in J\}. D j ∩ W = { r = 0 } , N c ∩ W = {( t , h ( t )) : t ∈ J } .
Proof of Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3. Since T p D j = ⟨ ∂ ∂ t ⟩ T_pD_j=\langle\frac{\partial}{\partial t}\rangle T p D j = ⟨ ∂ t ∂ ⟩ , the restriction of d r dr d r to T p N c T_pN_c T p N c is nonzero at a transverse contact, while that of d t dt d t is nonzero at a tangential contact. The inverse function theorem therefore gives an open arc N p ⊂ N c N_p\subset N_c N p ⊂ N c containing p p p which is a graph over r r r in the first case and over t t t in the second.
At a transverse contact, write this graph as t = γ ( r ) t=\gamma(r) t = γ ( r ) for r ∈ I 0 r\in I_0 r ∈ I 0 , with γ ( 0 ) = 0 \gamma(0)=0 γ ( 0 ) = 0 . Since N c ∖ N p N_c\setminus N_p N c ∖ N p is closed and misses p p p , there is a box J × I 1 J\times I_1 J × I 1 around p p p disjoint from this closed set, with I 1 ⊂ I 0 I_1\subset I_0 I 1 ⊂ I 0 . Shrink I 1 I_1 I 1 to an interval I ∋ 0 I\ni0 I ∋ 0 such that γ ( I ) ⊂ J \gamma(I)\subset J γ ( I ) ⊂ J . Then W = J × I W=J\times I W = J × I satisfies N c ∩ W = { ( γ ( r ) , r ) : r ∈ I } N_c\cap W=\{(\gamma(r),r):r\in I\} N c ∩ W = {( γ ( r ) , r ) : r ∈ I } . The change of coordinates s = t − γ ( r ) s=t-\gamma(r) s = t − γ ( r ) preserves the normal-form bivector:
∂ ∂ r ∧ ∂ ∂ s = ∂ ∂ r ∧ ∂ ∂ t , \frac{\partial}{\partial r}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial s}=\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial t}, ∂ r ∂ ∧ ∂ s ∂ = ∂ r ∂ ∧ ∂ t ∂ ,
where the first ∂ ∂ r \frac{\partial}{\partial r} ∂ r ∂ is taken in the system ( s , r ) (s,r) ( s , r ) .
At a tangential contact, write the graph as r = h ( t ) r=h(t) r = h ( t ) for t ∈ J 0 t\in J_0 t ∈ J 0 . Tangency gives
⟨ ∂ ∂ t + h ′ ( 0 ) ∂ ∂ r ⟩ = T p N c = ⟨ ∂ ∂ t ⟩ , \left\langle\frac{\partial}{\partial t}+h'(0)\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\right\rangle=T_pN_c=\left\langle\frac{\partial}{\partial t}\right\rangle, ⟨ ∂ t ∂ + h ′ ( 0 ) ∂ r ∂ ⟩ = T p N c = ⟨ ∂ t ∂ ⟩ ,
so h ( 0 ) = h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 h(0)=h'(0)=0 h ( 0 ) = h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 . Choose a box J 1 × ( − ε , ε ) J_1\times(-\varepsilon,\varepsilon) J 1 × ( − ε , ε ) disjoint from N c ∖ N p N_c\setminus N_p N c ∖ N p , with J 1 ⊂ J 0 J_1\subset J_0 J 1 ⊂ J 0 . Because N c ∩ D N_c\cap D N c ∩ D is finite, we may shrink J 1 J_1 J 1 to an arc J ∋ 0 J\ni0 J ∋ 0 such that
h ( J ) ⊂ I = ( − ε , ε ) , h − 1 ( 0 ) = { 0 } . h(J)\subset I=(-\varepsilon,\varepsilon),\qquad h^{-1}(0)=\{0\}. h ( J ) ⊂ I = ( − ε , ε ) , h − 1 ( 0 ) = { 0 } .
For W = J × I W=J\times I W = J × I , this gives N c ∩ W = { ( t , h ( t ) ) : t ∈ J } N_c\cap W=\{(t,h(t)):t\in J\} N c ∩ W = {( t , h ( t )) : t ∈ J } , as required. □
From now on, ∂ ∂ r \frac{\partial}{\partial r} ∂ r ∂ denotes the coordinate field of r r r in whichever of the two systems is in use.
Local Lagrangian subgroupoids
We construct the integration separately over the pieces of (35) . Away from the finite contact set C C C , the models are pair groupoids and bundles of translation groups. At transverse and tangential contacts, we will construct smooth local subgroupoids joining the adjacent pair groupoids to the appropriate isotropy groups. We use (34) throughout.
Let K ⊂ Σ ∖ D K\subset\Sigma\setminus D K ⊂ Σ ∖ D be a connected embedded one-dimensional submanifold, not necessarily closed. It lies in a single V i V_i V i , over which G Σ = V i × V i G_\Sigma=V_i\times V_i G Σ = V i × V i with the form t ∗ ω i − s ∗ ω i t^*\omega_i-s^*\omega_i t ∗ ω i − s ∗ ω i (Proposition 3.6). Since K K K is Lagrangian in V i V_i V i , the anchor σ : T ∗ V i → T V i \sigma:T^*V_i\to TV_i σ : T ∗ V i → T V i identifies T K ∘ TK^\circ T K ∘ with T K TK T K . The pair groupoid K × K K\times K K × K therefore integrates T K ∘ TK^\circ T K ∘ , is embedded, and has connected source fibres. It is Lagrangian because
( t ∗ ω i − s ∗ ω i ) ∣ K × K = t ∗ ( ω i ∣ K ) − s ∗ ( ω i ∣ K ) = 0. (t^*\omega_i-s^*\omega_i)|_{K\times K}=t^*(\omega_i|_K)-s^*(\omega_i|_K)=0. ( t ∗ ω i − s ∗ ω i ) ∣ K × K = t ∗ ( ω i ∣ K ) − s ∗ ( ω i ∣ K ) = 0.
Near D j D_j D j , we first construct the local models in G j G_j G j and then pass through q j q_j q j to G Σ G_\Sigma G Σ . Because a local diffeomorphism can identify distinct points, we will use the following embedding criterion . Let O ⊂ G j O\subset G_j O ⊂ G j be open, and let L ⊂ O L\subset O L ⊂ O be an embedded submanifold with
q j − 1 ( q j ( g ) ) ∩ O = { g } for every g ∈ L . (36) q_j^{-1}(q_j(g))\cap O=\{g\}\qquad\text{for every }g\in L. \tag*{(36)} q j − 1 ( q j ( g )) ∩ O = { g } for every g ∈ L . (36)
Then q j ∣ L q_j|_L q j ∣ L is an injective immersion, and q j ( L ∩ O ′ ) = q j ( L ) ∩ q j ( O ′ ) q_j(L\cap O')=q_j(L)\cap q_j(O') q j ( L ∩ O ′ ) = q j ( L ) ∩ q j ( O ′ ) for every open O ′ ⊂ O O'\subset O O ′ ⊂ O . So q j ∣ L q_j|_L q j ∣ L is a homeomorphism onto its image, and q j ( L ) q_j(L) q j ( L ) is an embedded submanifold of G j G_j G j , with q j ∣ L q_j|_L q j ∣ L a diffeomorphism onto it [[19 ] , Proposition 5.2].
The fibres of q j q_j q j are the orbits of the right action of N j N_j N j (proof of Proposition 3.4). So, by Lemma 3.2 and (3.4), if g ≠ g ′ g\ne g' g = g ′ in G j G_j G j and q j ( g ) = q j ( g ′ ) q_j(g)=q_j(g') q j ( g ) = q j ( g ′ ) , then g g g and g ′ g' g ′ have the same coordinates a a a , t t t and r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 , and b b b -coordinates differing by k ℓ j / r k\ell_j/r k ℓ j / r with k ∈ Z ∖ { 0 } k\in\mathbb{Z}\setminus\{0\} k ∈ Z ∖ { 0 } . In particular, q j q_j q j is not injective on the restriction G j ∣ W G_j|_W G j ∣ W to a box W W W : for r ∈ I ∖ { 0 } r\in I\setminus\{0\} r ∈ I ∖ { 0 } , the arrows ( a , b , t , r ) (a,b,t,r) ( a , b , t , r ) and ( a , b + k ℓ j / r , t , r ) (a,b+k\ell_j/r,t,r) ( a , b + k ℓ j / r , t , r ) have the same source and target, so one lies in G j ∣ W G_j|_W G j ∣ W if and only if the other does, and they have the same image under q j q_j q j . Requiring both endpoint coordinates to lie in the chosen lift J ~ \widetilde J J selects a unique preimage, as the next lemma shows.
Lemma 4.4. Let W = J × I W=J\times I W = J × I be a box around a point of D j D_j D j . Then
G j , W l o c = { ( a , b , t , r ) ∈ G j : t ∈ J ~ , t + b r ∈ J ~ , r ∈ I , a r ∈ I } \mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{loc}}_{j,W}=\{(a,b,t,r)\in\mathcal{G}_j:t\in\widetilde{J},\ t+br\in\widetilde{J},\ r\in I,\ ar\in I\} G j , W loc = {( a , b , t , r ) ∈ G j : t ∈ J , t + b r ∈ J , r ∈ I , a r ∈ I } is an open subset of G j ∣ W \mathcal{G}_j|_W G j ∣ W which contains the isotropy groups G j , x \mathcal{G}_{j,x} G j , x for x ∈ D j ∩ W x\in D_j\cap W x ∈ D j ∩ W , and q j q_j q j restricts to a diffeomorphism from G j , W l o c \mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{loc}}_{j,W} G j , W loc onto G ‾ j ∣ W \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_W G j ∣ W .
Proof. The conditions are open, and they hold on G j , x \mathcal{G}_{j,x} G j , x since r = 0 r=0 r = 0 there. If g ≠ g ′ g\ne g' g = g ′ in G j , W l o c \mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{loc}}_{j,W} G j , W loc had the same image, then r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 and the values of t + b r t+br t + b r for g g g and g ′ g' g ′ would differ by k ℓ j k\ell_j k ℓ j with k ≠ 0 k\ne0 k = 0 , which is impossible since both lie in J ~ \widetilde{J} J . So q j q_j q j is injective on G j , W l o c \mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{loc}}_{j,W} G j , W loc . Conversely, an arrow of G ‾ j ∣ W \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_W G j ∣ W is q j ( a , b , t , r ) q_j(a,b,t,r) q j ( a , b , t , r ) with t ∈ J ~ t\in\widetilde{J} t ∈ J , r ∈ I r\in I r ∈ I , a r ∈ I ar\in I a r ∈ I and t + b r ∈ J ~ + ℓ j Z t+br\in\widetilde{J}+\ell_j\mathbb{Z} t + b r ∈ J + ℓ j Z . If r = 0 r=0 r = 0 , then t + b r = t ∈ J ~ t+br=t\in\widetilde{J} t + b r = t ∈ J . If r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 , then t + b r − k ℓ j ∈ J ~ t+br-k\ell_j\in\widetilde{J} t + b r − k ℓ j ∈ J for some k ∈ Z k\in\mathbb{Z} k ∈ Z , and ( a , b − k ℓ j / r , t , r ) = ( a , b , t , r ) ( 1 , − k ℓ j / r , t , r ) (a,b-k\ell_j/r,t,r)=(a,b,t,r)(1,-k\ell_j/r,t,r) ( a , b − k ℓ j / r , t , r ) = ( a , b , t , r ) ( 1 , − k ℓ j / r , t , r ) lies in G j , W l o c \mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{loc}}_{j,W} G j , W loc and has the same image. So q j q_j q j maps G j , W l o c \mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{loc}}_{j,W} G j , W loc bijectively onto G ‾ j ∣ W \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_W G j ∣ W , hence diffeomorphically, since q j q_j q j is a local diffeomorphism. □
Proposition 4.5. Let N c = D j N_c=D_j N c = D j , and let L ^ c = { ( 1 , b , t , 0 ) : b ∈ R , t ∈ S ℓ j 1 } ⊂ G j \widehat{L}_c=\{(1,b,t,0):b\in\mathbb{R},\ t\in S^1_{\ell_j}\}\subset\mathcal{G}_j L c = {( 1 , b , t , 0 ) : b ∈ R , t ∈ S ℓ j 1 } ⊂ G j . Then L c = q j ( L ^ c ) L_c=q_j(\widehat{L}_c) L c = q j ( L c ) is an embedded Lagrangian subgroupoid of G Σ \mathcal{G}_\Sigma G Σ over D j D_j D j integrating T D j ∘ TD_j^\circ T D j ∘ , with source fibres R \mathbb{R} R .
Proof. In the coordinates (26) , we have T D j ∘ = ⟨ d r ⟩ TD_j^\circ=\langle dr\rangle T D j ∘ = ⟨ d r ⟩ and χ ( d r ) = ζ 2 \chi(dr)=\zeta_2 χ ( d r ) = ζ 2 by (30) . All arrows of L ^ c \widehat{L}_c L c are loops, with multiplication ( 1 , b 2 , t , 0 ) ( 1 , b 1 , t , 0 ) = ( 1 , b 1 + b 2 , t , 0 ) (1,b_2,t,0)(1,b_1,t,0)=(1,b_1+b_2,t,0) ( 1 , b 2 , t , 0 ) ( 1 , b 1 , t , 0 ) = ( 1 , b 1 + b 2 , t , 0 ) . Thus L ^ c \widehat{L}_c L c is a Lie subgroupoid with source fibres R \mathbb{R} R and Lie algebroid ⟨ ζ 2 ⟩ = χ ( T D j ∘ ) \langle\zeta_2\rangle=\chi(TD_j^\circ) ⟨ ζ 2 ⟩ = χ ( T D j ∘ ) .
Since r = 0 r=0 r = 0 on L ^ c \widehat{L}_c L c , every g ∈ L ^ c g\in\widehat{L}_c g ∈ L c is the only point in its q j q_j q j -fibre. The embedding criterion (36) therefore applies with O = G j O=\mathcal{G}_j O = G j . Moreover, every term of (31) contains d α d\alpha d α or d r dr d r , so Ω ∣ L ^ c = 0 \Omega|_{\widehat{L}_c}=0 Ω ∣ L c = 0 . As L ^ c \widehat{L}_c L c has dimension 2 2 2 , it is Lagrangian. Finally, L ^ c ⊂ G j ∣ U j \widehat{L}_c\subset\mathcal{G}_j|_{U_j} L c ⊂ G j ∣ U j , so Proposition 3.6 and (32) give L c ⊂ G Σ L_c\subset\mathcal{G}_\Sigma L c ⊂ G Σ and Ω Σ ∣ L c = 0 \Omega_\Sigma|_{L_c}=0 Ω Σ ∣ L c = 0 . □
At a transverse contact, consider arrows ( a , b , γ ( r ) , r ) (a,b,\gamma(r),r) ( a , b , γ ( r ) , r ) with r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 and r , a r ∈ I r,ar\in I r , a r ∈ I . For representatives whose real target coordinate γ ( r ) + b r \gamma(r)+br γ ( r ) + b r lies in the chosen lift of J J J , the target belongs to N c ∩ W N_c\cap W N c ∩ W precisely when γ ( r ) + b r = γ ( a r ) \gamma(r)+br=\gamma(ar) γ ( r ) + b r = γ ( a r ) . Thus b b b is the divided difference β ( a , r ) \beta(a,r) β ( a , r ) defined below. Its smooth extension across r = 0 r=0 r = 0 gives coordinates that straighten the curve inside G j \mathcal{G}_j G j .
Lemma 4.6. Let W = J × I W=J\times I W = J × I and γ \gamma γ be as in Lemma 4.2, and set
β ( a , r ) = { γ ( a r ) − γ ( r ) r , r ≠ 0 , ( a − 1 ) γ ′ ( 0 ) , r = 0. \beta(a,r)=
\begin{cases}
\dfrac{\gamma(ar)-\gamma(r)}{r}, & r\ne0,\\
(a-1)\gamma'(0), & r=0.
\end{cases} β ( a , r ) = ⎩ ⎨ ⎧ r γ ( a r ) − γ ( r ) , ( a − 1 ) γ ′ ( 0 ) , r = 0 , r = 0. Then β \beta β is smooth on { ( a , r ) : a > 0 , r ∈ I , a r ∈ I } \{(a,r):a>0,\ r\in I,\ ar\in I\} {( a , r ) : a > 0 , r ∈ I , a r ∈ I } , and the functions a a a , b ′ = b − β ( a , r ) b'=b-\beta(a,r) b ′ = b − β ( a , r ) , s = t − γ ( r ) s=t-\gamma(r) s = t − γ ( r ) and r r r are coordinates on O W = { ( a , b , t , r ) ∈ G j : t ∈ J , r ∈ I , a r ∈ I } O_W=\{(a,b,t,r)\in\mathcal{G}_j:t\in J,\ r\in I,\ ar\in I\} O W = {( a , b , t , r ) ∈ G j : t ∈ J , r ∈ I , a r ∈ I } . In these coordinates,
s ( a , b ′ , s , r ) = ( s , r ) , t ( a , b ′ , s , r ) = ( s + b ′ r , a r ) , s(a,b',s,r)=(s,r),\qquad t(a,b',s,r)=(s+b'r,ar), s ( a , b ′ , s , r ) = ( s , r ) , t ( a , b ′ , s , r ) = ( s + b ′ r , a r ) , ( a 2 , b 2 ′ , s + b 1 ′ r , a 1 r ) ( a 1 , b 1 ′ , s , r ) = ( a 2 a 1 , b 1 ′ + a 1 b 2 ′ , s , r ) , (a_2,b'_2,s+b'_1r,a_1r)(a_1,b'_1,s,r)=(a_2a_1,b'_1+a_1b'_2,s,r), ( a 2 , b 2 ′ , s + b 1 ′ r , a 1 r ) ( a 1 , b 1 ′ , s , r ) = ( a 2 a 1 , b 1 ′ + a 1 b 2 ′ , s , r ) , Ω = d s ∧ d α + d b ′ ∧ d r + b ′ d r ∧ d α + r d b ′ ∧ d α . \Omega=ds\wedge d\alpha+db'\wedge dr+b'\,dr\wedge d\alpha+r\,db'\wedge d\alpha. Ω = d s ∧ d α + d b ′ ∧ d r + b ′ d r ∧ d α + r d b ′ ∧ d α . Here ( s + b ′ r , a r ) (s+b'r,ar) ( s + b ′ r , a r ) stands for the point ( s + b ′ r + γ ( a r ) , a r ) (s+b'r+\gamma(ar),ar) ( s + b ′ r + γ ( a r ) , a r ) of U ~ j \widetilde{U}_j U j , with first coordinate read modulo ℓ j \ell_j ℓ j .
Proof. Hadamard’s lemma gives γ ( u ) = γ ′ ( 0 ) u + u 2 γ 2 ( u ) \gamma(u)=\gamma'(0)u+u^2\gamma_2(u) γ ( u ) = γ ′ ( 0 ) u + u 2 γ 2 ( u ) for a smooth function γ 2 \gamma_2 γ 2 on I I I . Hence
β ( a , r ) = γ ′ ( 0 ) ( a − 1 ) + r ( a 2 γ 2 ( a r ) − γ 2 ( r ) ) \beta(a,r)=\gamma'(0)(a-1)+r\bigl(a^2\gamma_2(ar)-\gamma_2(r)\bigr) β ( a , r ) = γ ′ ( 0 ) ( a − 1 ) + r ( a 2 γ 2 ( a r ) − γ 2 ( r ) ) for every r r r , proving smoothness. The coordinate change has the smooth inverse
( a , b ′ , s , r ) ⟼ ( a , b ′ + β ( a , r ) , s + γ ( r ) , r ) . (a,b',s,r)\longmapsto(a,b'+\beta(a,r),s+\gamma(r),r). ( a , b ′ , s , r ) ⟼ ( a , b ′ + β ( a , r ) , s + γ ( r ) , r ) . The identity r β ( a , r ) = γ ( a r ) − γ ( r ) r\beta(a,r)=\gamma(ar)-\gamma(r) r β ( a , r ) = γ ( a r ) − γ ( r ) gives t + b r = ( s + b ′ r ) + γ ( a r ) t+br=(s+b'r)+\gamma(ar) t + b r = ( s + b ′ r ) + γ ( a r ) , which proves the formulas for source and target. Substituting b i = b i ′ + β ( a i , r i ) b_i=b'_i+\beta(a_i,r_i) b i = b i ′ + β ( a i , r i ) , with r 1 = r r_1=r r 1 = r and r 2 = a 1 r r_2=a_1r r 2 = a 1 r , into (29) reduces the multiplication formula to β ( a 1 , r ) + a 1 β ( a 2 , a 1 r ) = β ( a 2 a 1 , r ) \beta(a_1,r)+a_1\beta(a_2,a_1r)=\beta(a_2a_1,r) β ( a 1 , r ) + a 1 β ( a 2 , a 1 r ) = β ( a 2 a 1 , r ) . For r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 , the two divided differences telescope. At r = 0 r=0 r = 0 , the identity becomes
( a 1 − 1 ) γ ′ ( 0 ) + a 1 ( a 2 − 1 ) γ ′ ( 0 ) = ( a 2 a 1 − 1 ) γ ′ ( 0 ) . (a_1-1)\gamma'(0)+a_1(a_2-1)\gamma'(0)=(a_2a_1-1)\gamma'(0). ( a 1 − 1 ) γ ′ ( 0 ) + a 1 ( a 2 − 1 ) γ ′ ( 0 ) = ( a 2 a 1 − 1 ) γ ′ ( 0 ) . Since d t = d s + γ ′ ( r ) d r dt=ds+\gamma'(r)\,dr d t = d s + γ ′ ( r ) d r , ω = 1 r d s ∧ d r \omega=\frac{1}{r}ds\wedge dr ω = r 1 d s ∧ d r on { r ≠ 0 } \{r\ne0\} { r = 0 } . So the computation of Lemma 3.1, with ( t , b ) (t,b) ( t , b ) renamed ( s , b ′ ) (s,b') ( s , b ′ ) , gives the formula for Ω = t ∗ ω − s ∗ ω \Omega=t^*\omega-s^*\omega Ω = t ∗ ω − s ∗ ω on { r ≠ 0 } \{r\ne0\} { r = 0 } , hence on O W O_W O W by density. □
Proposition 4.7. Let p ∈ N c ∩ D j p \in N_c \cap D_j p ∈ N c ∩ D j be a transverse contact , with W = J × I W = J \times I W = J × I , γ \gamma γ and the coordinates ( a , b ′ , s , r ) (a,b',s,r) ( a , b ′ , s , r ) of Lemmas 4.2 and 4.6 . Let L ^ W = { ( a , 0 , 0 , r ) : a > 0 , r ∈ I , a r ∈ I } ⊂ O W \widehat{L}_W = \{(a,0,0,r): a > 0,\ r \in I,\ ar \in I\} \subset O_W L W = {( a , 0 , 0 , r ) : a > 0 , r ∈ I , a r ∈ I } ⊂ O W . Then L W = q j ( L ^ W ) L_W = q_j(\widehat{L}_W) L W = q j ( L W ) is an embedded, source-connected Lagrangian subgroupoid of G Σ G_\Sigma G Σ over N c ∩ W N_c \cap W N c ∩ W integrating T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ , with isotropy R > 0 \mathbb{R}_{>0} R > 0 at p p p . Moreover, the arrows of L W L_W L W with source different from p p p are
{ ( ( γ ( r ′ ) , r ′ ) , ( γ ( r ) , r ) ) : r , r ′ ∈ I ∖ { 0 } , sign r = sign r ′ } (37) \left\{((\gamma(r'),r'),(\gamma(r),r)): r,r' \in I \setminus\{0\},\ \operatorname{sign} r = \operatorname{sign} r'\right\} \tag*{(37)} { (( γ ( r ′ ) , r ′ ) , ( γ ( r ) , r )) : r , r ′ ∈ I ∖ { 0 } , sign r = sign r ′ } (37) that is, the pairs of points of ( N c ∩ W ) ∖ { p } (N_c \cap W) \setminus\{p\} ( N c ∩ W ) ∖ { p } on the same side of p p p (Figure 3 ).
Figure 3. A transverse contact.
Proof. The set L ^ W = { b ′ = s = 0 } \widehat{L}_W=\{b'=s=0\} L W = { b ′ = s = 0 } is a closed embedded surface in O W O_W O W , parametrized by ( a , r ) (a,r) ( a , r ) . By Lemma 4.6 ,
s ( a , 0 , 0 , r ) = ( 0 , r ) , t ( a , 0 , 0 , r ) = ( 0 , a r ) , ( a 2 , 0 , 0 , a 1 r ) ( a 1 , 0 , 0 , r ) = ( a 2 a 1 , 0 , 0 , r ) . s(a,0,0,r)=(0,r),\qquad t(a,0,0,r)=(0,ar),\qquad(a_2,0,0,a_1r)(a_1,0,0,r)=(a_2a_1,0,0,r). s ( a , 0 , 0 , r ) = ( 0 , r ) , t ( a , 0 , 0 , r ) = ( 0 , a r ) , ( a 2 , 0 , 0 , a 1 r ) ( a 1 , 0 , 0 , r ) = ( a 2 a 1 , 0 , 0 , r ) .
So L ^ W \widehat{L}_W L W is a Lie subgroupoid over { s = 0 } = N c ∩ W \{s=0\}=N_c\cap W { s = 0 } = N c ∩ W , with source fibre { a > 0 : a r ∈ I } \{a>0: ar\in I\} { a > 0 : a r ∈ I } over ( 0 , r ) (0,r) ( 0 , r ) , equal to R > 0 \mathbb{R}_{>0} R > 0 over p p p .
In the coordinates ( a , b , t , r ) (a,b,t,r) ( a , b , t , r ) , the curve α ↦ ( e α , β ( e α , r ) , γ ( r ) , r ) \alpha\mapsto(e^\alpha,\beta(e^\alpha,r),\gamma(r),r) α ↦ ( e α , β ( e α , r ) , γ ( r ) , r ) lies in the source fibre of L ^ W \widehat{L}_W L W through 1 ( γ ( r ) , r ) 1_{(\gamma(r),r)} 1 ( γ ( r ) , r ) , and its velocity at α = 0 \alpha=0 α = 0 is ζ 1 + γ ′ ( r ) ζ 2 \zeta_1+\gamma'(r)\zeta_2 ζ 1 + γ ′ ( r ) ζ 2 since ∂ β ∂ a ( a , r ) = γ ′ ( a r ) \frac{\partial\beta}{\partial a}(a,r)=\gamma'(ar) ∂ a ∂ β ( a , r ) = γ ′ ( a r ) for every r r r . Along N c ∩ W N_c\cap W N c ∩ W , we have
χ ( T N ∘ ) = χ ⟨ d t − γ ′ ( r ) d r ⟩ = ⟨ ζ 1 + γ ′ ( r ) ζ 2 ⟩ . \chi(TN^\circ)=\chi\langle dt-\gamma'(r)\,dr\rangle=\langle\zeta_1+\gamma'(r)\zeta_2\rangle. χ ( T N ∘ ) = χ ⟨ d t − γ ′ ( r ) d r ⟩ = ⟨ ζ 1 + γ ′ ( r ) ζ 2 ⟩ .
Thus L ^ W \widehat{L}_W L W integrates T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ over N c ∩ W N_c\cap W N c ∩ W . Every term of Ω \Omega Ω in Lemma 4.6 contains d s ds d s , d b ′ db' d b ′ or b ′ b' b ′ , so Ω ∣ L ^ W = 0 \Omega|_{\widehat{L}_W}=0 Ω ∣ L W = 0 , and L ^ W \widehat{L}_W L W is Lagrangian since it has dimension 2.
Let r ˉ = sup I ∣ r ∣ \bar r=\sup_I|r| r ˉ = sup I ∣ r ∣ and O = O W ∩ { ∣ b ′ ∣ < ℓ j / ( 2 r ˉ ) } ⊃ L ^ W O=O_W\cap\{|b'|<\ell_j/(2\bar r)\}\supset\widehat{L}_W O = O W ∩ { ∣ b ′ ∣ < ℓ j / ( 2 r ˉ )} ⊃ L W . Two distinct points of O O O in one fibre of q j q_j q j would have the same a a a , s s s and r r r , and b ′ b' b ′ -coordinates differing by at least ℓ j / r ˉ \ell_j/\bar r ℓ j / r ˉ , which is impossible. So (4.2) holds, L W L_W L W is embedded in G j ∣ U j ⊂ G Σ \mathcal{G}_j|_{U_j}\subset G_\Sigma G j ∣ U j ⊂ G Σ , and Ω Σ ∣ L W = 0 \Omega_\Sigma|_{L_W}=0 Ω Σ ∣ L W = 0 by (3.7).
For g = ( a , 0 , 0 , r ) g=(a,0,0,r) g = ( a , 0 , 0 , r ) with r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 , s ( g ) = ( γ ( r ) , r ) s(g)=(\gamma(r),r) s ( g ) = ( γ ( r ) , r ) and t ( g ) = ( γ ( a r ) , a r ) t(g)=(\gamma(ar),ar) t ( g ) = ( γ ( a r ) , a r ) , and { a r : a > 0 , a r ∈ I } = I ∩ r R > 0 \{ar:a>0,\ ar\in I\}=I\cap r\mathbb{R}_{>0} { a r : a > 0 , a r ∈ I } = I ∩ r R > 0 . Hence (4.3), by (3.9). □ \square □
At a tangential contact, an arrow ( a , b , t , h ( t ) ) (a,b,t,h(t)) ( a , b , t , h ( t )) has target ( t + b h ( t ) , a h ( t ) ) (t+bh(t),ah(t)) ( t + bh ( t ) , ah ( t )) . When t + b h ( t ) t+bh(t) t + bh ( t ) lies in the chosen lift of J J J , the target belongs to N c ∩ W N_c\cap W N c ∩ W precisely when a h ( t ) = h ( t + b h ( t ) ) ah(t)=h(t+bh(t)) ah ( t ) = h ( t + bh ( t )) . For t ≠ 0 t\ne0 t = 0 , this determines a a a as a function of ( t , b ) (t,b) ( t , b ) . The next lemma extends that function smoothly across t = 0 t=0 t = 0 on a domain that keeps source and target on the same side of the contact. We denote the target coordinate by τ ( t , b ) \tau(t,b) τ ( t , b ) and the extended value of a a a by η ( t , b ) \eta(t,b) η ( t , b ) .
Lemma 4.8. Let p p p , W = J × I W=J\times I W = J × I and h h h be as in Lemma 4.3 . Write h ( t ) = t h 1 ( t ) h(t)=t h_1(t) h ( t ) = t h 1 ( t ) with h 1 h_1 h 1 smooth, and set
τ ( t , b ) = t + b h ( t ) , S = { ( t , b ) ∈ J × R : τ ( t , b ) ∈ J , 1 + b h 1 ( t ) > 0 } . \tau(t,b)=t+bh(t),\qquad S=\{(t,b)\in J\times\mathbb{R}:\tau(t,b)\in J,\ 1+bh_1(t)>0\}. τ ( t , b ) = t + bh ( t ) , S = {( t , b ) ∈ J × R : τ ( t , b ) ∈ J , 1 + b h 1 ( t ) > 0 } .
For t ∈ J t \in J t ∈ J , write S t = { b ∈ R : ( t , b ) ∈ S } S_t=\{b\in\mathbb{R}:(t,b)\in S\} S t = { b ∈ R : ( t , b ) ∈ S } , and for t ≠ 0 t\ne0 t = 0 set J t = { u ∈ J : u t > 0 } J_t=\{u\in J:ut>0\} J t = { u ∈ J : u t > 0 } . Then S S S is open, S 0 = R S_0=\mathbb{R} S 0 = R , and for t ≠ 0 t\ne0 t = 0 the slice S t S_t S t is an interval containing 0 0 0 , which b ↦ τ ( t , b ) b\mapsto\tau(t,b) b ↦ τ ( t , b ) maps bijectively onto J t J_t J t . Moreover, there is a smooth function η : S → R > 0 \eta:S\to\mathbb{R}_{>0} η : S → R > 0 with η ( 0 , ⋅ ) ≡ 1 \eta(0,\cdot)\equiv1 η ( 0 , ⋅ ) ≡ 1 and
η ( t , b ) h ( t ) = h ( τ ( t , b ) ) , ( t , b ) ∈ S . (38) \eta(t,b)h(t)=h(\tau(t,b)),\qquad(t,b)\in S. \tag*{(38)} η ( t , b ) h ( t ) = h ( τ ( t , b )) , ( t , b ) ∈ S . (38)
Proof. The set S S S is open, and S 0 = R S_0=\mathbb{R} S 0 = R since τ ( 0 , b ) = 0 ∈ J \tau(0,b)=0\in J τ ( 0 , b ) = 0 ∈ J and h 1 ( 0 ) = h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 h_1(0)=h'(0)=0 h 1 ( 0 ) = h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 . For t ≠ 0 t\ne0 t = 0 , τ ( t , b ) = t ( 1 + b h 1 ( t ) ) \tau(t,b)=t(1+bh_1(t)) τ ( t , b ) = t ( 1 + b h 1 ( t )) with h 1 ( t ) ≠ 0 h_1(t)\ne0 h 1 ( t ) = 0 , so b ↦ τ ( t , b ) b\mapsto\tau(t,b) b ↦ τ ( t , b ) is an affine bijection of R \mathbb{R} R , and 1 + b h 1 ( t ) > 0 1+bh_1(t)>0 1 + b h 1 ( t ) > 0 exactly when t τ ( t , b ) > 0 t\tau(t,b)>0 t τ ( t , b ) > 0 . So it maps S t S_t S t onto the interval J t J_t J t , and S t S_t S t is an interval containing 0 0 0 since τ ( t , 0 ) = t ∈ J t \tau(t,0)=t\in J_t τ ( t , 0 ) = t ∈ J t .
To construct η \eta η , work first on the larger open set S ′ = { ( t , b ) ∈ J × R : τ ( t , b ) ∈ J } ⊃ S S'=\{(t,b)\in J\times\mathbb{R}:\tau(t,b)\in J\}\supset S S ′ = {( t , b ) ∈ J × R : τ ( t , b ) ∈ J } ⊃ S and set
η ( t , b ) = 1 + b ∫ 0 1 h ′ ( t + u b h ( t ) ) d u . \eta(t,b)=1+b\int_0^1h'(t+ubh(t))\,du. η ( t , b ) = 1 + b ∫ 0 1 h ′ ( t + u bh ( t )) d u .
This is smooth, since t + u b h ( t ) = ( 1 − u ) t + u τ ( t , b ) ∈ J t+ubh(t)=(1-u)t+u\tau(t,b)\in J t + u bh ( t ) = ( 1 − u ) t + uτ ( t , b ) ∈ J . The fundamental theorem of calculus, applied to u ↦ h ( t + u b h ( t ) ) u\mapsto h(t+ubh(t)) u ↦ h ( t + u bh ( t )) , gives (38) , and η ( 0 , ⋅ ) ≡ 1 \eta(0,\cdot)\equiv1 η ( 0 , ⋅ ) ≡ 1 since h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 h'(0)=0 h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 .
If t ≠ 0 t\ne0 t = 0 and η ( t , b ) = 0 \eta(t,b)=0 η ( t , b ) = 0 , then h ( τ ( t , b ) ) = 0 h(\tau(t,b))=0 h ( τ ( t , b )) = 0 by (38) , so τ ( t , b ) = 0 \tau(t,b)=0 τ ( t , b ) = 0 and 1 + b h 1 ( t ) = 0 1+bh_1(t)=0 1 + b h 1 ( t ) = 0 , which is excluded on S S S . So η \eta η has no zero on the interval S t S_t S t , and η > 0 \eta>0 η > 0 there since η ( t , 0 ) = 1 \eta(t,0)=1 η ( t , 0 ) = 1 .
Proposition 4.9. Let p p p , W = J × I W=J\times I W = J × I and h h h be as in Lemma 4.3, and let τ \tau τ , η \eta η and S S S be as in Lemma 4.8. Let L ^ W = { g ( t , b ) = ( η ( t , b ) , b , t , h ( t ) ) : ( t , b ) ∈ S } ⊂ G j \widehat{L}_W=\{g(t,b)=(\eta(t,b),b,t,h(t)):(t,b)\in S\}\subset G_j L W = { g ( t , b ) = ( η ( t , b ) , b , t , h ( t )) : ( t , b ) ∈ S } ⊂ G j . Then L W = q j ( L ^ W ) L_W=q_j(\widehat{L}_W) L W = q j ( L W ) is an embedded, source-connected Lagrangian subgroupoid of G Σ G_\Sigma G Σ over N c ∘ ∩ W N_c^\circ\cap W N c ∘ ∩ W integrating T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ , with isotropy R \mathbb{R} R at p p p . Moreover, the arrows of L W L_W L W with source different from p p p are
{ ( ( t ′ , h ( t ′ ) ) , ( t , h ( t ) ) ) : t ∈ J ∖ { 0 } , t ′ ∈ J t } , (39) \left\{\big((t',h(t')),(t,h(t))\big):t\in J\setminus\{0\},\ t'\in J_t\right\}, \tag*{(39)} { ( ( t ′ , h ( t ′ )) , ( t , h ( t )) ) : t ∈ J ∖ { 0 } , t ′ ∈ J t } , (39)
that is, the pairs of points of ( N c ∩ W ) ∖ { p } (N_c\cap W)\setminus\{p\} ( N c ∩ W ) ∖ { p } on the same side of p p p (Figure 4 ).
Figure 4. A tangential contact.
Proof. The set L ^ W \widehat{L}_W L W is an embedded surface in G j G_j G j , as the graph over S S S of ( t , b ) ↦ ( η ( t , b ) , h ( t ) ) (t,b)\mapsto(\eta(t,b),h(t)) ( t , b ) ↦ ( η ( t , b ) , h ( t )) . By (38) , g ( t , b ) g(t,b) g ( t , b ) is an arrow from ( t , h ( t ) ) (t,h(t)) ( t , h ( t )) to ( τ ( t , b ) , h ( τ ( t , b ) ) ) (\tau(t,b),h(\tau(t,b))) ( τ ( t , b ) , h ( τ ( t , b ))) , both in N c ∩ W N_c\cap W N c ∩ W , and g ( t , 0 ) g(t,0) g ( t , 0 ) is a unit.
As J J J has length less than ℓ j \ell_j ℓ j , composable arrows of L ^ W \widehat{L}_W L W are g ( t 1 , b 2 ) g(t_1,b_2) g ( t 1 , b 2 ) and g ( t , b 1 ) g(t,b_1) g ( t , b 1 ) with t 1 = τ ( t , b 1 ) t_1=\tau(t,b_1) t 1 = τ ( t , b 1 ) . With η 1 = η ( t , b 1 ) \eta_1=\eta(t,b_1) η 1 = η ( t , b 1 ) ,
τ ( t , b 1 + η 1 b 2 ) = t 1 + b 2 η 1 h ( t ) = t 1 + b 2 h ( t 1 ) = τ ( t 1 , b 2 ) , \tau(t,b_1+\eta_1b_2)=t_1+b_2\eta_1h(t)=t_1+b_2h(t_1)=\tau(t_1,b_2), τ ( t , b 1 + η 1 b 2 ) = t 1 + b 2 η 1 h ( t ) = t 1 + b 2 h ( t 1 ) = τ ( t 1 , b 2 ) ,
η ( t , b 1 + η 1 b 2 ) = h ( τ ( t 1 , b 2 ) ) h ( t 1 ) h ( t 1 ) h ( t ) = η ( t 1 , b 2 ) η 1 ( t ≠ 0 ) , \eta(t,b_1+\eta_1b_2)=\frac{h(\tau(t_1,b_2))}{h(t_1)}\frac{h(t_1)}{h(t)}=\eta(t_1,b_2)\eta_1\qquad(t\ne0), η ( t , b 1 + η 1 b 2 ) = h ( t 1 ) h ( τ ( t 1 , b 2 )) h ( t ) h ( t 1 ) = η ( t 1 , b 2 ) η 1 ( t = 0 ) ,
and both sides of the last identity equal 1 1 1 for t = 0 t=0 t = 0 . Moreover, ( t , b 1 + η 1 b 2 ) ∈ S (t,b_1+\eta_1b_2)\in S ( t , b 1 + η 1 b 2 ) ∈ S since τ ( t 1 , b 2 ) ∈ J t 1 = J t \tau(t_1,b_2)\in J_{t_1}=J_t τ ( t 1 , b 2 ) ∈ J t 1 = J t for t ≠ 0 t\ne0 t = 0 . Thus (29) gives
g ( t 1 , b 2 ) g ( t , b 1 ) = g ( t , b 1 + η 1 b 2 ) , g ( t , b 1 ) − 1 = g ( t 1 , − b 1 / η 1 ) . g(t_1,b_2)g(t,b_1)=g(t,b_1+\eta_1b_2),\qquad g(t,b_1)^{-1}=g(t_1,-b_1/\eta_1). g ( t 1 , b 2 ) g ( t , b 1 ) = g ( t , b 1 + η 1 b 2 ) , g ( t , b 1 ) − 1 = g ( t 1 , − b 1 / η 1 ) .
The parameter of the inverse belongs to S S S , since τ ( t 1 , − b 1 / η 1 ) = t 1 − b 1 h ( t ) = t \tau(t_1,-b_1/\eta_1)=t_1-b_1h(t)=t τ ( t 1 , − b 1 / η 1 ) = t 1 − b 1 h ( t ) = t . Hence L ^ W \widehat{L}_W L W is a Lie subgroupoid, with source fibres the intervals S t S_t S t and isotropy { ( 1 , b , 0 ) : b ∈ R } ≅ R \{(1,b,0):b\in\mathbb{R}\}\cong\mathbb{R} {( 1 , b , 0 ) : b ∈ R } ≅ R at p p p .
At x = ( t 0 , h ( t 0 ) ) x=(t_0,h(t_0)) x = ( t 0 , h ( t 0 )) , the source fibre through g ( t 0 , 0 ) g(t_0,0) g ( t 0 , 0 ) has tangent vector d d b ∣ b = 0 g ( t 0 , b ) = ∂ η ∂ b ( t 0 , 0 ) ζ 1 + ζ 2 \left.\frac{d}{db}\right|_{b=0}g(t_0,b)=\frac{\partial\eta}{\partial b}(t_0,0)\,\zeta_1+\zeta_2 d b d b = 0 g ( t 0 , b ) = ∂ b ∂ η ( t 0 , 0 ) ζ 1 + ζ 2 . Differentiating (38) in b b b and in t t t gives
∂ η ∂ b h ( t ) = h ′ ( τ ) h ( t ) , \frac{\partial\eta}{\partial b}h(t)=h'(\tau)h(t), ∂ b ∂ η h ( t ) = h ′ ( τ ) h ( t ) ,
∂ η ∂ t h + η h ′ = h ′ ( τ ) ( 1 + b h ′ ) , (40) \frac{\partial\eta}{\partial t}h+\eta h'=h'(\tau)(1+bh'), \tag*{(40)} ∂ t ∂ η h + η h ′ = h ′ ( τ ) ( 1 + b h ′ ) , (40)
where h h h and h ′ h' h ′ are evaluated at t t t . So ∂ η ∂ b = h ′ ( τ ) \frac{\partial\eta}{\partial b}=h'(\tau) ∂ b ∂ η = h ′ ( τ ) where t ≠ 0 t\ne0 t = 0 , hence everywhere by continuity, and ∂ η ∂ b ( t 0 , 0 ) = h ′ ( t 0 ) \frac{\partial\eta}{\partial b}(t_0,0)=h'(t_0) ∂ b ∂ η ( t 0 , 0 ) = h ′ ( t 0 ) . On the other hand,
T x N c ∘ = ⟨ h ′ ( t 0 ) d t − d r ⟩ , χ ( h ′ ( t 0 ) d t − d r ) = − h ′ ( t 0 ) ζ 1 − ζ 2 . T_xN_c^\circ=\langle h'(t_0)\,dt-dr\rangle,\qquad\chi(h'(t_0)\,dt-dr)=-h'(t_0)\,\zeta_1-\zeta_2. T x N c ∘ = ⟨ h ′ ( t 0 ) d t − d r ⟩ , χ ( h ′ ( t 0 ) d t − d r ) = − h ′ ( t 0 ) ζ 1 − ζ 2 .
Thus the tangent line to the source fibre is χ ( T x N c ∘ ) \chi(T_xN_c^\circ) χ ( T x N c ∘ ) , and L ^ W \widehat{L}_W L W integrates T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ over N c ∩ W N_c\cap W N c ∩ W .
Along L ^ W \widehat{L}_W L W , d r = h ′ d t dr=h'\,dt d r = h ′ d t and η d α = ∂ η ∂ t d t + ∂ η ∂ b d b \eta\,d\alpha=\frac{\partial\eta}{\partial t}dt+\frac{\partial\eta}{\partial b}db η d α = ∂ t ∂ η d t + ∂ b ∂ η d b . So, by (31) and (40) , the coefficient C C C of d t ∧ d b dt\wedge db d t ∧ d b in Ω ∣ L ^ W \Omega|_{\widehat{L}_W} Ω ∣ L W satisfies
η C = ∂ η ∂ b ( 1 + b h ′ ) − ( ∂ η ∂ t h + η h ′ ) = h ′ ( τ ) ( 1 + b h ′ ) − h ′ ( τ ) ( 1 + b h ′ ) = 0. \begin{aligned}
\eta C=\frac{\partial\eta}{\partial b}(1+bh')-\left(\frac{\partial\eta}{\partial t}h+\eta h'\right) \\
&=h'(\tau)(1+bh')-h'(\tau)(1+bh') \\
&=0.
\end{aligned} η C = ∂ b ∂ η ( 1 + b h ′ ) − ( ∂ t ∂ η h + η h ′ ) = h ′ ( τ ) ( 1 + b h ′ ) − h ′ ( τ ) ( 1 + b h ′ ) = 0.
So Ω ∣ L ^ W = 0 \left.\Omega\right|_{\widehat{L}_W}=0 Ω ∣ L W = 0 , and L ^ W \widehat{L}_W L W is Lagrangian since it has dimension 2. The surface L ^ W \widehat{L}_W L W lies in the open set G j , W l o c G_{j,W}^{\mathrm{loc}} G j , W loc of Lemma 4.4, since τ ( t , b ) ∈ J ~ \tau(t,b)\in\widetilde{J} τ ( t , b ) ∈ J and η ( t , b ) h ( t ) = h ( τ ( t , b ) ) ∈ I \eta(t,b)h(t)=h(\tau(t,b))\in I η ( t , b ) h ( t ) = h ( τ ( t , b )) ∈ I , and q j q_j q j is injective on G j , W l o c G_{j,W}^{\mathrm{loc}} G j , W loc . So (36) shows that L W L_W L W is embedded in G ‾ j ∣ U j ⊂ G Σ \overline{G}_{j|U_j}\subset G_\Sigma G j ∣ U j ⊂ G Σ , with Ω Σ ∣ L W = 0 \left.\Omega_\Sigma\right|_{L_W}=0 Ω Σ ∣ L W = 0 by (32) . For t ≠ 0 t\ne0 t = 0 , τ ( t , ⋅ ) \tau(t,\mathord\cdot) τ ( t , ⋅ ) maps S t S_t S t onto J t J_t J t by Lemma 4.8, which gives (39) by (34) . □
The Lagrangian subgroupoid of an admissible curve
We now assemble the local models of §4.2 into a subgroupoid over the whole curve. The only point requiring care is embeddedness near the isotropy groups at the contacts. Enumerate the points of C C C as p 1 , … , p n C p_1,\ldots,p_{n_C} p 1 , … , p n C . For each i i i , let D j D_j D j and N c N_c N c be the components of D D D and N N N containing p i p_i p i , and let W i W_i W i be a box around p i p_i p i as in Lemma 4.2 or Lemma 4.3. The components of N N N other than N c N_c N c are closed and miss p i p_i p i . So, shrinking I I I and J J J as in the proof of Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3, we may assume that N ∩ W i = N c ∩ W i N\cap W_i=N_c\cap W_i N ∩ W i = N c ∩ W i . Then N ∩ D ∩ W i = { p i } N\cap D\cap W_i=\{p_i\} N ∩ D ∩ W i = { p i } .
Let L W i L_{W_i} L W i be the local Lagrangian subgroupoid over N c ∩ W i N_c\cap W_i N c ∩ W i given by Proposition 4.7 at a transverse contact and by Proposition 4.9 at a tangential one. Let L p i i s o \mathcal{L}^{\mathrm{iso}}_{p_i} L p i iso be the isotropy group of L W i L_{W_i} L W i at p i p_i p i . It is the image under q j q_j q j of { ( a , ( a − 1 ) γ ′ ( 0 ) , 0 , 0 ) : a > 0 } ≅ R > 0 \{(a,(a-1)\gamma'(0),0,0):a>0\}\cong\mathbb{R}_{>0} {( a , ( a − 1 ) γ ′ ( 0 ) , 0 , 0 ) : a > 0 } ≅ R > 0 at a transverse contact, and of { ( 1 , b , 0 , 0 ) : b ∈ R } ≅ R \{(1,b,0,0):b\in\mathbb{R}\}\cong\mathbb{R} {( 1 , b , 0 , 0 ) : b ∈ R } ≅ R at a tangential one. Figure 5 shows the pieces of L \mathcal{L} L near p i p_i p i .
Figure 5. The pieces of L \mathcal{L} L near a contact point p i p_i p i .
The following lemma shows that, near each point of L p i i s o \mathcal{L}^{\mathrm{iso}}_{p_i} L p i iso , the union of these pieces agrees with the smooth local model L W i L_{W_i} L W i . The neighbourhood may depend on the isotropy arrow.
Lemma 4.10. Let K i − , K i + ∈ K K_i^-,K_i^+\in\mathcal{K} K i − , K i + ∈ K , not necessarily distinct, be the arcs containing the two components of ( N c ∩ W i ) ∖ { p i } (N_c\cap W_i)\setminus\{p_i\} ( N c ∩ W i ) ∖ { p i } , and set
A i = ( K i − × K i − ) ∪ ( K i + × K i + ) ∪ L p i i s o ⊂ G Σ . A_i=(K_i^-\times K_i^-)\cup(K_i^+\times K_i^+)\cup\mathcal{L}^{\mathrm{iso}}_{p_i}\subset G_\Sigma. A i = ( K i − × K i − ) ∪ ( K i + × K i + ) ∪ L p i iso ⊂ G Σ .
(1) If p i p_i p i is a transverse contact, or if K i − ≠ K i + K_i^- \ne K_i^+ K i − = K i + , then A i ∩ G ‾ j ∣ W i = L W i A_i \cap\overline{G}_{j|W_i} = L_{W_i} A i ∩ G j ∣ W i = L W i .
(2) In general, every g 0 ∈ L p i i s o g_0 \in L_{p_i}^{\mathrm{iso}} g 0 ∈ L p i iso has an open neighbourhood O g 0 ⊂ G ‾ j ∣ W i O_{g_0} \subset\overline{G}_{j|W_i} O g 0 ⊂ G j ∣ W i with A i ∩ O g 0 = L W i ∩ O g 0 A_i \cap O_{g_0} = L_{W_i} \cap O_{g_0} A i ∩ O g 0 = L W i ∩ O g 0 .
Proof. Let g ∈ L W i g \in L_{W_i} g ∈ L W i . Its endpoints lie in N c ∩ W i N_c \cap W_i N c ∩ W i , so g ∈ G ‾ j ∣ W i g \in\overline{G}_{j|W_i} g ∈ G j ∣ W i . Either s ( g ) = t ( g ) = p i \mathrm{s}(g) = \mathrm{t}(g) = p_i s ( g ) = t ( g ) = p i and g ∈ L p i i s o g \in L_{p_i}^{\mathrm{iso}} g ∈ L p i iso , or s ( g ) \mathrm{s}(g) s ( g ) and t ( g ) \mathrm{t}(g) t ( g ) lie on the same side of p i p_i p i by (37) and (39) , hence in the same arc K i ± K_i^\pm K i ± . So L W i ⊂ A i ∩ G ‾ j ∣ W i L_{W_i} \subset A_i \cap\overline{G}_{j|W_i} L W i ⊂ A i ∩ G j ∣ W i .
(1) Let g ∈ ( A i ∩ G ‾ j ∣ W i ) ∖ L p i i s o g \in(A_i \cap\overline{G}_{j|W_i}) \setminus L_{p_i}^{\mathrm{iso}} g ∈ ( A i ∩ G j ∣ W i ) ∖ L p i iso . Then g ∈ K i ± × K i ± g \in K_i^\pm\times K_i^\pm g ∈ K i ± × K i ± and is determined by its endpoints in ( N c ∩ W i ) ∖ { p i } (N_c \cap W_i) \setminus\{p_i\} ( N c ∩ W i ) ∖ { p i } and, by (37) and (39) , it suffices to show that they lie on the same side of p i p_i p i . At a transverse contact, a preimage ( a , b ′ , s , r ) ∈ O W i (a,b',s,r) \in O_{W_i} ( a , b ′ , s , r ) ∈ O W i of g g g , in the coordinates of Lemma 4.6, has s = 0 s=0 s = 0 since N c ∩ W i = { s = 0 } N_c \cap W_i=\{s=0\} N c ∩ W i = { s = 0 } , so s ( g ) = ( γ ( r ) , r ) \mathrm{s}(g)=(\gamma(r),r) s ( g ) = ( γ ( r ) , r ) and t ( g ) = ( γ ( a r ) , a r ) \mathrm{t}(g)=(\gamma(ar),ar) t ( g ) = ( γ ( a r ) , a r ) , with r ≠ 0 r\ne0 r = 0 and sign ( a r ) = sign ( r ) \operatorname{sign}(ar)=\operatorname{sign}(r) sign ( a r ) = sign ( r ) . At a tangential contact with K i − ≠ K i + K_i^- \ne K_i^+ K i − = K i + , the sets K i − ∩ W i K_i^- \cap W_i K i − ∩ W i are { ( t , h ( t ) ) : t < 0 } \{(t,h(t)):t<0\} {( t , h ( t )) : t < 0 } and { ( t , h ( t ) ) : t > 0 } \{(t,h(t)):t>0\} {( t , h ( t )) : t > 0 } , so s ( g ) = ( t , h ( t ) ) \mathrm{s}(g)=(t,h(t)) s ( g ) = ( t , h ( t )) and t ( g ) = ( t ′ , h ( t ′ ) ) \mathrm{t}(g)=(t',h(t')) t ( g ) = ( t ′ , h ( t ′ )) satisfy t t ′ > 0 tt'>0 t t ′ > 0 .
(2) By (1), we may assume that p i p_i p i is a tangential contact with K i − = K i + = K K_i^-=K_i^+=K K i − = K i + = K . By Lemma 4.4, q j q_j q j identifies G j , W i l o c G_{j,W_i}^{\mathrm{loc}} G j , W i loc with G ‾ j ∣ W i \overline{G}_{j|W_i} G j ∣ W i . Write g 0 = q j ( g ^ 0 ) g_0=q_j(\widehat{g}_0) g 0 = q j ( g 0 ) with g ^ 0 = ( 1 , b ‾ , 0 , 0 ) ∈ G j , W i l o c \widehat{g}_0=(1,\overline{b},0,0)\in G_{j,W_i}^{\mathrm{loc}} g 0 = ( 1 , b , 0 , 0 ) ∈ G j , W i loc . Since h ( t ) / t → h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 h(t)/t\to h'(0)=0 h ( t ) / t → h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 as t → 0 t\to0 t → 0 and h ( t ) ≠ 0 h(t)\ne0 h ( t ) = 0 for t ≠ 0 t\ne0 t = 0 , there is ε 1 > 0 \varepsilon_1>0 ε 1 > 0 with
∣ t ∣ ∣ h ( t ) ∣ > ∣ b ‾ ∣ + 1 for t ∈ J , 0 < ∣ t ∣ < ε 1 . (41) \frac{|t|}{|h(t)|}>|\overline{b}|+1\quad\text{for }t\in J,\ 0<|t|<\varepsilon_1. \tag*{(41)} ∣ h ( t ) ∣ ∣ t ∣ > ∣ b ∣ + 1 for t ∈ J , 0 < ∣ t ∣ < ε 1 . (41)
Since q j q_j q j is open, O g 0 = q j ( { ( a , b , t , r ) ∈ G j , W i l o c : ∣ t ∣ < ε 1 , ∣ b − b ‾ ∣ < 1 } ) O_{g_0}=q_j(\{(a,b,t,r)\in G_{j,W_i}^{\mathrm{loc}}:|t|<\varepsilon_1,\ |b-\overline{b}|<1\}) O g 0 = q j ({( a , b , t , r ) ∈ G j , W i loc : ∣ t ∣ < ε 1 , ∣ b − b ∣ < 1 }) is an open neighbourhood of g 0 g_0 g 0 in G ‾ j ∣ W i \overline{G}_{j|W_i} G j ∣ W i .
Let g ∈ A i ∩ O g 0 g\in A_i\cap O_{g_0} g ∈ A i ∩ O g 0 , with preimage ( a , b , t , r ) (a,b,t,r) ( a , b , t , r ) in this set. Since s ( g ) ∈ N c ∩ W i \mathrm{s}(g)\in N_c\cap W_i s ( g ) ∈ N c ∩ W i , r = h ( t ) r=h(t) r = h ( t ) . If t = 0 t=0 t = 0 , then s ( g ) = t ( g ) = p i \mathrm{s}(g)=\mathrm{t}(g)=p_i s ( g ) = t ( g ) = p i by (33) , so g ∈ L p i i s o g\in L_{p_i}^{\mathrm{iso}} g ∈ L p i iso since K K K misses D D D . If t ≠ 0 t\ne0 t = 0 , then g ∈ K × K g\in K\times K g ∈ K × K and t ( g ) = ( t ′ , h ( t ′ ) ) \mathrm{t}(g)=(t',h(t')) t ( g ) = ( t ′ , h ( t ′ )) with t ′ = t + b h ( t ) ∈ J ∖ { 0 } t'=t+bh(t)\in J\setminus\{0\} t ′ = t + bh ( t ) ∈ J ∖ { 0 } . If t t ′ < 0 tt'<0 t t ′ < 0 , then ∣ t ′ − t ∣ > ∣ t ∣ |t'-t|>|t| ∣ t ′ − t ∣ > ∣ t ∣ , so (41) gives ∣ b ∣ = ∣ t ′ − t ∣ / ∣ h ( t ) ∣ > ∣ t ∣ / ∣ h ( t ) ∣ > ∣ b ‾ ∣ + 1 |b|=|t'-t|/|h(t)|>|t|/|h(t)|>|\overline{b}|+1 ∣ b ∣ = ∣ t ′ − t ∣/∣ h ( t ) ∣ > ∣ t ∣/∣ h ( t ) ∣ > ∣ b ∣ + 1 , hence ∣ b − b ‾ ∣ > 1 |b-\overline{b}|>1 ∣ b − b ∣ > 1 , a contradiction. Thus t ′ ∈ J t t'\in J_t t ′ ∈ J t , and g ∈ L W i g\in L_{W_i} g ∈ L W i by (39) . □ \square □
Remark 4.11. If C c = { p i } C_c=\{p_i\} C c = { p i } , then the arc K = N c ∖ { p i } K=N_c\setminus\{p_i\} K = N c ∖ { p i } lies in one component of Σ ∖ D \Sigma\setminus D Σ ∖ D , so K ∩ W i K\cap W_i K ∩ W i lies on one side of D j D_j D j by (28) . Hence the contact at p i p_i p i is tangential, since N c ∩ W i N_c\cap W_i N c ∩ W i meets both sides at a transverse contact, and h ( t ) h ( t ′ ) > 0 h(t)h(t')>0 h ( t ) h ( t ′ ) > 0 for t , t ′ ∈ J ∖ { 0 } t,t'\in J\setminus\{0\} t , t ′ ∈ J ∖ { 0 } . For t t ′ < 0 tt'<0 t t ′ < 0 , the image of
( h ( t ′ ) h ( t ) , t ′ − t h ( t ) , t , h ( t ) ) ∈ G ‾ j ∣ W i \left(\frac{h(t')}{h(t)},\frac{t'-t}{h(t)},t,h(t)\right)\in\overline{G}_{j|W_i} ( h ( t ) h ( t ′ ) , h ( t ) t ′ − t , t , h ( t ) ) ∈ G j ∣ W i
an arrow from ( t , h ( t ) ) (t,h(t)) ( t , h ( t )) to ( t ′ , h ( t ′ ) ) (t',h(t')) ( t ′ , h ( t ′ )) , lies in ( K × K ) ∩ G ‾ j ∣ W i (K\times K)\cap\overline{G}_{j|W_i} ( K × K ) ∩ G j ∣ W i but not in L W i L_{W_i} L W i by (39) , so the equality of Lemma 4.10(1) fails. For h ( t ) = t 2 h(t)=t^2 h ( t ) = t 2 and t ′ = − t t'=-t t ′ = − t , its preimages ( 1 , − 2 / t + k ℓ j / t 2 , t , t 2 ) (1,-2/t+k\ell_j/t^2,t,t^2) ( 1 , − 2/ t + k ℓ j / t 2 , t , t 2 ) , k ∈ Z k\in\mathbb{Z} k ∈ Z , satisfy ∣ b ∣ ≥ 2 / ∣ t ∣ |b|\ge2/|t| ∣ b ∣ ≥ 2/∣ t ∣ for 0 < ∣ t ∣ ≤ ℓ j / 4 0<|t|\le\ell_j/4 0 < ∣ t ∣ ≤ ℓ j /4 , so these arrows have no accumulation point in G Σ G_\Sigma G Σ as t → 0 t\to0 t → 0 : a local inverse of q j q_j q j near such a point would give a convergent choice of preimages, contradicting the displayed bound. Thus, in general, the comparison in Lemma 4.10(2) must be made near the isotropy arrows rather than on the whole restriction to W i W_i W i .
Proposition 4.12. The subset of G Σ G_\Sigma G Σ
L = ( ∐ N c ⊂ Σ ∖ D N c × N c ) ∪ ( ∐ N c ⊂ D L c ) ∪ ( ∐ K ∈ K K × K ) ∪ ( ∐ i = 1 n c L p i i s o ) \mathcal{L}=\left(\coprod_{N_c\subset\Sigma\setminus D}N_c\times N_c\right)\cup\left(\coprod_{N_c\subset D}\mathcal{L}_c\right)\cup\left(\coprod_{K\in\mathcal{K}}K\times K\right)\cup\left(\coprod_{i=1}^{n_c}L_{p_i}^{\mathrm{iso}}\right) L = N c ⊂ Σ ∖ D ∐ N c × N c ∪ ( N c ⊂ D ∐ L c ) ∪ ( K ∈ K ∐ K × K ) ∪ ( i = 1 ∐ n c L p i iso ) is an embedded, source-connected Lagrangian subgroupoid of G Σ G_\Sigma G Σ over N N N integrating T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ .
Proof. Each piece of L \mathcal{L} L consists of arrows with both endpoints in one component of N 0 N_0 N 0 or N D N_D N D , in one arc K ∈ K K\in\mathcal{K} K ∈ K , or at one point of C C C , and distinct pieces correspond to distinct such subsets of (35) . So two composable arrows of L \mathcal{L} L lie in the same piece, and L \mathcal{L} L is a subgroupoid over N N N since each piece is one (Proposition 4.5 for L c \mathcal{L}_c L c ).
Let g 0 ∈ L g_0\in\mathcal{L} g 0 ∈ L . If an endpoint of g 0 g_0 g 0 is some p i ∈ C p_i\in C p i ∈ C , then g 0 ∈ L p i i s o g_0\in L_{p_i}^{\mathrm{iso}} g 0 ∈ L p i iso by (33) , applied to g 0 g_0 g 0 or g 0 − 1 g_0^{-1} g 0 − 1 . Otherwise, since D D D is closed and C C C is finite, each endpoint x x x has a neighbourhood U x U_x U x in Σ \Sigma Σ with U x ∩ N U_x\cap N U x ∩ N contained in a single component of N 0 N_0 N 0 or N D N_D N D , or in a single arc of K \mathcal{K} K . On ( s , t ) − 1 ( U s ( g 0 ) × U t ( g 0 ) ) (s,t)^{-1}(U_{s(g_0)}\times U_{t(g_0)}) ( s , t ) − 1 ( U s ( g 0 ) × U t ( g 0 ) ) , the subgroupoid L \mathcal{L} L therefore agrees with the union of N c × N c N_c\times N_c N c × N c , L c \mathcal{L}_c L c or K × K K\times K K × K .
If g 0 ∈ L p i i s o g_0\in L_{p_i}^{\mathrm{iso}} g 0 ∈ L p i iso , then L ∩ G ‾ j ∣ W i = A i ∩ G ‾ j ∣ W i \mathcal{L}\cap\overline{G}_{j|W_i}=A_i\cap\overline{G}_{j|W_i} L ∩ G j ∣ W i = A i ∩ G j ∣ W i since N c ∩ W i ⊂ K i − ∪ K i + ∪ { p i } N_c\cap W_i\subset K_i^-\cup K_i^+\cup\{p_i\} N c ∩ W i ⊂ K i − ∪ K i + ∪ { p i } , so L ∩ O g 0 = L W i ∩ O g 0 \mathcal{L}\cap O_{g_0}=L_{W_i}\cap O_{g_0} L ∩ O g 0 = L W i ∩ O g 0 by Lemma 4.10(2).
So L \mathcal{L} L coincides near each of its points with one of N c × N c N_c\times N_c N c × N c , L c \mathcal{L}_c L c , K × K K\times K K × K or L W i L_{W_i} L W i , which are embedded Lagrangian Lie subgroupoids integrating T N ∘ TN^\circ T N ∘ over open subsets of N N N (§ 4.2 and Propositions 4.5, 4.7 and 4.9). Hence L \mathcal{L} L is embedded, s ∣ L s|_{\mathcal{L}} s ∣ L is a submersion, and the source fibres N c N_c N c , R \mathbb{R} R , K K K and L p i i s o L_{p_i}^{\mathrm{iso}} L p i iso are connected. □ \square □
It remains to identify the isotropy groups at x ∈ N ∩ D x\in N\cap D x ∈ N ∩ D inside G Σ , x ≅ Aff + ( R ) G_\Sigma,x\cong\operatorname{Aff}^+(\mathbb{R}) G Σ , x ≅ Aff + ( R ) . By (29) , a dilation subgroup has the form
{ ( a , ( a − 1 ) b 0 ) : a > 0 } = ( 1 , b 0 ) { ( a , 0 ) : a > 0 } ( 1 , b 0 ) − 1 . (42) \{(a,(a-1)b_0):a>0\}=(1,b_0)\{(a,0):a>0\}(1,b_0)^{-1}. \tag*{(42)} {( a , ( a − 1 ) b 0 ) : a > 0 } = ( 1 , b 0 ) {( a , 0 ) : a > 0 } ( 1 , b 0 ) − 1 . (42)
and its Lie algebra is ⟨ ζ 1 + b 0 ζ 2 ⟩ \langle\zeta_1+b_0\zeta_2\rangle ⟨ ζ 1 + b 0 ζ 2 ⟩ . As b 0 b_0 b 0 varies, these are all lines of aff ( R ) \operatorname{aff}(\mathbb{R}) aff ( R ) other than ⟨ ζ 2 ⟩ \langle\zeta_2\rangle ⟨ ζ 2 ⟩ , the Lie algebra of the translation subgroup. Thus every connected one-dimensional Lie subgroup of Aff + ( R ) \operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) Aff + ( R ) is a translation or dilation subgroup. Automorphisms of Aff + ( R ) \operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) Aff + ( R ) preserve these two types, since its translation subgroup is its commutator subgroup.
Proof of Theorem B. The subgroupoid L \mathcal{L} L of Proposition 4.12 is a 1-shifted Lagrangian by the argument of [21 Example 3.8] , since Ω Σ ∣ L = 0 \Omega_\Sigma|_{\mathcal{L}}=0 Ω Σ ∣ L = 0 and Lie ( L ) = T N ∘ \operatorname{Lie}(\mathcal{L})=T N^\circ Lie ( L ) = T N ∘ .
The arrows of L \mathcal{L} L between points of N ∖ D N\setminus D N ∖ D are those of the pair groupoids of the components of N ∖ D N\setminus D N ∖ D , namely the N c ⊂ N 0 N_c\subset N_0 N c ⊂ N 0 and the K ∈ K K\in\mathcal{K} K ∈ K . Arrows with source in N ∩ D N\cap D N ∩ D are loops by (33) .
Let x ∈ N ∩ D j x\in N\cap D_j x ∈ N ∩ D j . If D j ⊂ N D_j\subset N D j ⊂ N or x = p i x=p_i x = p i is a tangential contact, then T x N = T x D T_xN=T_xD T x N = T x D and L x \mathcal{L}_x L x is the translation subgroup, as the image of { ( 1 , b , t , 0 ) : b ∈ R } \{(1,b,t,0):b\in\mathbb{R}\} {( 1 , b , t , 0 ) : b ∈ R } by Proposition 4.5, respectively of { ( 1 , b , 0 , 0 ) : b ∈ R } \{(1,b,0,0):b\in\mathbb{R}\} {( 1 , b , 0 , 0 ) : b ∈ R } . At a transverse contact x = p i x=p_i x = p i , T x N ≠ T x D T_xN\ne T_xD T x N = T x D and L x \mathcal{L}_x L x is the image of { ( a , ( a − 1 ) γ ′ ( 0 ) , 0 , 0 ) : a > 0 } \{(a,(a-1)\gamma'(0),0,0):a>0\} {( a , ( a − 1 ) γ ′ ( 0 ) , 0 , 0 ) : a > 0 } , a dilation subgroup by (4.8) with b 0 = γ ′ ( 0 ) b_0=\gamma'(0) b 0 = γ ′ ( 0 ) . □
Homotopy fibre products of Lagrangian subgroupoids
In this section, we study the shifted intersections of two admissible curves. Let N 1 , N 2 N_1,N_2 N 1 , N 2 be admissible curves, with the embedded Lagrangian subgroupoids L 1 ⇒ N 1 \mathcal{L}_1\Rightarrow N_1 L 1 ⇒ N 1 and L 2 ⇒ N 2 \mathcal{L}_2\Rightarrow N_2 L 2 ⇒ N 2 constructed in Proposition 4.12. We determine when their homotopy fibre product is clean, proving Theorem C, and describe its induced 0-shifted Poisson structure up to Morita equivalence. The cleanness criterion depends only on the contacts of the two curves with D D D . When both curves contain a component of D D D , the resulting shifted intersection also recovers its modular period.
Cleanness
We first describe the homotopy fibre product and the tangent-space condition defining cleanness. Let H = L 1 × G Σ h L 2 \mathcal{H}=\mathcal{L}_1\times^h_{\mathcal{G}_\Sigma}\mathcal{L}_2 H = L 1 × G Σ h L 2 be the homotopy fibre product of L 1 \mathcal{L}_1 L 1 and L 2 \mathcal{L}_2 L 2 [21 §4.2] . It is a groupoid whose space of objects is
H 0 = { ( x 1 , g , x 2 ) ∈ N 1 × G Σ × N 2 : s ( g ) = x 1 , t ( g ) = x 2 } . \mathcal{H}^0=\{(x_1,g,x_2)\in N_1\times\mathcal{G}_\Sigma\times N_2:s(g)=x_1,\ t(g)=x_2\}. H 0 = {( x 1 , g , x 2 ) ∈ N 1 × G Σ × N 2 : s ( g ) = x 1 , t ( g ) = x 2 } .
An arrow with source ( x 1 , g , x 2 ) (x_1,g,x_2) ( x 1 , g , x 2 ) is a pair ( l , l ~ ) ∈ L 1 × L 2 (l,\widetilde{l})\in\mathcal{L}_1\times\mathcal{L}_2 ( l , l ) ∈ L 1 × L 2 satisfying s ( l ) = x 1 s(l)=x_1 s ( l ) = x 1 and s ( l ~ ) = x 2 s(\widetilde{l})=x_2 s ( l ) = x 2 , and its target is ( t ( l ) , l ~ g l − 1 , t ( l ~ ) ) (t(l),\widetilde{l}gl^{-1},t(\widetilde{l})) ( t ( l ) , l g l − 1 , t ( l )) .
We write pr 1 \operatorname{pr}_1 pr 1 , pr 0 \operatorname{pr}_0 pr 0 and pr 2 \operatorname{pr}_2 pr 2 for the projections of H 0 \mathcal{H}^0 H 0 onto N 1 N_1 N 1 , G Σ \mathcal{G}_\Sigma G Σ and N 2 N_2 N 2 . The expected tangent space at ( x 1 , g , x 2 ) (x_1,g,x_2) ( x 1 , g , x 2 ) is
T ( x 1 , g , x 2 ) e x p = { ( u , w , v ) ∈ T x 1 N 1 × T g G Σ × T x 2 N 2 : d s g ( w ) = u , d t g ( w ) = v } . T^{\mathrm{exp}}_{(x_1,g,x_2)}=\{(u,w,v)\in T_{x_1}N_1\times T_g\mathcal{G}_\Sigma\times T_{x_2}N_2:d s_g(w)=u,\ d t_g(w)=v\}. T ( x 1 , g , x 2 ) exp = {( u , w , v ) ∈ T x 1 N 1 × T g G Σ × T x 2 N 2 : d s g ( w ) = u , d t g ( w ) = v } .
The homotopy fibre product H \mathcal{H} H is clean if H 0 \mathcal{H}^0 H 0 is an embedded submanifold of N 1 × G Σ × N 2 N_1\times\mathcal{G}_\Sigma\times N_2 N 1 × G Σ × N 2 and its tangent space at every object equals the expected tangent space [21 §§2.3 and 4.2] . When the object is fixed, we abbreviate this space to T e x p T^{\mathrm{exp}} T exp .
The map g ↦ ( s ( g ) , g , t ( g ) ) g\mapsto(s(g),g,t(g)) g ↦ ( s ( g ) , g , t ( g )) embeds G Σ \mathcal{G}_\Sigma G Σ onto a closed submanifold of Σ × G Σ × Σ \Sigma\times\mathcal{G}_\Sigma\times\Sigma Σ × G Σ × Σ and carries ( s , t ) − 1 ( N 1 × N 2 ) (s,t)^{-1}(N_1\times N_2) ( s , t ) − 1 ( N 1 × N 2 ) onto H 0 \mathcal{H}^0 H 0 . We therefore identify H 0 \mathcal{H}^0 H 0 with ( s , t ) − 1 ( N 1 × N 2 ) ⊂ G Σ (s,t)^{-1}(N_1\times N_2)\subset\mathcal{G}_\Sigma ( s , t ) − 1 ( N 1 × N 2 ) ⊂ G Σ . Under this identification,
T e x p = { w ∈ T g G Σ : d s g ( w ) ∈ T x 1 N 1 , d t g ( w ) ∈ T x 2 N 2 } . T^{\mathrm{exp}}=\{w\in T_g\mathcal{G}_\Sigma:d s_g(w)\in T_{x_1}N_1,\ d t_g(w)\in T_{x_2}N_2\}. T exp = { w ∈ T g G Σ : d s g ( w ) ∈ T x 1 N 1 , d t g ( w ) ∈ T x 2 N 2 } .
For a 2-form ω \omega ω , let Γ ω \Gamma_\omega Γ ω be its graph, as in §3.1. The 1-shifted Lagrangians L 1 \mathcal{L}_1 L 1 and L 2 \mathcal{L}_2 L 2 have vanishing 2-forms, and their 1-shifted coisotropic structures are L N 1 = Γ 0 = T N 1 \mathbb{L}_{N_1}=\Gamma_0=T N_1 L N 1 = Γ 0 = T N 1 and L N 2 = Γ 0 = T N 2 \mathbb{L}_{N_2}=\Gamma_0=T N_2 L N 2 = Γ 0 = T N 2 [21 §3.2, Example 3.8 and Remark 4.9] . For graphs, the pullback and sum of Dirac structures satisfy
f ∗ Γ ω = Γ f ∗ ω , Γ ω + Γ η = Γ ω + η . f^*\Gamma_\omega=\Gamma_{f^*\omega},\qquad\Gamma_\omega+\Gamma_\eta=\Gamma_{\omega+\eta}. f ∗ Γ ω = Γ f ∗ ω , Γ ω + Γ η = Γ ω + η .
If H \mathcal{H} H is clean, the Dirac structure defining the induced shifted intersection is
L = pr 1 ∗ L N 1 + pr 2 ∗ L N 2 − pr 0 ∗ Ω Σ = Γ − pr 0 ∗ Ω Σ . \begin{aligned}
\mathbb{L}=\operatorname{pr}_1^*\mathbb{L}_{N_1}+\operatorname{pr}_2^*\mathbb{L}_{N_2}-\operatorname{pr}_0^*\Omega_\Sigma\\
&=\Gamma_{-\operatorname{pr}_0^*\Omega_\Sigma}.
\end{aligned} L = pr 1 ∗ L N 1 + pr 2 ∗ L N 2 − pr 0 ∗ Ω Σ = Γ − pr 0 ∗ Ω Σ .
It is smooth because it is the graph of a smooth 2-form. Thus it defines a 0-shifted Poisson structure on H \mathcal{H} H by [21 Corollary 4.12] .
We separate the objects lying over the symplectic locus from those lying over D D D :
H g e n 0 = { ( x 1 , g , x 2 ) ∈ H 0 : x 1 ∉ D } , \mathcal{H}^0_{\mathrm{gen}}=\{(x_1,g,x_2)\in\mathcal{H}^0:x_1\notin D\}, H gen 0 = {( x 1 , g , x 2 ) ∈ H 0 : x 1 ∈ / D } ,
H i s o 0 = { ( x , g , x ) ∈ H 0 : x ∈ D ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 } . \mathcal{H}^0_{\mathrm{iso}}=\{(x,g,x)\in\mathcal{H}^0:x\in D\cap N_1\cap N_2\}. H iso 0 = {( x , g , x ) ∈ H 0 : x ∈ D ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 } .
By (33) , applied to g g g and to g − 1 g^{-1} g − 1 , we have x 1 ∈ D x_1 \in D x 1 ∈ D if and only if x 2 ∈ D x_2 \in D x 2 ∈ D , and then x 2 = x 1 x_2=x_1 x 2 = x 1 . Hence H 0 = H g e n 0 ⊔ H i s o 0 \mathcal{H}^0=\mathcal{H}^0_{\mathrm{gen}}\sqcup\mathcal{H}^0_{\mathrm{iso}} H 0 = H gen 0 ⊔ H iso 0 . By (34) , if x 1 ∈ V i x_1\in V_i x 1 ∈ V i , then x 2 ∈ V i x_2\in V_i x 2 ∈ V i . So H g e n 0 \mathcal{H}^0_{\mathrm{gen}} H gen 0 is the disjoint union of the open subsets H i 0 = H g e n 0 ∩ ( V i × G Σ × V i ) \mathcal{H}^0_i=\mathcal{H}^0_{\mathrm{gen}}\cap(V_i\times\mathcal{G}_\Sigma\times V_i) H i 0 = H gen 0 ∩ ( V i × G Σ × V i ) .
Since ( s , t ) (s,t) ( s , t ) is a diffeomorphism from G Σ ∣ V i = V i × V i \mathcal{G}_\Sigma|_{V_i}=V_i\times V_i G Σ ∣ V i = V i × V i onto V i × V i V_i\times V_i V i × V i , H i 0 = ( s , t ) − 1 ( ( N 1 ∩ V i ) × ( N 2 ∩ V i ) ) \mathcal{H}^0_i=(s,t)^{-1}((N_1\cap V_i)\times(N_2\cap V_i)) H i 0 = ( s , t ) − 1 (( N 1 ∩ V i ) × ( N 2 ∩ V i )) is embedded, with the expected tangent space d ( s , t ) − 1 ( T x 1 N 1 × T x 2 N 2 ) d(s,t)^{-1}(T_{x_1}N_1\times T_{x_2}N_2) d ( s , t ) − 1 ( T x 1 N 1 × T x 2 N 2 ) , and
( N 1 ∩ V i ) × ( N 2 ∩ V i ) ⟶ H i 0 , ( x 1 , x 2 ) ⟼ ( x 1 , ( x 2 , x 1 ) , x 2 ) , (43) (N_1\cap V_i)\times(N_2\cap V_i)\longrightarrow\mathcal{H}^0_i,\qquad(x_1,x_2)\longmapsto(x_1,(x_2,x_1),x_2), \tag*{(43)} ( N 1 ∩ V i ) × ( N 2 ∩ V i ) ⟶ H i 0 , ( x 1 , x 2 ) ⟼ ( x 1 , ( x 2 , x 1 ) , x 2 ) , (43)
is a diffeomorphism. Therefore H \mathcal{H} H is clean on H g e n 0 \mathcal{H}^0_{\mathrm{gen}} H gen 0 . Moreover, Proposition 3.6 gives Ω Σ = t ∗ ω i − s ∗ ω i \Omega_\Sigma=t^*\omega_i-s^*\omega_i Ω Σ = t ∗ ω i − s ∗ ω i on V i × V i V_i\times V_i V i × V i . Since s ∘ pr 0 = pr 1 s\circ\operatorname{pr}_0=\operatorname{pr}_1 s ∘ pr 0 = pr 1 and t ∘ pr 0 = pr 2 t\circ\operatorname{pr}_0=\operatorname{pr}_2 t ∘ pr 0 = pr 2 , we obtain
pr 0 ∗ Ω Σ = pr 2 ∗ ( ω i ∣ N 2 ∩ V i ) − pr 1 ∗ ( ω i ∣ N 1 ∩ V i ) = 0 \operatorname{pr}_0^*\Omega_\Sigma=\operatorname{pr}_2^*(\omega_i|_{N_2\cap V_i})-\operatorname{pr}_1^*(\omega_i|_{N_1\cap V_i})=0 pr 0 ∗ Ω Σ = pr 2 ∗ ( ω i ∣ N 2 ∩ V i ) − pr 1 ∗ ( ω i ∣ N 1 ∩ V i ) = 0
on H i 0 \mathcal{H}^0_i H i 0 : both restrictions are 2-forms on curves.
The six local configurations
It remains to study H \mathcal{H} H near H i s o 0 \mathcal{H}^0_{\mathrm{iso}} H iso 0 . Fix x ∈ D j ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 x\in D_j\cap N_1\cap N_2 x ∈ D j ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 . After translating the coordinate t t t in (26) , we take x = ( 0 , 0 ) x=(0,0) x = ( 0 , 0 ) and write an element of G Σ , x ≅ Aff + ( R ) \mathcal{G}_{\Sigma,x}\cong\operatorname{Aff}^+(\mathbb{R}) G Σ , x ≅ Aff + ( R ) as g = ( a , b , 0 , 0 ) g=(a,b,0,0) g = ( a , b , 0 , 0 ) . We retain the coordinate α = log a \alpha=\log a α = log a introduced in § 3.3 . We first compute the expected tangent space, before comparing it with the local equations of H 0 \mathcal{H}^0 H 0 .
Lemma 5.1. For g = ( a , b , 0 , 0 ) ∈ G Σ , x g=(a,b,0,0)\in\mathcal{G}_{\Sigma,x} g = ( a , b , 0 , 0 ) ∈ G Σ , x , let M g = ( 1 b 0 a ) M_g=\begin{pmatrix}1&b\\0&a\end{pmatrix} M g = ( 1 0 b a ) in the frame ( ∂ ∂ t , ∂ ∂ r ) \left(\frac{\partial}{\partial t},\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\right) ( ∂ t ∂ , ∂ r ∂ ) of T x Σ T_x\Sigma T x Σ . Then d t g = M g ∘ d s g dt_g=M_g\circ ds_g d t g = M g ∘ d s g , the kernels ker d s g = ker d t g \ker ds_g=\ker dt_g ker d s g = ker d t g have dimension 2 2 2 , and the expected tangent space at ( x , g , x ) (x,g,x) ( x , g , x ) satisfies
dim T e x p = 2 + dim ( T x N 1 ∩ M g − 1 T x N 2 ) . (44) \dim T^{\mathrm{exp}}=2+\dim\left(T_xN_1\cap M_g^{-1}T_xN_2\right). \tag*{(44)} dim T exp = 2 + dim ( T x N 1 ∩ M g − 1 T x N 2 ) . (44) (1) If T x N 1 = T x N 2 = T x D j T_xN_1=T_xN_2=T_xD_j T x N 1 = T x N 2 = T x D j , then dim T e x p = 3 \dim T^{\mathrm{exp}}=3 dim T exp = 3 for every g g g .
(2) If exactly one of T x N 1 T_xN_1 T x N 1 and T x N 2 T_xN_2 T x N 2 equals T x D j T_xD_j T x D j , then dim T e x p = 2 \dim T^{\mathrm{exp}}=2 dim T exp = 2 for every g g g .
(3) If both N 1 N_1 N 1 and N 2 N_2 N 2 are transverse to D D D at x x x , with the functions γ \gamma γ and γ ~ \widetilde{\gamma} γ of Lemma 4.2 , then dim T e x p = 2 \dim T^{\mathrm{exp}}=2 dim T exp = 2 , except on the curve { b = a γ ~ ′ ( 0 ) − γ ′ ( 0 ) } \{b=a\widetilde{\gamma}'(0)-\gamma'(0)\} { b = a γ ′ ( 0 ) − γ ′ ( 0 )} of G Σ , x \mathcal{G}_{\Sigma,x} G Σ , x , where it equals 3 3 3 .
Proof. Since t ( a , b , t , r ) = ( t + b r , a r ) t(a,b,t,r)=(t+br,ar) t ( a , b , t , r ) = ( t + b r , a r ) and r = 0 r=0 r = 0 at g g g , a tangent vector w = ( a ˙ , b ˙ , t ˙ , r ˙ ) w=(\dot a,\dot b,\dot t,\dot r) w = ( a ˙ , b ˙ , t ˙ , r ˙ ) satisfies
d s g ( w ) = ( t ˙ , r ˙ ) , d t g ( w ) = ( t ˙ + b r ˙ , a r ˙ ) = M g ( t ˙ , r ˙ ) . ds_g(w)=(\dot t,\dot r),\qquad dt_g(w)=(\dot t+b\dot r,a\dot r)=M_g(\dot t,\dot r). d s g ( w ) = ( t ˙ , r ˙ ) , d t g ( w ) = ( t ˙ + b r ˙ , a r ˙ ) = M g ( t ˙ , r ˙ ) .
Consequently,
ker d s g = ker d t g = ⟨ ∂ ∂ a , ∂ ∂ b ⟩ . \ker ds_g=\ker dt_g=\left\langle\frac{\partial}{\partial a},\frac{\partial}{\partial b}\right\rangle. ker d s g = ker d t g = ⟨ ∂ a ∂ , ∂ b ∂ ⟩ .
The surjection d s g ds_g d s g maps T e x p T^{\mathrm{exp}} T exp onto { u ∈ T x N 1 : M g u ∈ T x N 2 } \{u\in T_xN_1:M_gu\in T_xN_2\} { u ∈ T x N 1 : M g u ∈ T x N 2 } , with kernel ker d s g \ker ds_g ker d s g . This proves (44) .
Since M g ∂ ∂ t = ∂ ∂ t M_g\frac{\partial}{\partial t}=\frac{\partial}{\partial t} M g ∂ t ∂ = ∂ t ∂ , the map M g M_g M g preserves T x D j = ⟨ ∂ ∂ t ⟩ T_xD_j=\left\langle\frac{\partial}{\partial t}\right\rangle T x D j = ⟨ ∂ t ∂ ⟩ , proving (1). In case (2), suppose first that T x N 1 = T x D j ≠ T x N 2 T_xN_1=T_xD_j\ne T_xN_2 T x N 1 = T x D j = T x N 2 . Then M g − 1 T x N 2 ≠ T x D j M_g^{-1}T_xN_2\ne T_xD_j M g − 1 T x N 2 = T x D j , so the intersection in (44) is zero. The other order is treated in the same way. In case (3), the tangent lines are
T x N 1 = ⟨ γ ′ ( 0 ) ∂ ∂ t + ∂ ∂ r ⟩ , T_xN_1=\left\langle\gamma'(0)\frac{\partial}{\partial t}+\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\right\rangle, T x N 1 = ⟨ γ ′ ( 0 ) ∂ t ∂ + ∂ r ∂ ⟩ ,
T x N 2 = ⟨ γ ~ ′ ( 0 ) ∂ ∂ t + ∂ ∂ r ⟩ . T_xN_2=\left\langle\widetilde{\gamma}'(0)\frac{\partial}{\partial t}+\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\right\rangle. T x N 2 = ⟨ γ ′ ( 0 ) ∂ t ∂ + ∂ r ∂ ⟩ .
The vector
M g ( γ ′ ( 0 ) ∂ ∂ t + ∂ ∂ r ) = ( γ ′ ( 0 ) + b ) ∂ ∂ t + a ∂ ∂ r M_g\left(\gamma'(0)\frac{\partial}{\partial t}+\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\right)=(\gamma'(0)+b)\frac{\partial}{\partial t}+a\frac{\partial}{\partial r} M g ( γ ′ ( 0 ) ∂ t ∂ + ∂ r ∂ ) = ( γ ′ ( 0 ) + b ) ∂ t ∂ + a ∂ r ∂
lies in T x N 2 T_xN_2 T x N 2 exactly when γ ′ ( 0 ) + b = a γ ~ ′ ( 0 ) \gamma'(0)+b=a\widetilde{\gamma}'(0) γ ′ ( 0 ) + b = a γ ′ ( 0 ) .
We now compare these expected tangent spaces with the local equations of H 0 \mathcal{H}^0 H 0 . By Lemmas 4.2 and 4.3 , there are three possibilities for each curve near x x x : it contains D j D_j D j , it is transverse to D D D and is given by t = γ ( r ) t=\gamma(r) t = γ ( r ) , or it has a tangential contact with D D D and is given by r = h ( t ) r=h(t) r = h ( t ) . For N 2 N_2 N 2 , we use the functions γ ~ \widetilde{\gamma} γ and h ~ \widetilde{h} h . Up to interchanging the curves, this gives the six configurations of Figure 6 .
Figure 6. The six configurations of two curves at a common point of D D D .
We fix one box W = J × I W=J\times I W = J × I around x x x which only meets the components of N 1 N_1 N 1 and N 2 N_2 N 2 through x x x , and in which both descriptions hold. For two transverse curves we shrink I I I , and for two tangential curves we shrink J J J . If one curve contains D j D_j D j , we shrink I I I if the other is transverse and J J J if it is tangential. For a transverse curve and a tangential one, we take I = ( − ϵ , ϵ ) I=(-\epsilon,\epsilon) I = ( − ϵ , ϵ ) and J = ( − C ϵ , C ϵ ) J=(-C\epsilon,C\epsilon) J = ( − C ϵ , C ϵ ) , with C > sup ∣ γ ′ ∣ C>\sup|\gamma'| C > sup ∣ γ ′ ∣ fixed and ϵ \epsilon ϵ small. This is possible since ∣ γ ( r ) ∣ ≤ sup ∣ γ ′ ∣ ∣ r ∣ |\gamma(r)|\leq\sup|\gamma'|\,|r| ∣ γ ( r ) ∣ ≤ sup ∣ γ ′ ∣ ∣ r ∣ and h ( t ) = O ( t 2 ) h(t)=O(t^2) h ( t ) = O ( t 2 ) .
We use the open set G j , W l o c \mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{loc}}_{j,W} G j , W loc of Lemma 4.4 . It contains the isotropy group G j , x \mathcal{G}_{j,x} G j , x , and q j q_j q j identifies it with G ‾ j ∣ W \overline{\mathcal{G}}_j|_W G j ∣ W , an open subset of G Σ \mathcal{G}_{\Sigma} G Σ . Under this identification,
H 0 ∩ G j , W l o c = { ( a , b , t , r ) ∈ G j , W l o c : ( t , r ) ∈ N 1 , ( t + b r , a r ) ∈ N 2 } . \mathcal{H}^{0} \cap\mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{loc}}_{j,W} = \{(a,b,t,r) \in\mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{loc}}_{j,W} : (t,r) \in N_1,\ (t+br,ar) \in N_2\}. H 0 ∩ G j , W loc = {( a , b , t , r ) ∈ G j , W loc : ( t , r ) ∈ N 1 , ( t + b r , a r ) ∈ N 2 } .
Proposition 5.2. Let x ∈ D j ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 x \in D_j \cap N_1 \cap N_2 x ∈ D j ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 , g 0 ∈ G Σ , x g_0 \in\mathcal{G}_{\Sigma,x} g 0 ∈ G Σ , x , and let g ^ 0 ∈ G j , W l o c \widehat{g}_0 \in\mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{loc}}_{j,W} g 0 ∈ G j , W loc be its preimage. There is an open neighbourhood O ⊂ G j , W l o c O \subset\mathcal{G}^{\mathrm{loc}}_{j,W} O ⊂ G j , W loc of g ^ 0 \widehat{g}_0 g 0 on which H 0 \mathcal{H}^{0} H 0 is described as follows, in the six configurations of Figure 6 .
(1) If D j ⊂ N 1 D_j \subset N_1 D j ⊂ N 1 and D j ⊂ N 2 D_j \subset N_2 D j ⊂ N 2 , then H 0 ∩ O = O ∩ { r = 0 } \mathcal{H}^{0} \cap O = O \cap\{r=0\} H 0 ∩ O = O ∩ { r = 0 } , an open subset of the embedded 3 3 3 -manifold D j × Aff + ( R ) D_j \times\operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) D j × Aff + ( R ) , and H \mathcal{H} H is clean there.
(2) If one of N 1 , N 2 N_1,N_2 N 1 , N 2 contains D j D_j D j and the other is transverse, then H 0 ∩ O = O ∩ { t = r = 0 } \mathcal{H}^{0} \cap O = O \cap\{t=r=0\} H 0 ∩ O = O ∩ { t = r = 0 } , and H \mathcal{H} H is clean there.
(3) If one of N 1 , N 2 N_1,N_2 N 1 , N 2 is tangential and the other is transverse, then H 0 ∩ O = O ∩ { t = r = 0 } \mathcal{H}^{0} \cap O = O \cap\{t=r=0\} H 0 ∩ O = O ∩ { t = r = 0 } , and H \mathcal{H} H is clean there.
(4) If both N 1 N_1 N 1 and N 2 N_2 N 2 are transverse, write γ ( r ) = r γ 1 ( r ) \gamma(r)=r\gamma_1(r) γ ( r ) = r γ 1 ( r ) and γ ~ ( r ) = r γ ~ 1 ( r ) \widetilde{\gamma}(r)=r\widetilde{\gamma}_1(r) γ ( r ) = r γ 1 ( r ) . Then
H 0 ∩ O = O ∩ ( { t = r = 0 } ∪ { t = γ ( r ) , b = a γ ~ 1 ( a r ) − γ 1 ( r ) } ) . \mathcal{H}^{0} \cap O = O \cap\left(\{t=r=0\} \cup\{t=\gamma(r),\ b=a\widetilde{\gamma}_1(ar)-\gamma_1(r)\}\right). H 0 ∩ O = O ∩ ( { t = r = 0 } ∪ { t = γ ( r ) , b = a γ 1 ( a r ) − γ 1 ( r )} ) . These two embedded surfaces meet along the curve { t = r = 0 , b = a γ ~ ′ ( 0 ) − γ ′ ( 0 ) } \{t=r=0,\ b=a\widetilde{\gamma}'(0)-\gamma'(0)\} { t = r = 0 , b = a γ ′ ( 0 ) − γ ′ ( 0 )} , with distinct tangent planes, and H 0 \mathcal{H}^{0} H 0 is not a manifold at the points of this curve.
(5) If one of N 1 , N 2 N_1,N_2 N 1 , N 2 contains D j D_j D j and the other is tangential, then H 0 ∩ O = O ∩ { t = r = 0 } \mathcal{H}^{0} \cap O = O \cap\{t=r=0\} H 0 ∩ O = O ∩ { t = r = 0 } is a surface, but dim T exp = 3 \dim T^{\exp}=3 dim T e x p = 3 . So H \mathcal{H} H is not clean there.
(6) If both N 1 N_1 N 1 and N 2 N_2 N 2 are tangential, then H 0 ∩ O \mathcal{H}^{0} \cap O H 0 ∩ O contains O ∩ { t = r = 0 } O \cap\{t=r=0\} O ∩ { t = r = 0 } , and the expected tangent space has dimension 3 3 3 at every point of this isotropy surface. However, H 0 ∩ O \mathcal{H}^{0} \cap O H 0 ∩ O has empty interior in the 3 3 3 -manifold { r = h ( t ) } \{r=h(t)\} { r = h ( t )} . Thus H \mathcal{H} H is not clean at these isotropy objects. For instance, if h ( t ) = h ~ ( t ) = t 2 h(t)=\widetilde{h}(t)=t^2 h ( t ) = h ( t ) = t 2 , then H 0 ∩ O \mathcal{H}^{0} \cap O H 0 ∩ O is the union of the sheets { t = 0 } \{t=0\} { t = 0 } and { a = ( 1 + b t ) 2 } \{a=(1+bt)^2\} { a = ( 1 + b t ) 2 } of { r = t 2 } \{r=t^2\} { r = t 2 } , which meet along { t = 0 , a = 1 } \{t=0,\ a=1\} { t = 0 , a = 1 } .
Proof. The inversion ( x 1 , g , x 2 ) ↦ ( x 2 , g − 1 , x 1 ) (x_1,g,x_2) \mapsto(x_2,g^{-1},x_1) ( x 1 , g , x 2 ) ↦ ( x 2 , g − 1 , x 1 ) identifies L 1 × Σ Z h L 2 \mathcal{L}_1 \mathbin{\times^h_{\Sigma_Z}} \mathcal{L}_2 L 1 × Σ Z h L 2 with L 2 × Σ Z h L 1 \mathcal{L}_2 \mathbin{\times^h_{\Sigma_Z}} \mathcal{L}_1 L 2 × Σ Z h L 1 and preserves cleanness and { t = r = 0 } \{t=r=0\} { t = r = 0 } , so we may fix the order of the curves in cases (2), (3) and (5). Let O = G j , W loc O=G^{{\operatorname{loc}}}_{j,W} O = G j , W loc , except in case (3).
In case (1), ( t , r ) ∈ N 1 (t,r)\in N_1 ( t , r ) ∈ N 1 gives r = 0 r=0 r = 0 , and then ( t + b r , a r ) = ( t , 0 ) ∈ N 2 (t+br,ar)=(t,0)\in N_2 ( t + b r , a r ) = ( t , 0 ) ∈ N 2 . Then T { r = 0 } ⊂ T exp T\{r=0\}\subset T^{\exp} T { r = 0 } ⊂ T e x p , with equality since dim T exp = 3 \dim T^{\exp}=3 dim T e x p = 3 by Lemma 5.1 (1).
In case (2), say N 1 ⊃ D j N_1\supset D_j N 1 ⊃ D j and N 2 N_2 N 2 is transverse. Then r = 0 r=0 r = 0 , and ( t , 0 ) ∈ N 2 (t,0)\in N_2 ( t , 0 ) ∈ N 2 exactly when t = γ ~ ( 0 ) = 0 t=\widetilde{\gamma}(0)=0 t = γ ( 0 ) = 0 . So T { t = r = 0 } = T exp T\{t=r=0\}=T^{\exp} T { t = r = 0 } = T e x p by Lemma 5.1 (2).
In case (3), suppose that N 1 N_1 N 1 is tangential and N 2 N_2 N 2 is transverse. The defining equations are r = h ( t ) r=h(t) r = h ( t ) , 0 = t + b h ( t ) − γ ~ ( a h ( t ) ) 0=t+bh(t)-\widetilde{\gamma}(ah(t)) 0 = t + bh ( t ) − γ ( ah ( t )) . The second right-hand side vanishes identically at t = 0 t=0 t = 0 and has derivative 1 1 1 with respect to t t t there, since h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 h'(0)=0 h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 . The implicit function theorem therefore gives a neighbourhood O O O of g ^ 0 \widehat{g}_0 g 0 on which its only zeros have t = 0 t=0 t = 0 . Then r = 0 r=0 r = 0 , and the tangent-space comparison is the same as in case (2).
In case (4), the source condition is t = γ ( r ) t=\gamma(r) t = γ ( r ) , and the target condition factors as
0 = γ ~ ( a r ) − γ ( r ) − b r = r ( a γ ~ 1 ( a r ) − γ 1 ( r ) − b ) . 0=\widetilde{\gamma}(ar)-\gamma(r)-br=r\left(a\widetilde{\gamma}_1(ar)-\gamma_1(r)-b\right). 0 = γ ( a r ) − γ ( r ) − b r = r ( a γ 1 ( a r ) − γ 1 ( r ) − b ) .
The factor r r r gives the surface { t = r = 0 } \{t=r=0\} { t = r = 0 } , parametrized by ( a , b ) (a,b) ( a , b ) , with tangent plane ⟨ ∂ ∂ a , ∂ ∂ b ⟩ \left\langle\frac{\partial}{\partial a},\frac{\partial}{\partial b}\right\rangle ⟨ ∂ a ∂ , ∂ b ∂ ⟩ . The other factor gives the graph
{ t = γ ( r ) , b = a γ ~ 1 ( a r ) − γ 1 ( r ) } , \{t=\gamma(r),\ b=a\widetilde{\gamma}_1(ar)-\gamma_1(r)\}, { t = γ ( r ) , b = a γ 1 ( a r ) − γ 1 ( r )} ,
parametrized by ( a , r ) (a,r) ( a , r ) , whose tangent plane contains a vector with ∂ ∂ r \frac{\partial}{\partial r} ∂ r ∂ -component 1 1 1 . Their intersection is the curve { t = r = 0 , b = a γ ~ ′ ( 0 ) − γ ′ ( 0 ) } \{t=r=0,\ b=a\widetilde{\gamma}'(0)-\gamma'(0)\} { t = r = 0 , b = a γ ′ ( 0 ) − γ ′ ( 0 )} , since γ 1 ( 0 ) = γ ′ ( 0 ) \gamma_1(0)=\gamma'(0) γ 1 ( 0 ) = γ ′ ( 0 ) and γ ~ 1 ( 0 ) = γ ~ ′ ( 0 ) \widetilde{\gamma}_1(0)=\widetilde{\gamma}'(0) γ 1 ( 0 ) = γ ′ ( 0 ) . If H 0 \mathcal{H}^0 H 0 were a submanifold near a point of this curve, its tangent space would contain both tangent planes and have dimension at least 3. This is impossible for a union of two surfaces.
In case (5), say N 1 ⊃ D j N_1\supset D_j N 1 ⊃ D j and N 2 N_2 N 2 is tangential. Then r = 0 r=0 r = 0 and h ~ ( t ) = 0 \widetilde{h}(t)=0 h ( t ) = 0 , that is, t = 0 t=0 t = 0 , while dim T exp = 3 \dim T^{\exp}=3 dim T e x p = 3 by Lemma 5.1 (1).
In case (6), the equations are r = h ( t ) r=h(t) r = h ( t ) , a h ( t ) = h ~ ( t + b h ( t ) ) ah(t)=\widetilde{h}(t+bh(t)) ah ( t ) = h ( t + bh ( t )) . They hold on { t = r = 0 } \{t=r=0\} { t = r = 0 } , where dim T exp = 3 \dim T^{\exp}=3 dim T e x p = 3 by Lemma 5.1 (1). On the 3-manifold { r = h ( t ) } \{r=h(t)\} { r = h ( t )} , parametrized by ( a , b , t ) (a,b,t) ( a , b , t ) , set F ( a , b , t ) = a h ( t ) − h ~ ( t + b h ( t ) ) F(a,b,t)=ah(t)-\widetilde{h}(t+bh(t)) F ( a , b , t ) = ah ( t ) − h ( t + bh ( t )) . Then ∂ F / ∂ a = h ( t ) ≠ 0 \partial F/\partial a=h(t)\ne0 ∂ F / ∂ a = h ( t ) = 0 for t ≠ 0 t\ne0 t = 0 , because the contact is isolated. Thus the zero set has empty interior away from t = 0 t=0 t = 0 , and it cannot contain an open subset supported on { t = 0 } \{t=0\} { t = 0 } either. Hence H 0 ∩ O \mathcal{H}^0\cap O H 0 ∩ O has empty interior in { r = h ( t ) } \{r=h(t)\} { r = h ( t )} . If H \mathcal{H} H were clean at ( x , g 0 , x ) (x,g_0,x) ( x , g 0 , x ) , then H 0 \mathcal{H}^0 H 0 would be a 3-dimensional embedded submanifold of this 3-manifold near g ^ 0 \widehat{g}_0 g 0 , and would therefore contain a neighbourhood of g ^ 0 \widehat{g}_0 g 0 , a contradiction. For h = h ~ = t 2 h=\widetilde{h}=t^2 h = h = t 2 , the factorization is a t 2 − ( t + b t 2 ) 2 = t 2 ( a − ( 1 + b t ) 2 ) at^2-(t+bt^2)^2=t^2\left(a-(1+bt)^2\right) a t 2 − ( t + b t 2 ) 2 = t 2 ( a − ( 1 + b t ) 2 ) .
We can now decide when H \mathcal{H} H is clean.
Proposition 5.3. The homotopy fibre product H = L 1 × Σ Z h L 2 \mathcal{H}=\mathcal{L}_1\mathbin{\times^h_{\Sigma_Z}}\mathcal{L}_2 H = L 1 × Σ Z h L 2 is clean if and only if, for every x ∈ D ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 x\in D\cap N_1\cap N_2 x ∈ D ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 , with D j D_j D j the component of D D D containing x x x ,
either D j ⊂ N 1 D_j\subset N_1 D j ⊂ N 1 and D j ⊂ N 2 D_j\subset N_2 D j ⊂ N 2 ,
or exactly one of the lines T x N 1 T_xN_1 T x N 1 and T x N 2 T_xN_2 T x N 2 equals T x D j T_xD_j T x D j .
In that case, Γ pr 0 ∗ Ω Z \Gamma_{\operatorname{pr}_0^*\Omega_Z} Γ pr 0 ∗ Ω Z is a 0-shifted Poisson structure on H \mathcal{H} H , with
pr 0 ∗ Ω Z = { 0 on H g e n 0 and at the points where (2) holds , d t ∧ d α on the components D j × Aff + ( R ) where (1) holds . \operatorname{pr}_0^*\Omega_Z=
\begin{cases}
0 & \text{on }\mathcal{H}^0_{\mathrm{gen}}\text{ and at the points where (2) holds},\\
\mathrm{d}t\wedge\mathrm{d}\alpha& \text{on the components }D_j\times\operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R})\text{ where (1) holds}.
\end{cases} pr 0 ∗ Ω Z = { 0 d t ∧ d α on H gen 0 and at the points where (2) holds , on the components D j × Aff + ( R ) where (1) holds .
Proof. Cleanness is local, and H \mathcal{H} H is clean on the open set H g e n 0 \mathcal{H}^0_{\mathrm{gen}} H gen 0 by § 5.1 . At x ∈ D ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 x\in D\cap N_1\cap N_2 x ∈ D ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 , one of the six cases of Proposition 5.2 occurs. In cases (1)–(3), H \mathcal{H} H is clean near { x } × Σ Z × { x } \{x\}\times\Sigma_Z\times\{x\} { x } × Σ Z × { x } , in cases (5) and (6) at no point of this set, and in case (4) not on the nonempty curve { b = a γ ~ ′ ( 0 ) − γ ′ ( 0 ) } \{b=a\widetilde{\gamma}'(0)-\gamma'(0)\} { b = a γ ′ ( 0 ) − γ ′ ( 0 )} . Since T x N 1 = T x D j T_xN_1=T_xD_j T x N 1 = T x D j exactly when N 1 N_1 N 1 contains D j D_j D j or has a tangential contact with D D D at x x x , and similarly for N 2 N_2 N 2 , cases (1)–(3) of Proposition 5.2 are those allowed by conditions (1) and (2).
The form pr 0 ∗ Ω Z \operatorname{pr}_0^*\Omega_Z pr 0 ∗ Ω Z vanishes on H g e n 0 \mathcal{H}^0_{\mathrm{gen}} H gen 0 by § 5.1 . In cases (1)–(3) of Proposition 5.2, H 0 \mathcal{H}^0 H 0 lies in { r = 0 } \{r=0\} { r = 0 } near { x } × Σ Z × { x } \{x\}\times\Sigma_Z\times\{x\} { x } × Σ Z × { x } , and in { t = r = 0 } \{t=r=0\} { t = r = 0 } in cases (2) and (3). By (31) , Ω ∣ { r = 0 } = d t ∧ d α \left.\Omega\right|_{\{r=0\}}=\mathrm{d}t\wedge\mathrm{d}\alpha Ω ∣ { r = 0 } = d t ∧ d α and Ω ∣ { t = r = 0 } = 0 \left.\Omega\right|_{\{t=r=0\}}=0 Ω ∣ { t = r = 0 } = 0 .
If H \mathcal{H} H is clean, then Γ pr 0 ∗ Ω Z \Gamma_{\operatorname{pr}_0^*\Omega_Z} Γ pr 0 ∗ Ω Z is the graph of a smooth 2-form, hence a 0-shifted Poisson structure by [21 Corollary 4.12(1)] .
:::
For the shifted self-intersection of a single curve, the criterion takes a simple form.
Corollary 5.4. Let N N N be an admissible curve with Lagrangian subgroupoid L \mathcal{L} L . Then L × Σ Z h L \mathcal{L}\mathbin{\times^h_{\Sigma_Z}}\mathcal{L} L × Σ Z h L is clean if and only if every component of N N N which meets D D D is a component of D D D .
Proof. At x ∈ D ∩ N x \in D \cap N x ∈ D ∩ N , condition (2) of Proposition 5.3 fails since the two lines coincide. So L × G h L L \times_{\mathcal{G}}^{h} L L × G h L is clean if and only if D j ⊂ N D_j \subset N D j ⊂ N for the component D j D_j D j of D D D through every x ∈ D ∩ N x \in D \cap N x ∈ D ∩ N . Since D j D_j D j and the components of N N N are circles, D j ⊂ N D_j \subset N D j ⊂ N means that D j D_j D j is the component of N N N through x x x . □
Morita equivalence and modular periods
We now describe the clean homotopy fibre products up to Morita equivalence and identify the function that recovers the modular period. On a component D j × Aff + ( R ) D_j \times\operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) D j × Aff + ( R ) of H 0 \mathcal{H}^{0} H 0 , we use the coordinates ( t , a , b ) (t,a,b) ( t , a , b ) of the arrow ( a , b , t , 0 ) (a,b,t,0) ( a , b , t , 0 ) and write α = log a \alpha=\log a α = log a . The function a a a is intrinsic: the map M g M_g M g of Lemma 5.1 , characterized by d t g = M g ∘ d s g dt_g=M_g\circ ds_g d t g = M g ∘ d s g , induces multiplication by a a a on the normal line T x Σ / T x D j T_x\Sigma/T_xD_j T x Σ/ T x D j .
Proposition 5.5. Suppose that H \mathcal{H} H is clean. Then H \mathcal{H} H is Morita equivalent to the disjoint union of finitely many points and, for each component D j D_j D j of D D D contained in N 1 ∩ N 2 N_1 \cap N_2 N 1 ∩ N 2 , of the trivial bundle of groups ( S ℓ j × R ) × R (S^{\ell_j} \times\mathbb{R}) \times\mathbb{R} ( S ℓ j × R ) × R over the cylinder S ℓ j × R S^{\ell_j} \times\mathbb{R} S ℓ j × R . Under this Morita equivalence, the 0-shifted Poisson structure of Proposition 5.3 restricts to the graph of the zero form on the points and of the symplectic form d α ∧ d t d\alpha\wedge dt d α ∧ d t on each cylinder. Here the last factor R \mathbb{R} R is the additive isotropy group: the source and target maps are both the projection onto the cylinder.
Proof. We decompose H 0 \mathcal{H}^{0} H 0 into subsets of three types:
the sets
H K 1 , K 2 0 = ( s , t ) − 1 ( K 1 × K 2 ) ≅ K 1 × K 2 , \mathcal{H}^{0}_{K_1,K_2}=(s,t)^{-1}(K_1\times K_2)\cong K_1\times K_2, H K 1 , K 2 0 = ( s , t ) − 1 ( K 1 × K 2 ) ≅ K 1 × K 2 ,
where K 1 K_1 K 1 and K 2 K_2 K 2 are components of N 1 ∖ D N_1\setminus D N 1 ∖ D and N 2 ∖ D N_2\setminus D N 2 ∖ D lying in the same component of Σ ∖ D \Sigma\setminus D Σ ∖ D ;
the sets { x } × G Σ , x × { x } ≅ Aff + ( R ) \{x\}\times G_{\Sigma,x}\times\{x\}\cong\operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) { x } × G Σ , x × { x } ≅ Aff + ( R ) , where x x x is an isolated point of D ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 D\cap N_1\cap N_2 D ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 ;
the sets D j × Aff + ( R ) D_j\times\operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) D j × Aff + ( R ) , where D j ⊂ N 1 ∩ N 2 D_j\subset N_1\cap N_2 D j ⊂ N 1 ∩ N 2 is a component of D D D .
An arrow ( l , l ~ ) (l,\widetilde l) ( l , l ) of H \mathcal{H} H moves x 1 x_1 x 1 to t ( l ) t(l) t ( l ) and x 2 x_2 x 2 to t ( l ~ ) t(\widetilde l) t ( l ) , so, by Proposition 4.12 and (33) , it preserves the component of N 1 ∖ D N_1\setminus D N 1 ∖ D or the point of N 1 ∩ D N_1\cap D N 1 ∩ D containing x 1 x_1 x 1 , and similarly for x 2 x_2 x 2 . If x 1 ∈ D x_1\in D x 1 ∈ D , then x 1 = x 2 x_1=x_2 x 1 = x 2 by (33) , and condition (1) or (2) of Proposition 5.3 holds at x 1 x_1 x 1 . Under (2), one curve is transverse to D D D at x 1 x_1 x 1 , so x 1 x_1 x 1 is isolated in D ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 D\cap N_1\cap N_2 D ∩ N 1 ∩ N 2 . So the sets of types (1)–(3) are finitely many, invariant, and partition H 0 \mathcal{H}^{0} H 0 . Those of type (1) or (3) are open as preimages under ( pr 1 , pr 2 ) (\operatorname{pr}_1,\operatorname{pr}_2) ( pr 1 , pr 2 ) of open subsets of $N_1\times N_2, and those of type (2) by cases (2) and (3) of Proposition 5.2, the only ones allowed at an isolated point by Proposition 5.3 .
On a set of type (1), L 1 \mathcal{L}_1 L 1 and L 2 \mathcal{L}_2 L 2 restrict to the pair groupoids of K 1 K_1 K 1 and K 2 K_2 K 2 (Proposition 4.12 ), so, by (43) , H \mathcal{H} H restricts to the pair groupoid of K 1 × K 2 K_1\times K_2 K 1 × K 2 , Morita equivalent to a point, and the form vanishes by Proposition 5.3 .
On a set of type (2), H \mathcal{H} H restricts to the action groupoid of L 1 , x × L 2 , x \mathcal{L}_{1,x}\times\mathcal{L}_{2,x} L 1 , x × L 2 , x on Aff + ( R ) \operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) Aff + ( R ) , with action ( l , l ~ ) ⋅ g = l ~ g l − 1 (l,\widetilde l)\cdot g=\widetilde l g l^{-1} ( l , l ) ⋅ g = l g l − 1 . By Theorem 8, one isotropy subgroup is the translation subgroup, the kernel of ( a , b ) ↦ a (a,b)\mapsto a ( a , b ) ↦ a , and the other is a dilation subgroup, which this map identifies with R > 0 \mathbb{R}_{>0} R > 0 . The translation subgroup is normal, and every conjugate of a dilation subgroup is a dilation subgroup. Consequently,
L 1 , x ∩ g − 1 L 2 , x g = { 1 } , L 2 , x ( g L 1 , x g − 1 ) = Aff + ( R ) . \mathcal{L}_{1,x}\cap g^{-1}\mathcal{L}_{2,x}g=\{1\},\qquad\mathcal{L}_{2,x}(g\mathcal{L}_{1,x}g^{-1})=\operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}). L 1 , x ∩ g − 1 L 2 , x g = { 1 } , L 2 , x ( g L 1 , x g − 1 ) = Aff + ( R ) .
The first identity says that the stabilizer of g g g is trivial, while the second gives
L 2 , x g L 1 , x = L 2 , x ( g L 1 , x g − 1 ) g = Aff + ( R ) . \mathcal{L}_{2,x}g\mathcal{L}_{1,x}=\mathcal{L}_{2,x}(g\mathcal{L}_{1,x}g^{-1})g=\operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}). L 2 , x g L 1 , x = L 2 , x ( g L 1 , x g − 1 ) g = Aff + ( R ) .
The action is therefore free and transitive, so its action groupoid is Morita equivalent to a point. The form vanishes by Proposition 5.3 .
On a set of type (3), L 1 \mathcal{L}_1 L 1 and L 2 \mathcal{L}_2 L 2 restrict to the bundle of translation groups over D j D_j D j (Proposition 4.5). For l = ( 1 , u , t , 0 ) l=(1,u,t,0) l = ( 1 , u , t , 0 ) and l ~ = ( 1 , u ~ , t , 0 ) \widetilde l=(1,\widetilde u,t,0) l = ( 1 , u , t , 0 ) , (29) gives
( 1 , u ~ ) ( a , b ) ( 1 , u ) − 1 = ( a , b − u + a u ~ ) . (1,\widetilde u)(a,b)(1,u)^{-1}=(a,b-u+a\widetilde u). ( 1 , u ) ( a , b ) ( 1 , u ) − 1 = ( a , b − u + a u ) .
The orbits are the lines { ( t , a ) } × R \{(t,a)\}\times\mathbb{R} {( t , a )} × R , the stabilizers are { u = a u ~ } ≅ R \{u=a\widetilde u\}\cong\mathbb{R} { u = a u } ≅ R , and the slice { b = 0 } \{b=0\} { b = 0 } meets every orbit once. The restriction to this slice is the trivial bundle of additive groups R \mathbb{R} R over the cylinder S ℓ j × R S^{\ell_j}\times\mathbb{R} S ℓ j × R , with coordinates ( t , α ) (t,\alpha) ( t , α ) . Its inclusion is a Morita equivalence: the target map on arrows with source in the slice is ( t , a , u ~ , u ) ⟼ ( t , a , a u ~ − u ) (t,a,\widetilde u,u)\longmapsto(t,a,a\widetilde u-u) ( t , a , u , u ) ⟼ ( t , a , a u − u ) , a surjective submersion onto D j × Aff + ( R ) D_j\times\operatorname{Aff}^{+}(\mathbb{R}) D j × Aff + ( R ) . By Proposition 5.3 , − pr 0 ∗ Ω = − d t ∧ d α = d α ∧ d t -\operatorname{pr}_0^{*}\Omega=-dt\wedge d\alpha=d\alpha\wedge dt − pr 0 ∗ Ω = − d t ∧ d α = d α ∧ d t . This form does not involve b b b , and its restriction to the slice is the symplectic form d α ∧ d t d\alpha\wedge dt d α ∧ d t . Finally, H 0 \mathcal{H}^{0} H 0 is the disjoint union of the finitely many open invariant sets of types (1)–(3), so H \mathcal{H} H is the disjoint union of the corresponding restrictions. This proves the claimed Morita equivalence and the description of the induced structures. □
The canonical function α \alpha α recovers the modular period. With the Hamiltonian convention of §3.1,
ι − ∂ ∂ t ( d α ∧ d t ) = d α , X α = − ∂ ∂ t . \iota_{-\frac{\partial}{\partial t}}(d\alpha\wedge dt)=d\alpha,\qquad X_\alpha=-\frac{\partial}{\partial t}. ι − ∂ t ∂ ( d α ∧ d t ) = d α , X α = − ∂ t ∂ .
By (27) , X α X_\alpha X α projects to the modular vector field along D j D_j D j . Its flow rotates S ℓ j 1 S^1_{\ell_j} S ℓ j 1 at unit speed and has period ℓ j \ell_j ℓ j . The symplectic cylinder alone does not determine this period: for every ℓ > 0 \ell>0 ℓ > 0 , the map
( t , α ) ⟼ ( ℓ ℓ j t , ℓ j ℓ α ) (t,\alpha)\longmapsto\left(\frac{\ell}{\ell_j}t,\frac{\ell_j}{\ell}\alpha\right) ( t , α ) ⟼ ( ℓ j ℓ t , ℓ ℓ j α )
is a symplectomorphism onto S ℓ 1 × R S^1_\ell\times\mathbb{R} S ℓ 1 × R . The period is therefore recovered from the symplectic cylinder together with the canonical function α \alpha α .
For a clean self-intersection L × Σ h L L\times^h_{\Sigma}L L × Σ h L as in Corollary 5.4, D ∩ N D\cap N D ∩ N has no isolated points, the points of Proposition 5.5 correspond to the ordered pairs of components of N ∖ D N\setminus D N ∖ D in the same component of Σ ∖ D \Sigma\setminus D Σ ∖ D , and there is one cylinder for each component of D D D contained in N N N .
Example 5.6. Let S 2 ⊂ R 3 S^2\subset\mathbb{R}^3 S 2 ⊂ R 3 be the unit sphere, with cylindrical coordinates ( θ , z ) (\theta,z) ( θ , z ) , θ ∈ R / 2 π Z \theta\in\mathbb{R}/2\pi\mathbb{Z} θ ∈ R /2 π Z . Its area form is d θ ∧ d z d\theta\wedge dz d θ ∧ d z , so ∂ ∂ θ ∧ ∂ ∂ z \frac{\partial}{\partial\theta}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial z} ∂ θ ∂ ∧ ∂ z ∂ extends to a smooth bivector on S 2 S^2 S 2 , and σ = z ∂ ∂ z ∧ ∂ ∂ θ \sigma=z\frac{\partial}{\partial z}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial\theta} σ = z ∂ z ∂ ∧ ∂ θ ∂ is a Radko structure, with D D D the equator and ( t , r ) = ( θ , z ) (t,r)=(\theta,z) ( t , r ) = ( θ , z ) as in (26) . So the modular period of D D D is ℓ 1 = 2 π \ell_1=2\pi ℓ 1 = 2 π . The meridian N 1 N_1 N 1 , the great circle consisting of the poles and the points with θ ∈ { θ 0 , θ 0 + π } \theta\in\{\theta_0,\theta_0+\pi\} θ ∈ { θ 0 , θ 0 + π } , meets D D D transversely at two points p 1 , p 2 p_1,p_2 p 1 , p 2 . If N 2 ≠ D N_2\ne D N 2 = D is a great circle through p 1 p_1 p 1 and p 2 p_2 p 2 , for instance N 2 = N 1 N_2=N_1 N 2 = N 1 , then we are in case (4) of Proposition 5.2 at p 1 p_1 p 1 , so L 1 × Σ h L 2 L_1\times^h_{\Sigma}L_2 L 1 × Σ h L 2 is not clean, although N 1 N_1 N 1 and N 2 N_2 N 2 meet transversely when N 2 ≠ N 1 N_2\ne N_1 N 2 = N 1 . The Lagrangian subgroupoid of D D D , in contrast, has a clean shifted self-intersection. By Proposition 5.5, this homotopy fibre product is Morita equivalent to ( S 2 π 1 × R ) × R (S^1_{2\pi}\times\mathbb{R})\times\mathbb{R} ( S 2 π 1 × R ) × R , with the symplectic form d α ∧ d θ d\alpha\wedge d\theta d α ∧ d θ on the cylinder, and the Hamiltonian flow of α \alpha α has period 2 π 2\pi 2 π . The subgroupoids of the meridian N 1 N_1 N 1 and D D D also have a clean homotopy fibre product, by case (2) of Proposition 5.2, and it is Morita equivalent to two points.
Proof of Theorem C. This is Proposition 5.3. □
The homotopy Poisson algebra of a curve
In this section, we study the homotopy Poisson algebras of curves. Let N N N be an admissible curve in a Radko surface ( Σ , σ ) (\Sigma,\sigma) ( Σ , σ ) , with degeneracy locus D D D , and let ψ \psi ψ be a tubular neighbourhood of N N N . We compute the homotopy Poisson algebra ( a , λ ψ ) (\mathfrak a,\lambda^\psi) ( a , λ ψ ) of §2.2 and determine how its brackets depend on the contacts of N N N with D D D . The main distinction is between linearization by an arbitrary L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism and linearization by a change of tubular neighbourhood. We first compute the brackets and their cohomology, then construct a formal normal form and identify the obstruction at tangential contacts. Finally, we classify the underlying L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -algebras and apply Theorem A to prove Theorem D.
The brackets in adapted coordinates
We first reduce to a single component of N N N and compute the brackets in coordinates adapted to it.
The normal bundle of N N N has rank one, so ∧ k ν N = 0 \wedge^k\nu_N=0 ∧ k ν N = 0 for k ≥ 2 k\ge2 k ≥ 2 . Thus a \mathfrak a a is concentrated in degrees 0 0 0 and 1 1 1 . Since N N N is compact, it has finitely many components N c N_c N c , each open and closed in N N N , and a = ⨁ c a c \mathfrak a=\bigoplus_c\mathfrak a_c a = ⨁ c a c , a c = C ∞ ( ∧ ∙ ν N c ) = a c 0 ⊕ a c 1 \mathfrak a_c=C^\infty(\wedge^\bullet\nu_{N_c})=\mathfrak a_c^0\oplus\mathfrak a_c^1 a c = C ∞ ( ∧ ∙ ν N c ) = a c 0 ⊕ a c 1 . Here C ∞ ( ν N c ) C^\infty(\nu_{N_c}) C ∞ ( ν N c ) denotes the smooth sections of the normal bundle, as in §2. A tubular neighbourhood of N N N restricts to one of each N c N_c N c . Conversely, tubular neighbourhoods of the components assemble to one of N N N after their domains are shrunk so that their images are disjoint. The Taylor coefficients of Q ψ Q_\psi Q ψ are multidifferential, so they are local in each argument and vanish on tuples meeting two different summands a c \mathfrak a_c a c . Hence ( a , λ ψ ) (\mathfrak a,\lambda^\psi) ( a , λ ψ ) is the direct sum of the ( a c , λ ψ ) (\mathfrak a_c,\lambda^\psi) ( a c , λ ψ ) . We fix a component N c N_c N c and write λ n = λ n ψ \lambda_n=\lambda_n^\psi λ n = λ n ψ for the brackets (21) on a c \mathfrak a_c a c .
Each N c N_c N c is an embedded circle in an oriented surface, so its normal bundle ν N c \nu_{N_c} ν N c is trivial. An adapted chart near a point of N c N_c N c is a chart ( x , y ) (x,y) ( x , y ) of Σ \Sigma Σ , with domain U U U , such that N c ∩ U = { y = 0 } N_c\cap U=\{y=0\} N c ∩ U = { y = 0 } . It defines a local tubular neighbourhood ( x , y e ( x ) ) ↦ ( x , y ) (x,ye(x))\mapsto(x,y) ( x , y e ( x )) ↦ ( x , y ) , where e e e is the local frame of ν N c \nu_{N_c} ν N c given by the class of ∂ ∂ y \frac{\partial}{\partial y} ∂ y ∂ . Conversely, a tubular neighbourhood ψ \psi ψ , a coordinate x x x on an open subset of N c N_c N c and a frame e e e give an adapted chart, with y y y the fibre coordinate dual to e e e . The constructions of §2.2 are local over N N N , and they apply verbatim to local tubular neighbourhoods.
In the adapted chart determined by ψ \psi ψ , the formal expansion of the Poisson bivector is
σ ψ = v ( x , y ) ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y , v ( x , y ) = ∑ k ≥ 0 v k ( x ) y k , v k ( x ) = 1 k ! ∂ k v ∂ y k ( x , 0 ) . \sigma_{\psi}=v(x,y)\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y},\qquad v(x,y)=\sum_{k\geq0}v_k(x)y^k,
\qquad
v_k(x)=\frac{1}{k!}\frac{\partial^k v}{\partial y^k}(x,0). σ ψ = v ( x , y ) ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ , v ( x , y ) = k ≥ 0 ∑ v k ( x ) y k , v k ( x ) = k ! 1 ∂ y k ∂ k v ( x , 0 ) .
The term v k y k ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y v_k y^k\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y} v k y k ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ is the component of weight k − 1 k-1 k − 1 of σ ψ \sigma_{\psi} σ ψ (Definition 2.2 ). We identify functions on N c N_c N c with their pullbacks to ν N c \nu N_c ν N c , which do not depend on y y y , and a section g e ge g e of ν N c \nu N_c ν N c with the vertical vector field g ( x ) ∂ ∂ y g(x)\frac{\partial}{\partial y} g ( x ) ∂ y ∂ .
Proposition 6.1. Up to graded antisymmetry, the only possibly nonzero brackets of ( a c , λ ψ ) (\mathfrak a_c,\lambda^\psi) ( a c , λ ψ ) are those with exactly one argument in a c 0 \mathfrak a_c^0 a c 0 . For n ≥ 1 n\geq1 n ≥ 1 and f , g 1 , … , g n − 1 ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) f,g_1,\ldots,g_{n-1}\in C^\infty(N_c) f , g 1 , … , g n − 1 ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) , they are given by
λ n ( f , g 1 e , … , g n − 1 e ) = ( n − 1 ) ! v n − 1 ∂ f ∂ x g 1 ⋯ g n − 1 e . (45) \lambda_n(f,g_1e,\ldots,g_{n-1}e)=(n-1)!\,v_{n-1}\frac{\partial f}{\partial x}g_1\cdots g_{n-1}e. \tag*{(45)} λ n ( f , g 1 e , … , g n − 1 e ) = ( n − 1 )! v n − 1 ∂ x ∂ f g 1 ⋯ g n − 1 e . (45)
Proof. We use (22) in an adapted chart. A bracket λ n \lambda_n λ n with j j j arguments in a c 0 \mathfrak a_c^0 a c 0 and n − j n-j n − j in a c 1 \mathfrak a_c^1 a c 1 has degree ( n − j ) + ( 2 − n ) = 2 − j (n-j)+(2-n)=2-j ( n − j ) + ( 2 − n ) = 2 − j , so it vanishes for j = 0 j=0 j = 0 and for j ≥ 3 j\geq3 j ≥ 3 . In particular, λ 0 ∈ a c 2 = 0 \lambda_0\in\mathfrak a_c^2=0 λ 0 ∈ a c 2 = 0 .
Let j ∈ { 1 , 2 } j\in\{1,2\} j ∈ { 1 , 2 } . By (4) for ( Q ψ ) n (Q_\psi)_n ( Q ψ ) n and (21) , replacing an argument e e e by g e ge g e multiplies the value by g g g , up to a term with j + 1 j+1 j + 1 arguments in a c 0 \mathfrak a_c^0 a c 0 . For j = 2 j=2 j = 2 , this term vanishes by the case j = 3 j=3 j = 3 , so we may take all the arguments in a c 1 \mathfrak a_c^1 a c 1 equal to e e e . Since f f f and g g g do not depend on y y y ,
{ f , g } = v ( ∂ f ∂ x ∂ g ∂ y − ∂ f ∂ y ∂ g ∂ x ) = 0. \begin{aligned}
\{f,g\}=v\left(\frac{\partial f}{\partial x}\frac{\partial g}{\partial y}-\frac{\partial f}{\partial y}\frac{\partial g}{\partial x}\right) \\
&=0.
\end{aligned} { f , g } = v ( ∂ x ∂ f ∂ y ∂ g − ∂ y ∂ f ∂ x ∂ g ) = 0.
The first formula of (22) therefore gives λ n ( e , … , e , f , g ) = 0 \lambda_n(e,\ldots,e,f,g)=0 λ n ( e , … , e , f , g ) = 0 . For j = 1 j=1 j = 1 , the extra term vanishes by the case j = 2 j=2 j = 2 , so again we may take g i = 1 g_i=1 g i = 1 , and, since { f , y } = v ∂ f ∂ x \{f,y\}=v\frac{\partial f}{\partial x} { f , y } = v ∂ x ∂ f , the second formula of (22) gives
λ n ( e , … , e , f ) = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ∂ n − 1 ∂ y n − 1 ( v ∂ f ∂ x ) ∣ y = 0 e = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ( n − 1 ) ! v n − 1 ∂ f ∂ x e . \begin{aligned}
\lambda_n(e,\ldots,e,f)=(-1)^{n-1}\left.\frac{\partial^{n-1}}{\partial y^{n-1}}\left(v\frac{\partial f}{\partial x}\right)\right|_{y=0}e \\
&=(-1)^{n-1}(n-1)!\,v_{n-1}\frac{\partial f}{\partial x}e.
\end{aligned} λ n ( e , … , e , f ) = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ∂ y n − 1 ∂ n − 1 ( v ∂ x ∂ f ) y = 0 e = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ( n − 1 )! v n − 1 ∂ x ∂ f e .
By graded antisymmetry, moving f f f , of degree 0, across the n − 1 n-1 n − 1 arguments e e e gives the sign ( − 1 ) n − 1 (-1)^{n-1} ( − 1 ) n − 1 , hence (45) .
Since f , g 1 , … , g n − 1 f,g_1,\ldots,g_{n-1} f , g 1 , … , g n − 1 are arbitrary in (45) , λ n = 0 \lambda_n=0 λ n = 0 if and only if v n − 1 = 0 v_{n-1}=0 v n − 1 = 0 , for n ≥ 1 n\geq1 n ≥ 1 . In particular, λ n = 0 \lambda_n=0 λ n = 0 for all n ≥ 2 n\geq2 n ≥ 2 if and only if v k = 0 v_k=0 v k = 0 for all k ≥ 1 k\geq1 k ≥ 1 . The complex ( a c , λ 1 ) (\mathfrak a_c,\lambda_1) ( a c , λ 1 ) is λ 1 : C ∞ ( N c ) → C ∞ ( ν N c ) \lambda_1:C^\infty(N_c)\to C^\infty(\nu N_c) λ 1 : C ∞ ( N c ) → C ∞ ( ν N c ) , with
λ 1 ( f ) = v 0 ∂ f ∂ x e . (46) \lambda_1(f)=v_0\frac{\partial f}{\partial x}e. \tag*{(46)} λ 1 ( f ) = v 0 ∂ x ∂ f e . (46)
Corollary 6.2. One has λ 2 ∣ a c 0 ⊗ a c 0 = 0 \lambda_2|_{\mathfrak a_c^0\otimes\mathfrak a_c^0}=0 λ 2 ∣ a c 0 ⊗ a c 0 = 0 , and there is a unique vector field X X X on N c N_c N c with λ 2 ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v \lambda_2(f,v)=X(f)v λ 2 ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v for f ∈ a c 0 f\in\mathfrak a_c^0 f ∈ a c 0 and v ∈ a c 1 v\in\mathfrak a_c^1 v ∈ a c 1 . In an adapted chart, X = v 1 ∂ ∂ x X=v_1\frac{\partial}{\partial x} X = v 1 ∂ x ∂ .
Proof. The first claim is part of Proposition 6.1. By (45) , λ 2 ( f , g e ) = v 1 ∂ f ∂ x g e \lambda_2(f,ge)=v_1\frac{\partial f}{\partial x}ge λ 2 ( f , g e ) = v 1 ∂ x ∂ f g e in every adapted chart. These local vector fields agree on overlaps because they are characterized by the intrinsic bracket λ 2 ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v \lambda_2(f,v)=X(f)v λ 2 ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v . They therefore define X X X globally. Uniqueness holds since ν N c \nu N_c ν N c has a nowhere vanishing section.
Contact multiplicities
The unary bracket depends on the restriction of σ \sigma σ to N c N_c N c , while the binary bracket also depends on the tubular neighbourhood. We first record the transformation laws that distinguish these two kinds of dependence. We then define the contact multiplicities and use them to compute the cohomology of λ 1 \lambda_1 λ 1 .
Keep the tubular neighbourhood, replace the coordinate x x x by θ \theta θ , with x = x ( θ ) x=x(\theta) x = x ( θ ) , and replace e e e by e ˉ = μ e \bar e=\mu e e ˉ = μ e , with μ \mu μ nowhere zero. Then y = y ˉ y=\bar y y = y ˉ , with μ \mu μ evaluated at x ( θ ) x(\theta) x ( θ ) , and in the chart ( θ , y ˉ ) (\theta,\bar y) ( θ , y ˉ ) ,
∂ ∂ θ = x ′ ( θ ) ∂ ∂ x + y ˉ d ( μ ∘ x ) d θ ∂ ∂ y , ∂ ∂ y ˉ = μ ∂ ∂ y , ∂ ∂ θ ∧ ∂ ∂ y ˉ = x ′ ( θ ) μ ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y . \frac{\partial}{\partial\theta}=x'(\theta)\frac{\partial}{\partial x}+\bar y\frac{d(\mu\circ x)}{d\theta}\frac{\partial}{\partial y},
\qquad
\frac{\partial}{\partial\bar y}=\mu\frac{\partial}{\partial y},
\qquad
\frac{\partial}{\partial\theta}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial\bar y}
=x'(\theta)\mu\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}. ∂ θ ∂ = x ′ ( θ ) ∂ x ∂ + y ˉ d θ d ( μ ∘ x ) ∂ y ∂ , ∂ y ˉ ∂ = μ ∂ y ∂ , ∂ θ ∂ ∧ ∂ y ˉ ∂ = x ′ ( θ ) μ ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ .
Hence v ˉ ( θ , y ˉ ) = v ( x ( θ ) , μ y ˉ ) / ( x ′ ( θ ) μ ) \bar{v}(\theta,\bar{y})=v(x(\theta),\mu\bar{y})/(x'(\theta)\mu) v ˉ ( θ , y ˉ ) = v ( x ( θ ) , μ y ˉ ) / ( x ′ ( θ ) μ ) , whose coefficients of y ˉ 0 \bar{y}^{0} y ˉ 0 and y ˉ 1 \bar{y}^{1} y ˉ 1 are
v ˉ 0 ( θ ) = v 0 ( x ( θ ) ) x ′ ( θ ) μ ( x ( θ ) ) , (47) \bar{v}_{0}(\theta)=\frac{v_{0}(x(\theta))}{x'(\theta)\mu(x(\theta))}, \tag*{(47)} v ˉ 0 ( θ ) = x ′ ( θ ) μ ( x ( θ )) v 0 ( x ( θ )) , (47)
v ˉ 1 ( θ ) = v 1 ( x ( θ ) ) x ′ ( θ ) , so that v ˉ 1 ∂ ∂ θ = v 1 ∂ ∂ x on N c . (48) \bar{v}_{1}(\theta)=\frac{v_{1}(x(\theta))}{x'(\theta)},\quad\text{so that}\quad\bar{v}_{1}\frac{\partial}{\partial\theta}=v_{1}\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\quad\text{on }N_{c}. \tag*{(48)} v ˉ 1 ( θ ) = x ′ ( θ ) v 1 ( x ( θ )) , so that v ˉ 1 ∂ θ ∂ = v 1 ∂ x ∂ on N c . (48)
More intrinsically, there is a canonical identification
T N c ⊗ ν N c ⟶ ⋀ 2 T Σ ∣ N c , u ⊗ [ v ] ⟼ u ∧ v . TN_{c}\otimes\nu_{N_{c}}\longrightarrow\bigwedge^{2}T\Sigma|_{N_{c}},\quad u\otimes[v]\longmapsto u\wedge v. T N c ⊗ ν N c ⟶ ⋀ 2 T Σ ∣ N c , u ⊗ [ v ] ⟼ u ∧ v .
It is well defined because T N c TN_{c} T N c has rank one. A tubular neighbourhood is the identity on T N c TN_{c} T N c and induces the identity on ν N c \nu_{N_{c}} ν N c , so, for every tubular neighbourhood, coordinate and frame,
v 0 ∂ ∂ x ⊗ e = σ ∣ N c . (49) v_{0}\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\otimes e=\sigma|_{N_{c}}. \tag*{(49)} v 0 ∂ x ∂ ⊗ e = σ ∣ N c . (49)
So a change of tubular neighbourhood, coordinate or frame multiplies v 0 v_{0} v 0 by a nowhere vanishing function, as in (47) , and the zeros of v 0 v_{0} v 0 and their orders do not depend on these choices. Since N c N_{c} N c is a circle and ν N c \nu_{N_{c}} ν N c is trivial, we fix a global angular coordinate x ∈ R / Z x\in\mathbb{R}/\mathbb{Z} x ∈ R / Z on N c N_{c} N c and a global frame e e e , and we regard the v k v_{k} v k as functions on N c N_{c} N c .
By (15) , two tubular neighbourhoods satisfy σ ψ ′ = φ ∗ σ ψ \sigma_{\psi'}=\varphi^{*}\sigma_{\psi} σ ψ ′ = φ ∗ σ ψ with φ = φ ψ ψ ′ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) \varphi=\varphi_{\psi\psi'}\in\operatorname{Diff}_{1}(\nu_{N_{c}}) φ = φ ψ ψ ′ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) . By Lemma 2.4 , φ = e Z \varphi=e^{Z} φ = e Z with Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν N c ) Z\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1}(\nu_{N_{c}}) Z ∈ X ≥ 1 ( ν N c ) , so φ ∗ = e ad Z \varphi^{*}=e^{\operatorname{ad}Z} φ ∗ = e ad Z on formal bivectors by (13) . In an adapted chart, the component of weight m m m of a formal vector field is
Z ( m ) = y m κ ( x ) ∂ ∂ x + y m + 1 ρ ( x ) ∂ ∂ y , with κ , ρ ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) . Z_{(m)}=y^{m}\kappa(x)\frac{\partial}{\partial x}+y^{m+1}\rho(x)\frac{\partial}{\partial y},\quad\text{with }\kappa,\rho\in C^{\infty}(N_{c}). Z ( m ) = y m κ ( x ) ∂ x ∂ + y m + 1 ρ ( x ) ∂ y ∂ , with κ , ρ ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) .
Lemma 6.3. Let m ≥ 1 m\geq1 m ≥ 1 , let π = v ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y \pi=v\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y} π = v ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ be a formal bivector of weight ≥ − 1 \geq-1 ≥ − 1 , let Z ∈ X ≥ m ( ν N c ) Z\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq m}(\nu_{N_{c}}) Z ∈ X ≥ m ( ν N c ) with Z ( m ) Z_{(m)} Z ( m ) as above, and let v ~ \tilde{v} v ~ be the coefficient of e ad Z π = v ~ ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y e^{\operatorname{ad}Z}\pi=\tilde{v}\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y} e ad Z π = v ~ ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ . Then
v ~ k = v k ( 0 ≤ k ≤ m − 1 ) , \tilde{v}_{k}=v_{k}\quad(0\leq k\leq m-1), v ~ k = v k ( 0 ≤ k ≤ m − 1 ) , v ~ m = v m + κ v 0 ′ − ( κ ′ + ( m + 1 ) ρ ) v 0 , (50) \tilde{v}_{m}=v_{m}+\kappa v_{0}'-\bigl(\kappa'+(m+1)\rho\bigr)v_{0}, \tag*{(50)} v ~ m = v m + κ v 0 ′ − ( κ ′ + ( m + 1 ) ρ ) v 0 , (50) where the prime denotes d d x \frac{d}{dx} d x d .
Proof. Since π \pi π has weight ≥ − 1 \geq-1 ≥ − 1 , with component v 0 ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y v_{0}\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y} v 0 ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ of weight − 1 -1 − 1 , and ad Z \operatorname{ad}Z ad Z raises the weight by at least m m m , the components of e ad Z π = π + [ Z , π ] + 1 2 [ Z , [ Z , π ] ] + ⋯ e^{\operatorname{ad}Z}\pi=\pi+[Z,\pi]+\frac{1}{2}[Z,[Z,\pi]]+\cdots e ad Z π = π + [ Z , π ] + 2 1 [ Z , [ Z , π ]] + ⋯ of weight ≤ m − 2 \leq m-2 ≤ m − 2 are those of π \pi π , and that of weight m − 1 m-1 m − 1 changes by [ Z ( m ) , v 0 ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y ] \left[Z_{(m)},v_{0}\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}\right] [ Z ( m ) , v 0 ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ ] . By (10) ,
Z ( m ) ( v 0 ) = y m κ v 0 ′ , Z_{(m)}(v_{0})=y^{m}\kappa v_{0}', Z ( m ) ( v 0 ) = y m κ v 0 ′ , [ Z ( m ) , ∂ ∂ x ] = − y m κ ′ ∂ ∂ x − y m + 1 ρ ′ ∂ ∂ y , \left[Z_{(m)},\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\right]=-y^{m}\kappa'\frac{\partial}{\partial x}-y^{m+1}\rho'\frac{\partial}{\partial y}, [ Z ( m ) , ∂ x ∂ ] = − y m κ ′ ∂ x ∂ − y m + 1 ρ ′ ∂ y ∂ , [ Z ( m ) , ∂ ∂ y ] = − m y m − 1 κ ∂ ∂ x − ( m + 1 ) y m ρ ∂ ∂ y , \left[Z_{(m)},\frac{\partial}{\partial y}\right]=-my^{m-1}\kappa\frac{\partial}{\partial x}-(m+1)y^{m}\rho\frac{\partial}{\partial y}, [ Z ( m ) , ∂ y ∂ ] = − m y m − 1 κ ∂ x ∂ − ( m + 1 ) y m ρ ∂ y ∂ , so, by the Leibniz rule,
[ Z ( m ) , v 0 ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y ] = Z ( m ) ( v 0 ) ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y + v 0 [ Z ( m ) , ∂ ∂ x ] ∧ ∂ ∂ y + v 0 ∂ ∂ x ∧ [ Z ( m ) , ∂ ∂ y ] = y m ( κ v 0 ′ − κ ′ v 0 − ( m + 1 ) ρ v 0 ) ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y . \begin{aligned}
\left[Z_{(m)},v_{0}\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}\right]
&=Z_{(m)}(v_{0})\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}
+v_{0}\left[Z_{(m)},\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\right]\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}
+v_{0}\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\left[Z_{(m)},\frac{\partial}{\partial y}\right]\\
&=y^{m}\bigl(\kappa v_{0}'-\kappa'v_{0}-(m+1)\rho v_{0}\bigr)
\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}.
\end{aligned} [ Z ( m ) , v 0 ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ ] = Z ( m ) ( v 0 ) ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ + v 0 [ Z ( m ) , ∂ x ∂ ] ∧ ∂ y ∂ + v 0 ∂ x ∂ ∧ [ Z ( m ) , ∂ y ∂ ] = y m ( κ v 0 ′ − κ ′ v 0 − ( m + 1 ) ρ v 0 ) ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ . This gives (50) . □
To interpret v 0 v_{0} v 0 and v 1 v_{1} v 1 geometrically, we compute them in the local models of §§3 and 4.
Lemma 6.4. (1) At a point q ∈ N c q\in N_{c} q ∈ N c , one has v 0 ( q ) = 0 v_{0}(q)=0 v 0 ( q ) = 0 if and only if q ∈ D q\in D q ∈ D . In particular, if N c ⊂ Σ ∖ D N_{c}\subset\Sigma\setminus D N c ⊂ Σ ∖ D , then v 0 v_{0} v 0 is nowhere zero.
(2) If N c = D j N_{c}=D_{j} N c = D j , then in the adapted chart ( x , y ) = ( t , r ) (x,y)=(t,r) ( x , y ) = ( t , r ) of (26) , v = − y v=-y v = − y , so that v 0 ≡ 0 v_{0}\equiv0 v 0 ≡ 0 , v 1 ≡ − 1 v_{1}\equiv-1 v 1 ≡ − 1 and v k = 0 v_{k}=0 v k = 0 for k ≥ 2 k\geq2 k ≥ 2 .
(3) At a transverse contact p ∈ N c ∩ D j p\in N_{c}\cap D_{j} p ∈ N c ∩ D j , in the adapted chart ( x , y ) = ( r , s ) (x,y)=(r,s) ( x , y ) = ( r , s ) of Lemma 4.2 , v = x v=x v = x , so that v 0 ( x ) = x v_{0}(x)=x v 0 ( x ) = x and v k = 0 v_{k}=0 v k = 0 for k ≥ 1 k\geq1 k ≥ 1 .
(4) At a tangential contact p ∈ N c ∩ D j p \in N_c \cap D_j p ∈ N c ∩ D j , in the adapted chart x = t x=t x = t , y = r − h ( t ) y=r-h(t) y = r − h ( t ) built from Lemma 4.3 , υ = − ( y + h ( x ) ) \upsilon=-(y+h(x)) υ = − ( y + h ( x )) , so that υ 0 = − h \upsilon_0=-h υ 0 = − h , υ 1 ≡ − 1 \upsilon_1\equiv-1 υ 1 ≡ − 1 and υ k = 0 \upsilon_k=0 υ k = 0 for k ≥ 2 k\ge2 k ≥ 2 .
Proof. (1) For q ∈ N c q\in N_c q ∈ N c , σ q = υ 0 ( q ) ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y \sigma_q=\upsilon_0(q)\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y} σ q = υ 0 ( q ) ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ , and σ q = 0 \sigma_q=0 σ q = 0 exactly when q ∈ D q\in D q ∈ D . (2) σ = r ∂ ∂ r ∧ ∂ ∂ t = − r ∂ ∂ t ∧ ∂ ∂ r \sigma=r\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial t}=-r\frac{\partial}{\partial t}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial r} σ = r ∂ r ∂ ∧ ∂ t ∂ = − r ∂ t ∂ ∧ ∂ r ∂ . (3) σ = r ∂ ∂ r ∧ ∂ ∂ s \sigma=r\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial s} σ = r ∂ r ∂ ∧ ∂ s ∂ and N c ∩ W = { s = 0 } N_c\cap W=\{s=0\} N c ∩ W = { s = 0 } by Lemma 4.2 . (4) D j ∩ W = { r = 0 } D_j\cap W=\{r=0\} D j ∩ W = { r = 0 } and N c ∩ W = { r = h ( t ) } N_c\cap W=\{r=h(t)\} N c ∩ W = { r = h ( t )} by Lemma 4.3 . With x = t x=t x = t and y = r − h ( t ) y=r-h(t) y = r − h ( t ) ,
∂ ∂ x = ∂ ∂ t , ∂ ∂ y = ∂ ∂ r − h ′ ( t ) ∂ ∂ t , ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y = ∂ ∂ t ∧ ∂ ∂ r , σ = − r ∂ ∂ t ∧ ∂ ∂ r = − ( y + h ( x ) ) ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y . \frac{\partial}{\partial x}=\frac{\partial}{\partial t},\qquad\frac{\partial}{\partial y}=\frac{\partial}{\partial r}-h'(t)\frac{\partial}{\partial t},\qquad\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}=\frac{\partial}{\partial t}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial r},\qquad\sigma=-r\frac{\partial}{\partial t}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial r}=-(y+h(x))\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}. ∂ x ∂ = ∂ t ∂ , ∂ y ∂ = ∂ r ∂ − h ′ ( t ) ∂ t ∂ , ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ = ∂ t ∂ ∧ ∂ r ∂ , σ = − r ∂ t ∂ ∧ ∂ r ∂ = − ( y + h ( x )) ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ .
Definition 6.5. Let N c ⊄ D N_c\not\subset D N c ⊂ D be a component of N N N , and let p ∈ N c ∩ D p\in N_c\cap D p ∈ N c ∩ D . The contact multiplicity m p ∈ { 1 , 2 , … } ∪ { ∞ } m_p\in\{1,2,\ldots\}\cup\{\infty\} m p ∈ { 1 , 2 , … } ∪ { ∞ } of N c N_c N c at p p p is the order of vanishing at p p p of r ∣ N c r|_{N_c} r ∣ N c , where r r r is a local defining function of D D D near p p p . Here m p = ∞ m_p=\infty m p = ∞ means that r ∣ N c r|_{N_c} r ∣ N c is flat at p p p , that is, all its derivatives vanish there.
The multiplicity m p m_p m p does not depend on r r r , since two defining functions differ by a nowhere vanishing factor.
Proposition 6.6. Let N c N_c N c be a component of N N N with N c ⊄ D N_c\not\subset D N c ⊂ D .
(1) For every tubular neighbourhood, coordinate and frame, υ 0 \upsilon_0 υ 0 vanishes at p ∈ N c ∩ D p\in N_c\cap D p ∈ N c ∩ D to order exactly m p m_p m p . Moreover, m p = 1 m_p=1 m p = 1 if and only if the contact at p p p is transverse.
(2) H 0 ( a c , λ 1 ) = R H^0(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1)=\mathbb{R} H 0 ( a c , λ 1 ) = R , and
im λ 1 = { υ 0 u e : u ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) , ∫ N c u d x = 0 } . \operatorname{im}\lambda_1=\left\{\upsilon_0u\,e:u\in C^\infty(N_c),\ \int_{N_c}u\,dx=0\right\}. im λ 1 = { υ 0 u e : u ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) , ∫ N c u d x = 0 } . (3) If every m p m_p m p is finite, then ∑ p m p \sum_p m_p ∑ p m p is even and
dim H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) = 1 + ∑ p ∈ N c ∩ D m p . \dim H^1(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1)=1+\sum_{p\in N_c\cap D}m_p. dim H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) = 1 + p ∈ N c ∩ D ∑ m p . (4) If some m p m_p m p is infinite, then H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) H^1(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1) H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) is infinite-dimensional.
Proof. (1) Near p ∈ D j p\in D_j p ∈ D j , σ = r ∂ ∂ r ∧ ∂ ∂ t \sigma=r\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial t} σ = r ∂ r ∂ ∧ ∂ t ∂ , so, by (49) , υ 0 \upsilon_0 υ 0 is r ∣ N c r|_{N_c} r ∣ N c times a nowhere vanishing function. Moreover, r ∣ N c r|_{N_c} r ∣ N c has a simple zero at p p p if and only if d r ∣ T p N c ≠ 0 dr|_{T_pN_c}\ne0 d r ∣ T p N c = 0 , that is, T p N c ≠ T p D j T_pN_c\ne T_pD_j T p N c = T p D j .
(2) By (46) , λ 1 ( f ) = υ 0 f ′ e \lambda_1(f)=\upsilon_0f'e λ 1 ( f ) = υ 0 f ′ e , and υ 0 \upsilon_0 υ 0 vanishes only on the finite set N c ∩ D N_c\cap D N c ∩ D by Lemma 6.4(1). So λ 1 ( f ) = 0 \lambda_1(f)=0 λ 1 ( f ) = 0 implies f ′ = 0 f'=0 f ′ = 0 on a dense set, and f f f is constant. The image follows, since u = f ′ u=f' u = f ′ for some f ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) f\in C^\infty(N_c) f ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) if and only if ∫ u d x = 0 \int u\,dx=0 ∫ u d x = 0 .
(3) As in (2), u ↦ υ 0 u u\mapsto\upsilon_0u u ↦ υ 0 u is injective on C ∞ ( N c ) C^\infty(N_c) C ∞ ( N c ) . Let I m ⊂ C ∞ ( N c ) I_{\mathbf m}\subset C^\infty(N_c) I m ⊂ C ∞ ( N c ) , with m = ( m p ) p \mathbf m=(m_p)_p m = ( m p ) p , be the space of functions whose jet of order m p − 1 m_p-1 m p − 1 vanishes at every p ∈ N c ∩ D p\in N_c\cap D p ∈ N c ∩ D . Clearly υ 0 C ∞ ( N c ) ⊂ I m \upsilon_0C^\infty(N_c)\subset I_{\mathbf m} υ 0 C ∞ ( N c ) ⊂ I m . Conversely, for g ∈ I m g\in I_{\mathbf m} g ∈ I m , Taylor’s formula gives υ 0 = ( x − x ( p ) ) m p w p \upsilon_0=(x-x(p))^{m_p}w_p υ 0 = ( x − x ( p ) ) m p w p and g = ( x − x ( p ) ) m p g p g=(x-x(p))^{m_p}g_p g = ( x − x ( p ) ) m p g p near p p p , with w p w_p w p smooth and w p ( p ) ≠ 0 w_p(p)\ne0 w p ( p ) = 0 . So g / υ 0 g/\upsilon_0 g / υ 0 , which is smooth away from N c ∩ D N_c\cap D N c ∩ D , equals g p / w p g_p/w_p g p / w p near p p p , so g ∈ υ 0 C ∞ ( N c ) g\in\upsilon_0C^\infty(N_c) g ∈ υ 0 C ∞ ( N c ) . Polynomials in x − x ( p ) x-x(p) x − x ( p ) times bump functions show that C ∞ ( N c ) C^\infty(N_c) C ∞ ( N c ) maps onto the jets of order m p − 1 m_p-1 m p − 1 at the points p p p , so I m I_{\mathbf m} I m has codimension ∑ p m p \sum_p m_p ∑ p m p . By (2), im λ 1 \operatorname{im}\lambda_1 im λ 1 is the image of the hyperplane { ∫ u d x = 0 } \{\int u\,dx=0\} { ∫ u d x = 0 } under u ↦ υ 0 u e u\mapsto\upsilon_0u\,e u ↦ υ 0 u e , so it has codimension 1 1 1 in I m e I_{\mathbf m}e I m e , and codimension 1 + ∑ p m p 1+\sum_p m_p 1 + ∑ p m p in a c \mathfrak{a}_c a c . Finally, υ 0 \upsilon_0 υ 0 changes sign at p p p if and only if m p m_p m p is odd, and an even number of times around N c N_c N c , so ∑ p m p \sum_p m_p ∑ p m p is even.
(4) If m p = ∞ m_p=\infty m p = ∞ , every element of im λ 1 \operatorname{im}\lambda_1 im λ 1 is flat at p p p , so, as in (3), H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) H^1(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1) H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) maps onto the jets of every finite order at p p p .
For transverse contacts, the dimension of H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) H^1(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1) H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) agrees with the Mazzeo–Melrose formula for b b b -manifolds [15 Theorem 27] (see also [16 Proposition 3.19] ). For contacts of equal order, it agrees with the cohomology of b k b^k b k -manifolds [31 Proposition 4.3] .
Example 6.7. On the sphere of Example 5.6, let g : R / 2 π Z → [ 0 , 1 ] g:\mathbb{R}/2\pi\mathbb{Z}\to[0,1] g : R /2 π Z → [ 0 , 1 ] be smooth, with g ( θ ) = exp ( − 1 / θ 2 ) g(\theta)=\exp(-1/\theta^2) g ( θ ) = exp ( − 1/ θ 2 ) for 0 < ∣ θ ∣ ≤ 1 2 0<|\theta|\le\frac{1}{2} 0 < ∣ θ ∣ ≤ 2 1 , g ( 0 ) = 0 g(0)=0 g ( 0 ) = 0 and g > 0 g>0 g > 0 elsewhere. Then N = { z = g ( θ ) } N=\{z=g(\theta)\} N = { z = g ( θ )} is a connected admissible curve which meets D D D only at p = ( 0 , 0 ) p=(0,0) p = ( 0 , 0 ) , with m p = ∞ m_p=\infty m p = ∞ , so H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) H^1(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1) H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) is infinite-dimensional by Proposition 6.6 (4).
Remark 6.8. By [9 Theorem 4] , for a Hausdorff source-connected Lie groupoid whose source fibres are homologically n n n -connected, the van Est map from its differentiable cohomology to the cohomology of its Lie algebroid is an isomorphism in degrees ≤ n \le n ≤ n and injective in degree n + 1 n+1 n + 1 . We apply this to the Lagrangian subgroupoid L \mathcal{L} L of Proposition 4.12 . Every arrow of L \mathcal{L} L has its source and its target in the same component of N N N , so L ∣ N c = s − 1 ( N c ) \mathcal{L}|_{N_c}=s^{-1}(N_c) L ∣ N c = s − 1 ( N c ) is open and closed in L \mathcal{L} L . It is Hausdorff, since L \mathcal{L} L is embedded in the Hausdorff groupoid G Σ \mathcal{G}_{\Sigma} G Σ , and source-connected, with Lie algebroid T N c ∘ TN_c^\circ T N c ∘ , whose Chevalley–Eilenberg complex is isomorphic to ( a c , λ 1 ) (\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1) ( a c , λ 1 ) by Remark 2.7. If N c N_c N c meets D D D , its source fibres are contractible, since by Proposition 4.12 they are arcs of N c ∖ D N_c\setminus D N c ∖ D and isotropy groups isomorphic to R > 0 \mathbb{R}_{>0} R > 0 or R \mathbb{R} R if N c ⊄ D N_c\not\subset D N c ⊂ D , and copies of R \mathbb{R} R if N c = D j N_c=D_j N c = D j . So the van Est map is an isomorphism H d i f f ∙ ( L ∣ N c ) ≅ H ∙ ( a c , λ 1 ) H^\bullet_{\mathrm{diff}}(\mathcal{L}|_{N_c})\cong H^\bullet(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1) H diff ∙ ( L ∣ N c ) ≅ H ∙ ( a c , λ 1 ) in all degrees. If moreover N c ⊄ D N_c\not\subset D N c ⊂ D , then, by Proposition 6.6 , dim H d i f f 1 ( L ∣ N c ) = 1 + ∑ p m p \dim H^1_{\mathrm{diff}}(\mathcal{L}|_{N_c})=1+\sum_p m_p dim H diff 1 ( L ∣ N c ) = 1 + ∑ p m p if every m p m_p m p is finite, and H d i f f 1 ( L ∣ N c ) H^1_{\mathrm{diff}}(\mathcal{L}|_{N_c}) H diff 1 ( L ∣ N c ) is infinite-dimensional otherwise. If N c ⊂ Σ ∖ D N_c\subset\Sigma\setminus D N c ⊂ Σ ∖ D , then L ∣ N c = N c × N c \mathcal{L}|_{N_c}=N_c\times N_c L ∣ N c = N c × N c is proper, so H d i f f 1 ( L ∣ N c ) = 0 H^1_{\mathrm{diff}}(\mathcal{L}|_{N_c})=0 H diff 1 ( L ∣ N c ) = 0 [9 Proposition 1] , while H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) = R H^1(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1)=\mathbb{R} H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) = R by Proposition 6.6 (3). This is consistent with [9 Theorem 4] , which only gives injectivity in degree 1 here, since the source fibres N c N_c N c are not simply connected.
A normal form
We now construct a tubular neighbourhood in which the formal expansion σ ψ \sigma_\psi σ ψ is affine in the fibre coordinate. By (45) , this eliminates all brackets of arity at least three. When all contacts are transverse, the same construction also eliminates the binary bracket. The normal form concerns the formal expansion along N c N_c N c . It does not assert that the smooth bivector is affine on an open neighbourhood.
Throughout this subsection, we fix a tubular neighbourhood ψ 0 \psi_0 ψ 0 of N c N_c N c , the global angular coordinate x ∈ R / Z x\in\mathbb{R}/\mathbb{Z} x ∈ R / Z and the global frame e e e . The frame identifies ν N c \nu_{N_c} ν N c with N c × R N_c\times\mathbb{R} N c × R , and, after shrinking the domain of ψ 0 \psi_0 ψ 0 , we work on N c × ( − ε , ε ) N_c\times(-\varepsilon,\varepsilon) N c × ( − ε , ε ) with coordinates ( x , y ) (x,y) ( x , y ) . Formal functions along N c N_c N c are then series ∑ k f k ( x ) y k \sum_k f_k(x)y^k ∑ k f k ( x ) y k , with f k ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) f_k\in C^\infty(N_c) f k ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) . As in §6.2, a change of coordinate x = x ( θ ) x=x(\theta) x = x ( θ ) and of frame e ˉ = μ e \bar e=\mu e e ˉ = μ e replaces the coefficient of a formal bivector by v ( x ( θ ) , μ y ˉ ) / ( x ′ ( θ ) μ ) v(x(\theta),\mu\bar y)/(x'(\theta)\mu) v ( x ( θ ) , μ y ˉ ) / ( x ′ ( θ ) μ ) . So the property that v v v is a polynomial of degree at most one in y y y does not depend on the coordinate and the frame.
Lemma 6.9. (1) For every φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) \varphi\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu_{N_c}) φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) , there is a tubular neighbourhood ψ \psi ψ of N c N_c N c with φ ψ 0 ψ = φ \varphi\psi_0\psi=\varphi φ ψ 0 ψ = φ .
(2) Let p 1 , … , p s ∈ N c p_1,\ldots,p_s\in N_c p 1 , … , p s ∈ N c be distinct, and let ψ i \psi_i ψ i be a tubular neighbourhood of an open arc J i ∋ p i J_i\ni p_i J i ∋ p i of N c N_c N c . Then there is a tubular neighbourhood ψ \psi ψ of N c N_c N c which agrees with ψ i \psi_i ψ i near p i p_i p i for every i i i .
Proof. Let a , b a,b a , b be smooth functions on N c × ( − ε , ε ) N_c\times(-\varepsilon,\varepsilon) N c × ( − ε , ε ) with a ( x , 0 ) = b ( x , 0 ) = ∂ b ∂ y ( x , 0 ) = 0 a(x,0)=b(x,0)=\frac{\partial b}{\partial y}(x,0)=0 a ( x , 0 ) = b ( x , 0 ) = ∂ y ∂ b ( x , 0 ) = 0 , and γ ( x , y ) = ( x + a ( x , y ) , y + b ( x , y ) ) \gamma(x,y)=(x+a(x,y),y+b(x,y)) γ ( x , y ) = ( x + a ( x , y ) , y + b ( x , y )) , with x + a x+a x + a modulo Z \mathbb{Z} Z . Then γ \gamma γ is the identity on the zero section, and its differential there is ( x ˙ , y ˙ ) ↦ ( x ˙ + ∂ a ∂ y ( x , 0 ) y ˙ , y ˙ ) (\dot x,\dot y)\mapsto(\dot x+\frac{\partial a}{\partial y}(x,0)\dot y,\dot y) ( x ˙ , y ˙ ) ↦ ( x ˙ + ∂ y ∂ a ( x , 0 ) y ˙ , y ˙ ) , so γ \gamma γ induces the identity on ν N c \nu_{N_c} ν N c and is a local diffeomorphism near the zero section. It is injective near the zero section, since otherwise pairs u k ≠ u k ′ u_k\ne u'_k u k = u k ′ converging to the zero section with γ ( u k ) = γ ( u k ′ ) \gamma(u_k)=\gamma(u'_k) γ ( u k ) = γ ( u k ′ ) would have subsequences converging to u u u , u ′ ∈ N c u'\in N_c u ′ ∈ N c with u = γ ( u ) = γ ( u ′ ) = u ′ u=\gamma(u)=\gamma(u')=u' u = γ ( u ) = γ ( u ′ ) = u ′ , contradicting local injectivity at u u u . So ψ 0 ∘ γ \psi_0\circ\gamma ψ 0 ∘ γ is a tubular neighbourhood, and φ ψ 0 , ψ 0 ∘ γ \varphi_{\psi_0,\psi_0\circ\gamma} φ ψ 0 , ψ 0 ∘ γ is the expansion of $\gamma.
(1) Since φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) \varphi\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu_{N_c}) φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) , φ ∗ ( x ) = x + ∑ k ≥ 1 a k ( x ) y k \varphi^*(x)=x+\sum_{k\geq1}a_k(x)y^k φ ∗ ( x ) = x + ∑ k ≥ 1 a k ( x ) y k and φ ∗ ( y ) = y + ∑ k ≥ 2 b k ( x ) y k \varphi^*(y)=y+\sum_{k\geq2}b_k(x)y^k φ ∗ ( y ) = y + ∑ k ≥ 2 b k ( x ) y k , where φ ∗ ( x ) \varphi^*(x) φ ∗ ( x ) is a formal map to R / Z \mathbb{R}/\mathbb{Z} R / Z . By Borel’s lemma, uniformly on the compact circle N c N_c N c , there are a a a and b b b as above with these Taylor series in y y y . Let φ γ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) \varphi_\gamma\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu_{N_c}) φ γ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) be the expansion of γ \gamma γ , and let φ γ − 1 = φ γ ∘ φ γ − 1 \varphi_\gamma^{-1}=\varphi_\gamma\circ\varphi_\gamma^{-1} φ γ − 1 = φ γ ∘ φ γ − 1 . Then φ γ − 1 \varphi_\gamma^{-1} φ γ − 1 fixes x x x and y y y , so every power of φ γ ∗ − i d \varphi_\gamma^*-id φ γ ∗ − i d vanishes on these coordinates. Hence log φ γ ∗ = 0 \log\varphi_\gamma^*=0 log φ γ ∗ = 0 . By Lemma 2.4 (2), φ γ = φ \varphi_\gamma=\varphi φ γ = φ , and we may take ψ = ψ 0 ∘ γ \psi=\psi_0\circ\gamma ψ = ψ 0 ∘ γ .
(2) Since ψ i \psi_i ψ i and ψ 0 \psi_0 ψ 0 are the identity on N c N_c N c and on ν N c \nu_{N_c} ν N c , for pairwise disjoint open arcs J i ′ ∋ p i J_i'\ni p_i J i ′ ∋ p i with compact closure in J i J_i J i , ψ 0 − 1 ∘ ψ i ( x , y ) = ( x + a i ( x , y ) , y + b i ( x , y ) ) \psi_0^{-1}\circ\psi_i(x,y)=(x+a_i(x,y),y+b_i(x,y)) ψ 0 − 1 ∘ ψ i ( x , y ) = ( x + a i ( x , y ) , y + b i ( x , y )) near J i ′ × { 0 } J_i'\times\{0\} J i ′ × { 0 } , with a i ( x , 0 ) = b i ( x , 0 ) = ∂ b i ∂ y ( x , 0 ) = 0 a_i(x,0)=b_i(x,0)=\frac{\partial b_i}{\partial y}(x,0)=0 a i ( x , 0 ) = b i ( x , 0 ) = ∂ y ∂ b i ( x , 0 ) = 0 . Let β i ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) \beta_i\in C^\infty(N_c) β i ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) be supported in J i ′ J_i' J i ′ and equal to 1 near p i p_i p i . With a = ∑ i β i a i a=\sum_i\beta_i a_i a = ∑ i β i a i and b = ∑ i β i b i b=\sum_i\beta_i b_i b = ∑ i β i b i , after shrinking ε \varepsilon ε , ψ = ψ 0 ∘ γ \psi=\psi_0\circ\gamma ψ = ψ 0 ∘ γ agrees with ψ i \psi_i ψ i near p i p_i p i .
The construction has two steps. First, we choose a tubular neighbourhood that is already affine near the tangential contacts. We then remove the remaining coefficients one at a time without changing the neighbourhood formally near those contacts. The following lemma provides the second step.
Lemma 6.10. Let N c ⊄ D N_c\not\subset D N c ⊂ D , let A ⊂ N c A\subset N_c A ⊂ N c be an open set which contains the tangential contacts of N c N_c N c and whose closure contains no transverse contact, and let π = v ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y \pi=v\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y} π = v ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ be a formal bivector whose coefficient of y 0 y^0 y 0 is the function v 0 v_0 v 0 of σ ψ 0 \sigma_{\psi_0} σ ψ 0 . Let m ≥ 1 m\geq1 m ≥ 1 , and let g ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) g\in C^\infty(N_c) g ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) vanish on A A A . Then there is Z ∈ Ξ ≥ m ( ν N c ) Z\in\Xi_{\geq m}(\nu_{N_c}) Z ∈ Ξ ≥ m ( ν N c ) of weight m m m , whose coefficients vanish on A A A , such that the coefficient v ~ \tilde v v ~ of e ad Z π e^{\operatorname{ad}_Z}\pi e ad Z π satisfies v ~ k = v k \tilde v_k=v_k v ~ k = v k for k < m k<m k < m , v ~ m = v m − g \tilde v_m=v_m-g v ~ m = v m − g , and v ~ = v \tilde v=v v ~ = v over A A A .
Proof. By Proposition 6.6 (1), v 0 ′ ( q ) ≠ 0 v_0'(q)\ne0 v 0 ′ ( q ) = 0 at every transverse contact q q q . Let B B B be a union of open arcs around the transverse contacts on which v 0 ′ ≠ 0 v_0'\ne0 v 0 ′ = 0 , with closure disjoint from that of A A A , and O = N c ∖ D O=N_c\setminus D O = N c ∖ D . Then A A A , B B B and O O O cover N c N_c N c . Let χ A + χ B + χ O = 1 \chi_A+\chi_B+\chi_O=1 χ A + χ B + χ O = 1 be a subordinate partition of unity, and
Z = y m κ ∂ ∂ x + y m + 1 ρ ∂ ∂ y , κ = − χ B g / v 0 ′ , ρ = 1 m + 1 ( χ O g / v 0 − κ ′ ) . Z=y^m\kappa\frac{\partial}{\partial x}+y^{m+1}\rho\frac{\partial}{\partial y},\qquad\kappa=-\chi_Bg/v_0',\qquad\rho=\frac{1}{m+1}(\chi_Og/v_0-\kappa'). Z = y m κ ∂ x ∂ + y m + 1 ρ ∂ y ∂ , κ = − χ B g / v 0 ′ , ρ = m + 1 1 ( χ O g / v 0 − κ ′ ) .
These functions are smooth, since v 0 ′ ≠ 0 v'_0 \ne0 v 0 ′ = 0 on B B B and v 0 ≠ 0 v_0 \ne0 v 0 = 0 on O O O by Lemma 6.4(1). On A A A , χ B = g = 0 \chi_B=g=0 χ B = g = 0 , so κ \kappa κ , κ ′ \kappa' κ ′ and ρ \rho ρ vanish. Since χ A g = 0 \chi_Ag=0 χ A g = 0 ,
κ v 0 ′ − ( κ ′ + ( m + 1 ) ρ ) v 0 = − χ B g − χ O g = − g , \kappa v'_0-(\kappa'+(m+1)\rho)v_0=-\chi_Bg-\chi_Og=-g, κ v 0 ′ − ( κ ′ + ( m + 1 ) ρ ) v 0 = − χ B g − χ O g = − g ,
and Lemma 6.3 gives v ~ k = v k \widetilde{v}_k=v_k v k = v k for k < m k<m k < m and v ~ m = v m − g \widetilde{v}_m=v_m-g v m = v m − g . Finally, ad Z \operatorname{ad}_Z ad Z is local and Z Z Z vanishes over A A A , so e ad Z π = π e^{\operatorname{ad}_Z}\pi=\pi e ad Z π = π over A A A .
Proposition 6.11
Proposition 6.11. Let x x x be a global coordinate on N c N_c N c and e e e a global frame of ν N c \nu_{N_c} ν N c .
There is a tubular neighbourhood ψ \psi ψ of N c N_c N c with σ ψ = ( v 0 + v 1 y ) ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y \sigma_\psi=(v_0+v_1y)\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y} σ ψ = ( v 0 + v 1 y ) ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ . For such a ψ \psi ψ , one has λ n ψ = 0 \lambda^\psi_n=0 λ n ψ = 0 for n ≥ 3 n\geq3 n ≥ 3 , so that ( a c , λ ψ ) (a_c,\lambda^\psi) ( a c , λ ψ ) is a differential graded Poisson algebra.
If N c ⊄ D N_c\not\subset D N c ⊂ D and U U U is a neighbourhood of the tangential contacts of N c N_c N c , then ψ \psi ψ can be chosen with v 1 = 0 v_1=0 v 1 = 0 outside U U U . In particular, if all contacts of N c N_c N c with D D D are transverse, then there is a tubular neighbourhood with σ ψ = v 0 ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y \sigma_\psi=v_0\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y} σ ψ = v 0 ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ , for which λ n ψ = 0 \lambda^\psi_n=0 λ n ψ = 0 for n ≥ 2 n\geq2 n ≥ 2 .
Proof. It suffices to construct the stated formal expansion, since the claims about the brackets then follow from (45) . If N c = D j N_c=D_j N c = D j , the chart ( t , r ) (t,r) ( t , r ) of (26) gives a tubular neighbourhood with v = − y v=-y v = − y in the coordinate t t t and the frame ∂ ∂ r \frac{\partial}{\partial r} ∂ r ∂ , by Lemma 6.4(2). The coefficient remains affine after changing to x x x and e e e .
Suppose henceforth that N c ⊄ D N_c\not\subset D N c ⊂ D , with tangential contacts p 1 , … , p s p_1,\ldots,p_s p 1 , … , p s .
We first choose an affine model near the tangential contacts. By the beginning of this subsection, we may use x x x and e e e . By Lemma 6.4(4) and Lemma 6.9 (2), we may assume that ψ 0 \psi_0 ψ 0 agrees near each p i p_i p i with a local tubular neighbourhood ψ i \psi_i ψ i for which v v v is affine in y y y . Let U U U be a neighbourhood of the tangential contacts, arbitrary for (1). Choose an open set A ⊂ U A\subset U A ⊂ U , a union of small arcs around the p i p_i p i on which ψ 0 = ψ i \psi_0=\psi_i ψ 0 = ψ i , whose closure contains no transverse contact, and β ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) \beta\in C^\infty(N_c) β ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) supported in U U U with β ∣ A = 1 \beta|_A=1 β ∣ A = 1 . Then v k = 0 v_k=0 v k = 0 on A A A for k ≥ 2 k\geq2 k ≥ 2 , since ψ 0 = ψ i \psi_0=\psi_i ψ 0 = ψ i there. If s = 0 s=0 s = 0 , then A = ∅ A=\varnothing A = ∅ and β = 0 \beta=0 β = 0 .
We then remove the remaining coefficients successively. Let π ( 0 ) = σ ψ 0 \pi^{(0)}=\sigma_{\psi_0} π ( 0 ) = σ ψ 0 . By Lemma 6.10 with m = 1 m=1 m = 1 and g = ( 1 − β ) v 1 g=(1-\beta)v_1 g = ( 1 − β ) v 1 , there is Z 1 Z_1 Z 1 of weight 1, vanishing over A A A , such that π ( 1 ) = e ad Z 1 π ( 0 ) \pi^{(1)}=e^{\operatorname{ad}_{Z_1}}\pi^{(0)} π ( 1 ) = e ad Z 1 π ( 0 ) has coefficients v 0 v_0 v 0 and β v 1 \beta v_1 β v 1 of y 0 y^0 y 0 and y 1 y^1 y 1 and agrees with π ( 0 ) \pi^{(0)} π ( 0 ) over A A A . Inductively, for m ≥ 2 m\geq2 m ≥ 2 , Lemma 6.10 with g g g the coefficient of y m y^m y m in π ( m − 1 ) \pi^{(m-1)} π ( m − 1 ) , which vanishes on A A A , gives Z m Z_m Z m of weight m m m , vanishing over A A A , such that π ( m ) = e ad Z m π ( m − 1 ) \pi^{(m)}=e^{\operatorname{ad}_{Z_m}}\pi^{(m-1)} π ( m ) = e ad Z m π ( m − 1 ) has the coefficients of π ( m − 1 ) \pi^{(m-1)} π ( m − 1 ) in y 0 , … , y m − 1 y^0,\ldots,y^{m-1} y 0 , … , y m − 1 , no term in y m y^m y m , and agrees with π ( m − 1 ) \pi^{(m-1)} π ( m − 1 ) over A A A .
Finally, we take the formal limit and realize it smoothly. Set φ M = e Z 1 ∘ ⋯ ∘ e Z M \varphi_M=e^{Z_1}\circ\cdots\circ e^{Z_M} φ M = e Z 1 ∘ ⋯ ∘ e Z M . Then φ M ∗ σ ψ 0 = π ( M ) \varphi_M^*\sigma_{\psi_0}=\pi^{(M)} φ M ∗ σ ψ 0 = π ( M ) by (13) . Since Z M + 1 Z_{M+1} Z M + 1 maps O ^ \widehat{O} O into I M + 1 I^{M+1} I M + 1 , so does φ M + 1 − φ M = ( e Z M + 1 − id ) ∘ φ M \varphi_{M+1}-\varphi_M=(e^{Z_{M+1}}-\operatorname{id})\circ\varphi_M φ M + 1 − φ M = ( e Z M + 1 − id ) ∘ φ M , and the φ M \varphi_M φ M converge to a continuous algebra endomorphism φ ∗ \varphi^* φ ∗ of O ^ \widehat{O} O , and φ ∗ − id \varphi^*-\operatorname{id} φ ∗ − id , like each φ M ∗ − id \varphi_M^*-\operatorname{id} φ M ∗ − id , maps I w I^w I w into I w + 1 I^{w+1} I w + 1 . Hence φ ∗ \varphi^* φ ∗ is invertible, with inverse ∑ k ≥ 0 ( id − φ ∗ ) k \sum_{k\geq0}(\operatorname{id}-\varphi^*)^k ∑ k ≥ 0 ( id − φ ∗ ) k , and φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) \varphi\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu_{N_c}) φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) . Similarly, e Z M ′ + 1 ∘ ⋯ ∘ e Z M ′ e^{Z_{M'+1}}\circ\cdots\circ e^{Z_{M'}} e Z M ′ + 1 ∘ ⋯ ∘ e Z M ′ converges, as M ′ → ∞ M'\to\infty M ′ → ∞ , to φ M ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) \varphi_M\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu_{N_c}) φ M ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) with φ = φ M ∘ φ M ′ \varphi=\varphi_M\circ\varphi'_{M} φ = φ M ∘ φ M ′ , and φ M ′ ∗ − id \varphi'^*_M-\operatorname{id} φ M ′ ∗ − id , hence log φ M ′ \log\varphi'_M log φ M ′ , maps I w I^w I w into I w + 1 I^{w+1} I w + 1 . So log φ M ′ ∈ X M + 1 ( ν N c ) \log\varphi'_M\in\mathfrak{X}_{M+1}(\nu_{N_c}) log φ M ′ ∈ X M + 1 ( ν N c ) , since f ∂ ∂ x f\frac{\partial}{\partial x} f ∂ x ∂ and f y k + 1 ∂ ∂ y f y^{k+1}\frac{\partial}{\partial y} f y k + 1 ∂ y ∂ have weight k k k . By (13) , φ ∗ σ ψ 0 = e ad log φ M ′ π ( M ) \varphi^*\sigma_{\psi_0}=e^{\operatorname{ad}_{\log\varphi'_M}}\pi^{(M)} φ ∗ σ ψ 0 = e ad l o g φ M ′ π ( M ) differs from π ( M ) \pi^{(M)} π ( M ) only in weights ≥ M \geq M ≥ M , that is, in the coefficients of y k y^k y k with k ≥ M + 1 k\geq M+1 k ≥ M + 1 . Since M M M is arbitrary, φ ∗ σ ψ 0 = ( v 0 + β v 1 y ) ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y \varphi^*\sigma_{\psi_0}=(v_0+\beta v_1y)\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y} φ ∗ σ ψ 0 = ( v 0 + β v 1 y ) ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ . By Lemma 6.9 (1), φ = ψ ψ 0 − 1 \varphi=\psi\psi_0^{-1} φ = ψ ψ 0 − 1 for a tubular neighbourhood ψ \psi ψ , and σ ψ = φ ∗ σ ψ 0 \sigma_\psi=\varphi^*\sigma_{\psi_0} σ ψ = φ ∗ σ ψ 0 by (15) . This proves (1) and (2), with U = ∅ U=\varnothing U = ∅ for the last claim.
For transverse contacts, the last claim also follows from the b b b -symplectic Gotay theorem of Geudens and Zambon [12 Theorem 2.13 and Proposition 2.15] . Indeed, N c N_c N c is then a Lagrangian b b b -coisotropic submanifold [12 Definition 2.2] , whose model is the b b b -cotangent bundle of ( N c , N c ∩ D ) (N_c,N_c\cap D) ( N c , N c ∩ D ) [12 Example 1.17] , up to a fibrewise linear change of coordinates which makes the neighbourhood induce the identity on ν N c \nu_{N_c} ν N c .
Proposition 6.12
Proposition 6.12. Let N c ⊄ D N_c\not\subset D N c ⊂ D be a component whose contacts with D D D , if any, are all transverse. Then ∣ N c ∩ D ∣ = 2 k |N_c\cap D|=2k ∣ N c ∩ D ∣ = 2 k for some k ≥ 0 k\geq0 k ≥ 0 , and there are a tubular neighbourhood of N c N_c N c , a coordinate θ ∈ R / 2 π Z \theta\in\mathbb{R}/2\pi\mathbb{Z} θ ∈ R /2 π Z on N c N_c N c and a frame e e e of ν N c \nu_{N_c} ν N c for which λ n = 0 \lambda_n=0 λ n = 0 for n ≥ 2 n\geq2 n ≥ 2 and
λ 1 ( f ) = { ∂ f ∂ θ e , k = 0 , sin ( k θ ) ∂ f ∂ θ e , k ≥ 1. (51) \lambda_1(f)=
\begin{cases}
\frac{\partial f}{\partial\theta}e, & k=0,\\
\sin(k\theta)\frac{\partial f}{\partial\theta}e, & k\geq1.
\end{cases} \tag*{(51)} λ 1 ( f ) = { ∂ θ ∂ f e , sin ( k θ ) ∂ θ ∂ f e , k = 0 , k ≥ 1. (51)
Proof. By Proposition 6.6 (1), m p = 1 m_p=1 m p = 1 for every p ∈ N c ∩ D p\in N_c\cap D p ∈ N c ∩ D , so ∣ N c ∩ D ∣ = ∑ p m p |N_c\cap D|=\sum_p m_p ∣ N c ∩ D ∣ = ∑ p m p is even by Proposition 6.6 (3). By (49) , v 0 v_0 v 0 depends only on the coordinate and the frame. If k = 0 k=0 k = 0 , then v 0 v_0 v 0 is nowhere zero by
Lemma 6.4(1). Choose a diffeomorphism θ ↦ x ( θ ) \theta\mapsto x(\theta) θ ↦ x ( θ ) from R / 2 π Z \mathbb{R}/2\pi\mathbb{Z} R /2 π Z onto N c N_c N c , and let μ ( x ( θ ) ) = υ 0 ( x ( θ ) ) x ′ ( θ ) \mu(x(\theta)) = \frac{\upsilon_0(x(\theta))}{x'(\theta)} μ ( x ( θ )) = x ′ ( θ ) υ 0 ( x ( θ )) . Then υ ‾ 0 ≡ 1 \overline{\upsilon}_0 \equiv1 υ 0 ≡ 1 by (47) .
If k ≥ 1 k \ge1 k ≥ 1 , with N c ∩ D = { p 1 , … , p 2 k } N_c \cap D = \{p_1,\ldots,p_{2k}\} N c ∩ D = { p 1 , … , p 2 k } in cyclic order, choose such a diffeomorphism with x ( i π / k ) = x ( p i ) x(i\pi/k) = x(p_i) x ( iπ / k ) = x ( p i ) . By Lemma 6.4(1) and Proposition 6.6 (1), υ 0 ∘ x \upsilon_0 \circ x υ 0 ∘ x and sin ( k θ ) \sin(k\theta) sin ( k θ ) have simple zeros exactly at the points i π / k i\pi/k iπ / k . So, by Hadamard’s lemma, μ ( x ( θ ) ) = υ 0 ( x ( θ ) ) x ′ ( θ ) sin ( k θ ) \mu(x(\theta)) = \frac{\upsilon_0(x(\theta))}{x'(\theta)\sin(k\theta)} μ ( x ( θ )) = x ′ ( θ ) s i n ( k θ ) υ 0 ( x ( θ )) is smooth and nowhere zero, and υ ‾ 0 ( θ ) = sin ( k θ ) \overline{\upsilon}_0(\theta) = \sin(k\theta) υ 0 ( θ ) = sin ( k θ ) by (47) .
By Proposition 6.11(2) for θ \theta θ and e ‾ \overline{e} e , σ ψ = υ ‾ 0 ∂ ∂ θ ∧ ∂ ∂ y ~ \sigma_\psi= \overline{\upsilon}_0 \frac{\partial}{\partial\theta} \wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial\widetilde{y}} σ ψ = υ 0 ∂ θ ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ for some tubular neighbourhood ψ \psi ψ , and (45) gives the brackets.
Example 6.13. On the sphere of Example 5.6, let N = { z = z 0 } N = \{z = z_0\} N = { z = z 0 } with 0 < ∣ z 0 ∣ < 1 0 < |z_0| < 1 0 < ∣ z 0 ∣ < 1 . Consider the adapted charts ( x , y ) = ( θ , z − z 0 ) (x,y) = (\theta,z-z_0) ( x , y ) = ( θ , z − z 0 ) and ( x , y ~ ) (x,\widetilde{y}) ( x , y ) , where y ~ = z 0 log ( 1 + y / z 0 ) \widetilde{y} = z_0 \log(1+y/z_0) y = z 0 log ( 1 + y / z 0 ) , ∣ y ∣ < ∣ z 0 ∣ |y| < |z_0| ∣ y ∣ < ∣ z 0 ∣ . Since ∂ y ~ ∂ y = z 0 z 0 + y \frac{\partial\widetilde{y}}{\partial y} = \frac{z_0}{z_0+y} ∂ y ∂ y = z 0 + y z 0 , which equals 1 1 1 on N N N , the two charts induce the same frame of the normal bundle. On a neighbourhood of N N N ,
σ = − ( z 0 + y ) ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y = − z 0 ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y ~ . \sigma= -(z_0+y)\frac{\partial}{\partial x} \wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y} = -z_0\frac{\partial}{\partial x} \wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial\widetilde{y}}. σ = − ( z 0 + y ) ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ = − z 0 ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ .
In the first chart υ 1 = − 1 \upsilon_1=-1 υ 1 = − 1 and λ 2 ≠ 0 \lambda_2 \ne0 λ 2 = 0 , while in the second all the brackets λ n \lambda_n λ n , n ≥ 2 n \ge2 n ≥ 2 , vanish. So, away from the tangential contacts, the binary bracket depends on the tubular neighbourhood, which is why part (2) of Theorem D only describes it at the tangential contacts.
Tangential contacts and the modular vector field
The preceding construction removes the binary bracket when all contacts are transverse. We now identify the obstruction at a tangential contact. The vector field X X X defined by the binary bracket in Corollary 6.2 agrees there with the modular vector field. Higher contact multiplicity forces agreement of higher jets, and along a component of D D D the two vector fields agree everywhere.
Proposition 6.14. Suppose that N c N_c N c has a tangential contact at p ∈ D j p \in D_j p ∈ D j , or that N c = D j N_c = D_j N c = D j and p ∈ D j p \in D_j p ∈ D j . Then the vector υ 1 ( p ) ∂ ∂ x ∣ p \upsilon_1(p)\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\big|_p υ 1 ( p ) ∂ x ∂ p does not depend on the tubular neighbourhood, the coordinate or the frame, and, with X v o l X_{\mathrm{vol}} X vol the modular vector field of (27) ,
υ 1 ( p ) ∂ ∂ x ∣ p = X v o l ( p ) ≠ 0. (52) \upsilon_1(p)\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\bigg|_p = X_{\mathrm{vol}}(p) \ne0. \tag*{(52)} υ 1 ( p ) ∂ x ∂ p = X vol ( p ) = 0. (52) In particular, if N c = D j N_c = D_j N c = D j , then the vector field X X X of Corollary 6.2 is X v o l ∣ D j X_{\mathrm{vol}}|_{D_j} X vol ∣ D j for every tubular neighbourhood. In both cases, λ 2 ≠ 0 \lambda_2 \ne0 λ 2 = 0 for every tubular neighbourhood of N c N_c N c .
Proof. By Lemma 6.4(2) and (4) and (49) , υ 0 ( p ) = υ 0 ′ ( p ) = 0 \upsilon_0(p) = \upsilon'_0(p) = 0 υ 0 ( p ) = υ 0 ′ ( p ) = 0 for every tubular neighbourhood, coordinate and frame. A change of coordinate and frame leaves υ 1 ∂ ∂ x \upsilon_1\frac{\partial}{\partial x} υ 1 ∂ x ∂ unchanged by (48) . Under a change of tubular neighbourhood, possibly only defined near p p p , Lemma 6.3 with m = 1 m=1 m = 1 , whose proof is local over N c N_c N c , gives
υ ~ 1 ( p ) = υ 1 ( p ) + κ ( p ) υ 0 ′ ( p ) − ( κ ′ ( p ) + 2 ρ ( p ) ) υ 0 ( p ) = υ 1 ( p ) . \begin{aligned}
\widetilde{\upsilon}_1(p) = \upsilon_1(p) + \kappa(p)\upsilon'_0(p) - (\kappa'(p)+2\rho(p))\upsilon_0(p) \\
&= \upsilon_1(p).
\end{aligned} υ 1 ( p ) = υ 1 ( p ) + κ ( p ) υ 0 ′ ( p ) − ( κ ′ ( p ) + 2 ρ ( p )) υ 0 ( p ) = υ 1 ( p ) .
Since every change of data is a composite of the two, υ 1 ( p ) ∂ ∂ x ∣ p \upsilon_1(p)\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\big|_p υ 1 ( p ) ∂ x ∂ p is invariant. In the charts of Lemma 6.4(2) and (4), υ 1 ( p ) = − 1 \upsilon_1(p)=-1 υ 1 ( p ) = − 1 and ∂ ∂ x ∣ p = ∂ ∂ t ∣ p \frac{\partial}{\partial x}\big|_p = \frac{\partial}{\partial t}\big|_p ∂ x ∂ p = ∂ t ∂ p , since ∂ ∂ x = ∂ ∂ t \frac{\partial}{\partial x} = \frac{\partial}{\partial t} ∂ x ∂ = ∂ t ∂ if N c = D j N_c=D_j N c = D j , and ∂ ∂ x = ∂ ∂ t + h ′ ( t ) ∂ ∂ r \frac{\partial}{\partial x} = \frac{\partial}{\partial t}+h'(t)\frac{\partial}{\partial r} ∂ x ∂ = ∂ t ∂ + h ′ ( t ) ∂ r ∂ with h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 h'(0)=0 h ′ ( 0 ) = 0 otherwise. So υ 1 ( p ) ∂ ∂ x ∣ p = − ∂ ∂ t ∣ p = X v o l ( p ) ≠ 0 \upsilon_1(p)\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\big|_p = -\frac{\partial}{\partial t}\big|_p = X_{\mathrm{vol}}(p) \ne0 υ 1 ( p ) ∂ x ∂ p = − ∂ t ∂ p = X vol ( p ) = 0 by (27) . If N c = D j N_c=D_j N c = D j , this holds at every p ∈ D j p \in D_j p ∈ D j , so X = υ 1 ∂ ∂ x = X v o l ∣ D j X=\upsilon_1\frac{\partial}{\partial x}=X_{\mathrm{vol}}|_{D_j} X = υ 1 ∂ x ∂ = X vol ∣ D j . Finally, λ 2 ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v \lambda_2(f,v)=X(f)v λ 2 ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v with X = υ 1 ∂ ∂ x X=\upsilon_1\frac{\partial}{\partial x} X = υ 1 ∂ x ∂ by Corollary 6.2 , and X ( p ) ≠ 0 X(p)\ne0 X ( p ) = 0 . □
A section of T Σ ∣ N c T\Sigma|_{N_c} T Σ ∣ N c vanishes to order at least k k k at p p p if, in a local coordinate x x x on N c N_c N c centred at p p p , its components in a local frame of T Σ T\Sigma T Σ are O ( x k ) O(x^k) O ( x k ) . This condition is independent of the coordinate and frame. It vanishes to infinite order if the condition holds for every k k k .
Proposition 6.15. Let p p p be a tangential contact of N c N_c N c with D j D_j D j , of multiplicity m p ∈ { 2 , 3 , … } ∪ { ∞ } m_p \in\{2,3,\ldots\}\cup\{\infty\} m p ∈ { 2 , 3 , … } ∪ { ∞ } , let vol \operatorname{vol} vol be a volume form near p p p , and let X X X be the vector field of Corollary 6.2 .
If m p < ∞ m_p<\infty m p < ∞ , then, for every tubular neighbourhood of N c N_c N c , the section X − X v o l ∣ N c X-X_{\mathrm{vol}}|_{N_c} X − X vol ∣ N c of T Σ ∣ N c T\Sigma|_{N_c} T Σ ∣ N c vanishes to order m p − 1 m_p-1 m p − 1 at p p p . In particular, the jet of order m p − 2 m_p-2 m p − 2 of X X X at p p p does not depend on the tubular neighbourhood. If m p = ∞ m_p=\infty m p = ∞ , this section vanishes to infinite order at p p p , and every finite-order jet of X X X at p p p is independent of the tubular neighbourhood.
If m p < ∞ m_p<\infty m p < ∞ , the jet of order m p − 1 m_p-1 m p − 1 of X X X at p p p depends on the tubular neighbourhood.
Proof. (1) In the chart ( t , r ) (t,r) ( t , r ) of (26) near p = ( 0 , 0 ) p=(0,0) p = ( 0 , 0 ) , Lemma 4.3 gives N c = { r = h ( t ) } N_c=\{r=h(t)\} N c = { r = h ( t )} . If m p m_p m p is finite, h h h vanishes at 0 0 0 to order exactly m p m_p m p , and if m p = ∞ m_p=\infty m p = ∞ , then h h h is flat at 0 0 0 . For v o l 0 = d r ∧ d t \mathrm{vol}_0=dr\wedge dt vol 0 = d r ∧ d t , X v o l 0 = − ∂ ∂ t X_{\mathrm{vol}_0}=-\frac{\partial}{\partial t} X vol 0 = − ∂ t ∂ near p p p , as in (27) . Changing the volume form adds to the modular vector field a Hamiltonian vector field σ ( d u ) = r ( ∂ u ∂ r ∂ ∂ t − ∂ u ∂ t ∂ ∂ r ) \sigma(du)=r\left(\frac{\partial u}{\partial r}\frac{\partial}{\partial t}-\frac{\partial u}{\partial t}\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\right) σ ( d u ) = r ( ∂ r ∂ u ∂ t ∂ − ∂ t ∂ u ∂ r ∂ ) , so X v o l = − ∂ ∂ t + r Y X_{\mathrm{vol}}=-\frac{\partial}{\partial t}+rY X vol = − ∂ t ∂ + r Y for a smooth vector field Y Y Y .
Let ψ p \psi_p ψ p be the local tubular neighbourhood of Lemma 6.4(4), with x = t x=t x = t , y = r − h ( t ) y=r-h(t) y = r − h ( t ) and frame ∂ ∂ y \frac{\partial}{\partial y} ∂ y ∂ . There, υ 0 = − h \upsilon_0=-h υ 0 = − h and υ 1 ≡ − 1 \upsilon_1\equiv-1 υ 1 ≡ − 1 , and ∂ ∂ x = ∂ ∂ t + h ′ ( t ) ∂ ∂ r \frac{\partial}{\partial x}=\frac{\partial}{\partial t}+h'(t)\frac{\partial}{\partial r} ∂ x ∂ = ∂ t ∂ + h ′ ( t ) ∂ r ∂ along N c N_c N c . By (48) , we may compute X X X for every tubular neighbourhood ψ \psi ψ in this coordinate and frame. Near p p p , the transition from ψ p \psi_p ψ p to ψ \psi ψ is e Z e^Z e Z with Z ∈ X ≥ 1 Z\in\mathfrak{X}_{\geq1} Z ∈ X ≥ 1 , by the local version of Lemma 2.4 , and Lemma 6.3 with m = 1 m=1 m = 1 gives
υ 1 ψ = − 1 + κ υ 0 ′ − ( κ ′ + 2 ρ ) υ 0 = − 1 − κ h ′ + ( κ ′ + 2 ρ ) h . \begin{aligned}
\upsilon_1^\psi=-1+\kappa\upsilon_0'-\left(\kappa'+2\rho\right)\upsilon_0 \\
&=-1-\kappa h'+\left(\kappa'+2\rho\right)h.
\end{aligned} υ 1 ψ = − 1 + κ υ 0 ′ − ( κ ′ + 2 ρ ) υ 0 = − 1 − κ h ′ + ( κ ′ + 2 ρ ) h .
Suppose first that m p < ∞ m_p<\infty m p < ∞ . Then υ 1 ψ = − 1 + O ( t m p − 1 ) \upsilon_1^\psi=-1+O(t^{m_p-1}) υ 1 ψ = − 1 + O ( t m p − 1 ) , and, along N c N_c N c ,
X − X v o l = υ 1 ψ ∂ ∂ x + ∂ ∂ t − h Y = − h ′ ( t ) ∂ ∂ r + O ( t m p − 1 ) − h ( t ) Y = O ( t m p − 1 ) . X-X_{\mathrm{vol}}=\upsilon_1^\psi\frac{\partial}{\partial x}+\frac{\partial}{\partial t}-hY=-h'(t)\frac{\partial}{\partial r}+O(t^{m_p-1})-h(t)Y=O(t^{m_p-1}). X − X vol = υ 1 ψ ∂ x ∂ + ∂ t ∂ − hY = − h ′ ( t ) ∂ r ∂ + O ( t m p − 1 ) − h ( t ) Y = O ( t m p − 1 ) .
Here we used h ′ ( t ) = O ( t m p − 1 ) h'(t)=O(t^{m_p-1}) h ′ ( t ) = O ( t m p − 1 ) and h ( t ) = O ( t m p ) h(t)=O(t^{m_p}) h ( t ) = O ( t m p ) . The claim on jets follows because X v o l ∣ N c X_{\mathrm{vol}}|_{N_c} X vol ∣ N c does not depend on ψ \psi ψ . In fact, this order is attained: X X X is tangent to N c N_c N c , whereas the component of X v o l X_{\mathrm{vol}} X vol along ∂ ∂ r \frac{\partial}{\partial r} ∂ r ∂ in the frame ( ∂ ∂ x , ∂ ∂ r ) \left(\frac{\partial}{\partial x},\frac{\partial}{\partial r}\right) ( ∂ x ∂ , ∂ r ∂ ) is h ′ + O ( t m p ) h'+O(t^{m_p}) h ′ + O ( t m p ) , which has order exactly m p − 1 m_p-1 m p − 1 .
If m p = ∞ m_p=\infty m p = ∞ , both h h h and h ′ h' h ′ are flat. The displayed formula for υ 1 ψ \upsilon_1^\psi υ 1 ψ shows that υ 1 ψ + 1 \upsilon_1^\psi+1 υ 1 ψ + 1 is flat as well. Since ∂ ∂ x = ∂ ∂ t + h ′ ∂ ∂ r \frac{\partial}{\partial x}=\frac{\partial}{\partial t}+h'\frac{\partial}{\partial r} ∂ x ∂ = ∂ t ∂ + h ′ ∂ r ∂ along N c N_c N c and X v o l = − ∂ ∂ t + h Y X_{\mathrm{vol}}=-\frac{\partial}{\partial t}+hY X vol = − ∂ t ∂ + hY there, the section X − X v o l ∣ N c X-X_{\mathrm{vol}}|_{N_c} X − X vol ∣ N c is flat. This proves the assertion for every finite-order jet.
(2) Fix ψ \psi ψ , a global coordinate x x x on N c N_c N c with x ( p ) = 0 x(p)=0 x ( p ) = 0 and a global frame, identifying a neighbourhood of the zero section of ν N c \nu_{N_c} ν N c with N c × ( − ε , ε ) N_c\times(-\varepsilon,\varepsilon) N c × ( − ε , ε ) . Let κ ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) \kappa\in C^\infty(N_c) κ ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) with κ ( p ) ≠ 0 \kappa(p)\ne0 κ ( p ) = 0 , and γ ( x , y ) = ( x + y κ ( x ) , y ) \gamma(x,y)=(x+y\kappa(x),y) γ ( x , y ) = ( x + y κ ( x ) , y ) . As in the proof of Lemma 6.9 , ψ ′ = ψ ∘ γ \psi'=\psi\circ\gamma ψ ′ = ψ ∘ γ is a tubular neighbourhood, and φ ψ ψ ′ \varphi_{\psi\psi'} φ ψ ψ ′ is the expansion of γ \gamma γ . Let Z = log φ ψ ψ ′ Z=\log\varphi_{\psi\psi'} Z = log φ ψ ψ ′ . Since φ ψ ψ ′ ∗ ( y ) = y \varphi_{\psi\psi'}^*(y)=y φ ψ ψ ′ ∗ ( y ) = y and ( φ ψ ψ ′ − id ) k (\varphi_{\psi\psi'}-\operatorname{id})^k ( φ ψ ψ ′ − id ) k maps O ^ \widehat{\mathcal{O}} O into I k \mathcal{I}^k I k , Z ( y ) = 0 Z(y)=0 Z ( y ) = 0 and Z ( x ) = y κ Z(x)=y\kappa Z ( x ) = y κ modulo I 2 \mathcal{I}^2 I 2 . So
Z ( 1 ) = y κ ∂ ∂ x , Z_{(1)}=y\kappa\frac{\partial}{\partial x}, Z ( 1 ) = y κ ∂ x ∂ ,
and, by Lemma 6.3 , the coefficients of σ ψ \sigma_\psi σ ψ and σ ψ ′ \sigma_{\psi'} σ ψ ′ satisfy
υ ~ 1 − υ 1 = κ υ 0 ′ − κ ′ υ 0 . \widetilde{\upsilon}_1-\upsilon_1=\kappa\upsilon_0'-\kappa'\upsilon_0. υ 1 − υ 1 = κ υ 0 ′ − κ ′ υ 0 .
By Proposition 6.6 (1), υ 0 = x m p w \upsilon_0=x^{m_p}w υ 0 = x m p w near p p p , with w ( 0 ) ≠ 0 w(0)\ne0 w ( 0 ) = 0 . Therefore
υ ~ 1 − υ 1 = m p κ ( 0 ) w ( 0 ) x m p − 1 + O ( x m p ) , m p κ ( 0 ) w ( 0 ) ≠ 0. \widetilde{\upsilon}_1-\upsilon_1=m_p\kappa(0)w(0)x^{m_p-1}+O(x^{m_p}),\qquad m_p\kappa(0)w(0)\ne0. υ 1 − υ 1 = m p κ ( 0 ) w ( 0 ) x m p − 1 + O ( x m p ) , m p κ ( 0 ) w ( 0 ) = 0.
Thus the jets of order m p − 1 m_p-1 m p − 1 of υ 1 ∂ ∂ x \upsilon_1\frac{\partial}{\partial x} υ 1 ∂ x ∂ and υ ~ 1 ∂ ∂ x \widetilde{\upsilon}_1\frac{\partial}{\partial x} υ 1 ∂ x ∂ at p p p differ. □
L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -classification and induced isomorphisms
We now classify the underlying L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -algebras of the homotopy Poisson algebras ( a c , λ ψ ) (\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda^\psi) ( a c , λ ψ ) . For components not contained in D D D , the classification depends only on the total contact multiplicity
M ( N c ) = ∑ p ∈ N c ∩ D m p ∈ { 0 , 1 , 2 , … } ∪ { ∞ } , M(N_c)=\sum_{p\in N_c\cap D}m_p\in\{0,1,2,\ldots\}\cup\{\infty\}, M ( N c ) = p ∈ N c ∩ D ∑ m p ∈ { 0 , 1 , 2 , … } ∪ { ∞ } ,
where the empty sum is 0 0 0 and the sum is ∞ \infty ∞ if some m p m_p m p is infinite. We then apply the criterion of Theorem A to determine which isomorphisms are induced by changes of tubular neighbourhood.
Throughout this classification, L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphisms are algebraic: they need not be continuous, local or compatible with the commutative products. The classification therefore concerns the underlying L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -algebras, not isomorphisms preserving the full homotopy Poisson structure. A flat L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -structure Q Q Q on a graded vector space W W W is minimal if Q 1 = 0 Q_1=0 Q 1 = 0 . A complex ( C , d C ) (C,d_C) ( C , d C ) is viewed as the flat L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -structure on C C C whose only nonzero Taylor coefficient is d C d_C d C . In particular, we write ( a c , λ 1 ) (\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1) ( a c , λ 1 ) for the flat P ∞ P_\infty P ∞ -algebra whose only nonzero bracket is λ 1 \lambda_1 λ 1 . Its coderivation, which we denote by Q l i n Q^{\mathrm{lin}} Q lin , is the flat L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -structure on a c [ 1 ] \mathfrak{a}_c[1] a c [ 1 ] whose only nonzero Taylor coefficient is ( Q a c ) 1 (Q_{\mathfrak{a}_c})_1 ( Q a c ) 1 .
By the decomposition theorem of Kontsevich [17 §4.5.1, Lemma] , every flat L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -algebra ( V , Q ) (V,Q) ( V , Q ) is L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphic to a direct sum ( W , Q min ) ⊕ ( C , d C ) (W,Q^{\min})\oplus(C,d_C) ( W , Q m i n ) ⊕ ( C , d C ) , where ( W , Q min ) (W,Q^{\min}) ( W , Q m i n ) is minimal and ( C , d C ) (C,d_C) ( C , d C ) is a contractible complex.
Proposition 6.16. Let ψ \psi ψ be a tubular neighbourhood of N c N_c N c , and write Q = Q ψ Q=Q_\psi Q = Q ψ and V = a c [ 1 ] V=\mathfrak{a}_c[1] V = a c [ 1 ] . (1) If N c = D j N_c=D_j N c = D j , then Q 2 ′ ≠ 0 Q'_2\ne0 Q 2 ′ = 0 for every flat L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -algebra ( V ′ , Q ′ ) (V',Q') ( V ′ , Q ′ ) which is L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphic to ( V , Q ) (V,Q) ( V , Q ) . (2) If N c ⊄ D N_c\not\subset D N c ⊂ D , there is an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism F : ( a c , λ ψ ) → ( a c , λ 1 ) F:(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda^\psi)\to(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1) F : ( a c , λ ψ ) → ( a c , λ 1 ) with identity linear part.
(3) Suppose that N c ⊄ D N_c \not\subset D N c ⊂ D , and let N c ′ ′ ⊄ D ′ N'_{c'} \not\subset D' N c ′ ′ ⊂ D ′ be a component of an admissible curve in a Radko surface ( Σ ′ , σ ′ ) (\Sigma',\sigma') ( Σ ′ , σ ′ ) , with tubular neighbourhood ψ ′ \psi' ψ ′ and a c ′ ′ = C ∞ ( ∧ ∙ ν N c ′ ′ ) \mathfrak{a}'_{c'}=C^\infty(\wedge^\bullet\nu_{N'_{c'}}) a c ′ ′ = C ∞ ( ∧ ∙ ν N c ′ ′ ) . Then ( a c , λ ψ ) (\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda^\psi) ( a c , λ ψ ) and ( a c ′ ′ , λ ψ ′ ) (\mathfrak{a}'_{c'},\lambda^{\psi'}) ( a c ′ ′ , λ ψ ′ ) are L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphic if and only if ∑ p m p = ∑ p ′ m p ′ \sum_p m_p=\sum_{p'}m_{p'} ∑ p m p = ∑ p ′ m p ′ in { 0 , 1 , 2 , … } ∪ { ∞ } \{0,1,2,\ldots\}\cup\{\infty\} { 0 , 1 , 2 , … } ∪ { ∞ } .
(4) If N c = D j N_c=D_j N c = D j and N c ′ ′ = D j ′ ′ N'_{c'}=D'_{j'} N c ′ ′ = D j ′ ′ are components of the degeneracy loci of two Radko surfaces, with tubular neighbourhoods ψ \psi ψ and ψ ′ \psi' ψ ′ , then ( a c , λ ψ ) (\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda^\psi) ( a c , λ ψ ) and ( a c ′ ′ , λ ψ ′ ) (\mathfrak{a}'_{c'},\lambda^{\psi'}) ( a c ′ ′ , λ ψ ′ ) are L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphic.
Proof. (1) By Lemma 6.4(2) and (49) , ν 0 ≡ 0 \nu_0\equiv0 ν 0 ≡ 0 , so Q 1 = 0 Q_1=0 Q 1 = 0 , and Q 2 ≠ 0 Q_2\ne0 Q 2 = 0 by Proposition 6.14 . For an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism F : ( V , Q ) → ( V ′ , Q ′ ) F:(V,Q)\to(V',Q') F : ( V , Q ) → ( V ′ , Q ′ ) , (2.1) for the coalgebra morphisms F F F and F − 1 F^{-1} F − 1 gives ( F − 1 ) 1 = F 1 − 1 (F^{-1})_1=F_1^{-1} ( F − 1 ) 1 = F 1 − 1 . By (1) and (2) , the components of length one of F ∘ Q = Q ′ ∘ F F\circ Q=Q'\circ F F ∘ Q = Q ′ ∘ F on V V V and on S 2 V S^2V S 2 V are
F 1 ∘ Q 1 = Q 1 ′ ∘ F 1 , F 1 ∘ Q 2 + F 2 ∘ Q 1 ( 2 ) = Q 1 ′ ∘ F 2 + Q 2 ′ ∘ ( F 1 ⋅ F 1 ) . F_1\circ Q_1=Q'_1\circ F_1,\qquad F_1\circ Q_2+F_2\circ Q_1^{(2)}=Q'_1\circ F_2+Q'_2\circ(F_1\cdot F_1). F 1 ∘ Q 1 = Q 1 ′ ∘ F 1 , F 1 ∘ Q 2 + F 2 ∘ Q 1 ( 2 ) = Q 1 ′ ∘ F 2 + Q 2 ′ ∘ ( F 1 ⋅ F 1 ) .
where Q 1 ( 2 ) ( a 1 a 2 ) = Q 1 ( a 1 ) a 2 + ( − 1 ) ∣ a 1 ∣ a 1 Q 1 ( a 2 ) Q_1^{(2)}(a_1a_2)=Q_1(a_1)a_2+(-1)^{|a_1|}a_1Q_1(a_2) Q 1 ( 2 ) ( a 1 a 2 ) = Q 1 ( a 1 ) a 2 + ( − 1 ) ∣ a 1 ∣ a 1 Q 1 ( a 2 ) and ( F 1 ⋅ F 1 ) ( a 1 a 2 ) = F 1 ( a 1 ) F 1 ( a 2 ) (F_1\cdot F_1)(a_1a_2)=F_1(a_1)F_1(a_2) ( F 1 ⋅ F 1 ) ( a 1 a 2 ) = F 1 ( a 1 ) F 1 ( a 2 ) . Hence Q 1 ′ = 0 Q'_1=0 Q 1 ′ = 0 and Q 2 ′ = F 1 ∘ Q 2 ∘ ( F 1 ⋅ F 1 ) − 1 ≠ 0 Q'_2=F_1\circ Q_2\circ(F_1\cdot F_1)^{-1}\ne0 Q 2 ′ = F 1 ∘ Q 2 ∘ ( F 1 ⋅ F 1 ) − 1 = 0 .
(2) We first show that the minimal summand in the decomposition theorem has zero brackets. We then compose with a linear isomorphism to obtain a linearization with identity linear part.
By Proposition 6.6 (2), H 0 ( a c , λ 1 ) = R ⋅ 1 H^0(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1)=\mathbb{R}\cdot1 H 0 ( a c , λ 1 ) = R ⋅ 1 . Choose a decomposition V = V H ⊕ V B ⊕ V ′ V=V_H\oplus V_B\oplus V' V = V H ⊕ V B ⊕ V ′ of graded vector spaces with V B = im Q 1 V_B=\operatorname{im}Q_1 V B = im Q 1 , ker Q 1 = V H ⊕ V B \ker Q_1=V_H\oplus V_B ker Q 1 = V H ⊕ V B and 1 ∈ V H 1\in V_H 1 ∈ V H , so that V H ⊂ R ⋅ 1 ⊕ a c V_H\subset\mathbb{R}\cdot1\oplus\mathfrak{a}_c V H ⊂ R ⋅ 1 ⊕ a c . By Proposition 6.1 , Q n Q_n Q n with n ≥ 2 n\ge2 n ≥ 2 vanishes unless exactly one argument is a nonconstant function, and 1 ⋅ 1 = 0 1\cdot1=0 1 ⋅ 1 = 0 in S 2 V S^2V S 2 V since 1 1 1 is odd. So Q Q Q vanishes on S ( V H ) S(V_H) S ( V H ) , and the inclusion i : ( V H , 0 ) → ( V , Q ) i:(V_H,0)\to(V,Q) i : ( V H , 0 ) → ( V , Q ) is a strict quasi-isomorphism. Let G : ( V , Q ) → ( W , Q min ) ⊕ ( C , d C ) G:(V,Q)\to(W,Q^{\min})\oplus(C,d_C) G : ( V , Q ) → ( W , Q m i n ) ⊕ ( C , d C ) be as in the decomposition theorem, and q q q the projection onto W W W . Then G ′ = q ∘ G ∘ i : ( V H , 0 ) → ( W , Q min ) G'=q\circ G\circ i:(V_H,0)\to(W,Q^{\min}) G ′ = q ∘ G ∘ i : ( V H , 0 ) → ( W , Q m i n ) is a quasi-isomorphism between algebras with zero differential, so G 1 ′ G'_1 G 1 ′ is bijective, G 1 ′ G'_1 G 1 ′ is invertible by induction on the length, and Q min = G 1 ′ ∘ 0 ∘ G 1 ′ − 1 = 0 Q^{\min}=G'_1\circ0\circ G_1^{'-1}=0 Q m i n = G 1 ′ ∘ 0 ∘ G 1 ′ − 1 = 0 . It follows that G 1 : ( V , Q 1 ) → ( W ⊕ C , 0 ⊕ d C ) G_1:(V,Q_1)\to(W\oplus C,0\oplus d_C) G 1 : ( V , Q 1 ) → ( W ⊕ C , 0 ⊕ d C ) is an isomorphism of complexes. Hence
F=S(G_1^{-1})\circ G:(V,Q)\longrightarrow(V,Q^{\lin})
is an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism with F 1 = id F_1=\operatorname{id} F 1 = id , where S ( G 1 − 1 ) S(G_1^{-1}) S ( G 1 − 1 ) is the coalgebra isomorphism induced by the linear map G 1 − 1 G_1^{-1} G 1 − 1 .
(3) As in (1), the linear part of an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism is an isomorphism of complexes, so the total multiplicities agree by Proposition 6.6 (3) and (4). Conversely, if they agree, the spaces H 1 H^1 H 1 have the same dimension, by Proposition 6.6 (3) in the finite case. Otherwise both dimensions are 2 ℵ 0 2^{\aleph_0} 2 ℵ 0 . Indeed, a c 0 \mathfrak{a}_c^0 a c 0 has cardinality 2 ℵ 0 2^{\aleph_0} 2 ℵ 0 , since a continuous function is determined by its values on a countable dense set. If m p = ∞ m_p=\infty m p = ∞ , every element of im λ 1 \operatorname{im}\lambda_1 im λ 1 is flat at p p p (Proposition 6.6 (4)), so by Borel’s lemma, H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) H^1(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1) H 1 ( a c , λ 1 ) maps onto R [ [ x ] ] \mathbb{R}[[x]] R [[ x ]] for a coordinate x x x centred at p p p , and the ∑ k s k x k \sum_k s_kx^k ∑ k s k x k , s ∈ R s\in\mathbb{R} s ∈ R , are linearly independent by the Vandermonde determinant. By (2), it suffices to find an isomorphism of complexes ( a c , λ 1 ) ≅ ( a c ′ ′ , λ 1 ′ ) (\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1)\cong(\mathfrak{a}'_{c'},\lambda'_1) ( a c , λ 1 ) ≅ ( a c ′ ′ , λ 1 ′ ) . Choose complements E 0 E^0 E 0 of R \mathbb{R} R in a c 0 \mathfrak{a}_c^0 a c 0 and E 1 E^1 E 1 of im λ 1 \operatorname{im}\lambda_1 im λ 1 in a c 1 \mathfrak{a}_c^1 a c 1 , and similarly E ′ 0 , E ′ 1 E'^0,E'^1 E ′0 , E ′1 . The spaces E 0 E^0 E 0 and E ′ 0 E'^0 E ′0 are complements of a line in the spaces C ∞ ( N c ) C^\infty(N_c) C ∞ ( N c ) and C ∞ ( N c ′ ′ ) C^\infty(N'_{c'}) C ∞ ( N c ′ ′ ) , which are isomorphic through a diffeomorphism N c → N c ′ ′ N_c\to N'_{c'} N c → N c ′ ′ , and dim E 1 = dim E ′ 1 \dim E^1=\dim E'^1 dim E 1 = dim E ′1 . So there are linear isomorphisms L 0 : E 0 → E ′ 0 L^0:E^0\to E'^0 L 0 : E 0 → E ′0 and L 1 : E 1 → E ′ 1 L^1:E^1\to E'^1 L 1 : E 1 → E ′1 . Since λ 1 \lambda_1 λ 1 and λ 1 ′ \lambda'_1 λ 1 ′ are injective on E 0 E^0 E 0 and E ′ 0 E'^0 E ′0 , the maps 1 ↦ 1 1\mapsto1 1 ↦ 1 , f ↦ L 0 ( f ) f\mapsto L^0(f) f ↦ L 0 ( f ) , λ 1 ( f ) ↦ λ 1 ′ ( L 0 ( f ) ) \lambda_1(f)\mapsto\lambda'_1(L^0(f)) λ 1 ( f ) ↦ λ 1 ′ ( L 0 ( f )) and v ↦ L 1 ( v ) v\mapsto L^1(v) v ↦ L 1 ( v ) , for f ∈ E 0 f\in E^0 f ∈ E 0 and v ∈ E 1 v\in E^1 v ∈ E 1 , define an isomorphism of complexes.
(4) Let ψ j \psi_j ψ j be the tubular neighbourhood given by the chart ( t , r ) (t,r) ( t , r ) of (26) , with t ∈ S ℓ j 1 t\in S^1_{\ell_j} t ∈ S ℓ j 1 . By Corollary 2.9, Φ ( ψ ψ j ) : ( a c , λ ψ ) → ( a c , λ ψ j ) \Phi(\psi_{\psi_j}):(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda^\psi)\to(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda^{\psi_j}) Φ ( ψ ψ j ) : ( a c , λ ψ ) → ( a c , λ ψ j ) is an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism, and, by Proposition 6.1 and Lemma 6.4(2), the only nonzero brackets of λ ψ j \lambda^{\psi_j} λ ψ j in the frame e e e given by ∂ ∂ r \frac{\partial}{\partial r} ∂ r ∂ are, up to graded antisymmetry, λ 2 ( f , g e ) = − ∂ f ∂ θ g e \lambda_2(f,ge)=-\frac{\partial f}{\partial\theta}ge λ 2 ( f , g e ) = − ∂ θ ∂ f g e . Let u j : R / Z → D j u_j:\mathbb{R}/\mathbb{Z}\to D_j u j : R / Z → D j , θ ↦ ℓ j θ \theta\mapsto\ell_j\theta θ ↦ ℓ j θ , and let b = C ∞ ( R / Z ) ⊕ C ∞ ( R / Z ) e 0 \mathfrak{b}=C^\infty(\mathbb{R}/\mathbb{Z})\oplus C^\infty(\mathbb{R}/\mathbb{Z})e_0 b = C ∞ ( R / Z ) ⊕ C ∞ ( R / Z ) e 0 with the single nonzero bracket λ 2 ( f , g e 0 ) = − ∂ f ∂ θ g e 0 \lambda_2(f,ge_0)=-\frac{\partial f}{\partial\theta}ge_0 λ 2 ( f , g e 0 ) = − ∂ θ ∂ f g e 0 . The linear map Θ ( f ) = ℓ j − 1 f ∘ u j \Theta(f)=\ell_j^{-1}f\circ u_j Θ ( f ) = ℓ j − 1 f ∘ u j , Θ ( g e ) = ( g ∘ u j ) e 0 \Theta(ge)=(g\circ u_j)e_0 Θ ( g e ) = ( g ∘ u j ) e 0 is bijective, preserves degrees, and satisfies
λ 2 ( Θ ( f ) , Θ ( g e ) ) = − ℓ j − 1 ∂ ( f ∘ u j ) ∂ θ ( g ∘ u j ) e 0 = − ( ∂ f ∂ t g ) ∘ u j e 0 = Θ ( λ 2 ( f , g e ) ) . \begin{aligned}
\lambda_2(\Theta(f),\Theta(ge))
&=-\ell_j^{-1}\frac{\partial(f\circ u_j)}{\partial\theta}(g\circ u_j)e_0\\
&=-\left(\frac{\partial f}{\partial t}g\right)\circ u_j e_0\\
&=\Theta(\lambda_2(f,ge)).
\end{aligned} λ 2 ( Θ ( f ) , Θ ( g e )) = − ℓ j − 1 ∂ θ ∂ ( f ∘ u j ) ( g ∘ u j ) e 0 = − ( ∂ t ∂ f g ) ∘ u j e 0 = Θ ( λ 2 ( f , g e )) .
So Θ \Theta Θ is a strict L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism onto b \mathfrak{b} b , which does not depend on ℓ j \ell_j ℓ j , and similarly for D j ′ ′ D'_{j'} D j ′ ′ .
By Proposition 6.16(4), components of D D D with different modular periods still have L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphic algebras. The next proposition shows that an isomorphism whose linear part respects multiplication of functions by normal sections must preserve the modular period.
Proposition 6.17. Let N c = D j N_c = D_j N c = D j and N c ′ = D j ′ ′ N'_c = D'_{j'} N c ′ = D j ′ ′ be as in Proposition 6.16(4), and let F : ( a c , λ ψ ) → ( a c ′ , λ ψ ′ ) F : (\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda^\psi) \to(\mathfrak{a}'_c,\lambda^{\psi'}) F : ( a c , λ ψ ) → ( a c ′ , λ ψ ′ ) be an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism with F 1 ( f v ) = F 1 ( f ) F 1 ( v ) F_1(fv)=F_1(f)F_1(v) F 1 ( f v ) = F 1 ( f ) F 1 ( v ) for f ∈ a c 0 f\in\mathfrak{a}^0_c f ∈ a c 0 and v ∈ a c 1 v\in\mathfrak{a}^1_c v ∈ a c 1 . Then ℓ j = ℓ j ′ ′ \ell_j=\ell'_{j'} ℓ j = ℓ j ′ ′ .
Proof. By the proof of Proposition 6.16(1), F 1 F_1 F 1 is bijective, preserves degrees and satisfies Q 2 ′ ∘ ( F 1 ⋅ F 1 ) = F 1 ∘ Q 2 Q'_2\circ(F_1\cdot F_1)=F_1\circ Q_2 Q 2 ′ ∘ ( F 1 ⋅ F 1 ) = F 1 ∘ Q 2 , so λ 2 ′ ( F 1 a , F 1 b ) = F 1 ( λ 2 ( a , b ) ) \lambda'_2(F_1a,F_1b)=F_1(\lambda_2(a,b)) λ 2 ′ ( F 1 a , F 1 b ) = F 1 ( λ 2 ( a , b )) , since the signs of (2.21) only depend on the degrees. By Proposition 6.14, λ 2 ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v \lambda_2(f,v)=X(f)v λ 2 ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v and λ 2 ′ ( f ′ , v ′ ) = X ′ ( f ′ ) v ′ \lambda'_2(f',v')=X'(f')v' λ 2 ′ ( f ′ , v ′ ) = X ′ ( f ′ ) v ′ , with X = X v o l ∣ D j X=X_{\mathrm{vol}|D_j} X = X vol ∣ D j and X ′ = X v o l ∣ D j ′ ′ ′ X'=X'_{\mathrm{vol}|D'_{j'}} X ′ = X vol ∣ D j ′ ′ ′ . For f ∈ C ∞ ( D j ) f\in C^\infty(D_j) f ∈ C ∞ ( D j ) and v ∈ a c 1 v\in\mathfrak{a}^1_c v ∈ a c 1 ,
X ′ ( F 1 ( f ) ) F 1 ( v ) = λ 2 ′ ( F 1 f , F 1 v ) = F 1 ( X ( f ) v ) = F 1 ( X ( f ) ) F 1 ( v ) . X'(F_1(f))F_1(v)=\lambda'_2(F_1f,F_1v)=F_1(X(f)v)=F_1(X(f))F_1(v). X ′ ( F 1 ( f )) F 1 ( v ) = λ 2 ′ ( F 1 f , F 1 v ) = F 1 ( X ( f ) v ) = F 1 ( X ( f )) F 1 ( v ) .
Choosing v v v with F 1 ( v ) F_1(v) F 1 ( v ) nowhere zero gives X ′ ∘ F 1 = F 1 ∘ X X'\circ F_1=F_1\circ X X ′ ∘ F 1 = F 1 ∘ X on C ∞ ( D j ) C^\infty(D_j) C ∞ ( D j ) , so the complexified operators X X X and X ′ X' X ′ have the same eigenvalues. In the coordinate t ∈ S ℓ j 1 t\in S^1_{\ell_j} t ∈ S ℓ j 1 of (26) , X = − ∂ ∂ t X=-\frac{\partial}{\partial t} X = − ∂ t ∂ by (27) , and − d f d t = μ f -\frac{df}{dt}=\mu f − d t df = μ f has a nonzero solution f = e − μ t f=e^{-\mu t} f = e − μ t on S ℓ j 1 S^1_{\ell_j} S ℓ j 1 if and only if μ ∈ 2 π i ℓ j Z \mu\in\frac{2\pi i}{\ell_j}\mathbb{Z} μ ∈ ℓ j 2 π i Z . Consequently, 2 π i ℓ j Z = 2 π i ℓ j ′ ′ Z \frac{2\pi i}{\ell_j}\mathbb{Z}=\frac{2\pi i}{\ell'_{j'}}\mathbb{Z} ℓ j 2 π i Z = ℓ j ′ ′ 2 π i Z . Since both periods are positive, equality of these subgroups implies ℓ j = ℓ j ′ ′ \ell_j=\ell'_{j'} ℓ j = ℓ j ′ ′ . □
It remains to identify the isomorphisms induced by changes of tubular neighbourhood. By Theorem A, an isomorphism F F F with F 1 = id F_1=\operatorname{id} F 1 = id is induced in this way precisely when the Taylor coefficients of log F \log F log F are multiderivations. We therefore describe those multiderivations explicitly in rank one. Fix a global frame e e e of ν N c \nu_{N_c} ν N c , with fibre coordinate y y y . A vector field Y Y Y on N c N_c N c lifts to ν N c ≅ N c × R \nu_{N_c}\cong N_c\times\mathbb{R} ν N c ≅ N c × R as the vector field which is horizontal for this product structure, and we write the lift again Y Y Y . In an adapted chart, Y = Y x ( x ) ∂ ∂ x Y=Y^x(x)\frac{\partial}{\partial x} Y = Y x ( x ) ∂ x ∂ .
Proposition 6.18. Let n ≥ 2 n\ge2 n ≥ 2 . A graded symmetric map l : S n ( a c [ 1 ] ) → a c [ 1 ] l:S^n(\mathfrak{a}_c[1])\to\mathfrak{a}_c[1] l : S n ( a c [ 1 ]) → a c [ 1 ] of degree 0 0 0 is a multiderivation of a c \mathfrak{a}_c a c if and only if there are a vector field X n X_n X n on N c N_c N c and a function ρ n ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) \rho_n\in C^\infty(N_c) ρ n ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) such that, for all f , g 1 , … , g n ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) f,g_1,\ldots,g_n\in C^\infty(N_c) f , g 1 , … , g n ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) ,
l ( f , g 1 e , … , g n − 1 e ) = g 1 ⋯ g n − 1 X n ( f ) , (53) l(f,g_1e,\ldots,g_{n-1}e)=g_1\cdots g_{n-1}X_n(f), \tag*{(53)} l ( f , g 1 e , … , g n − 1 e ) = g 1 ⋯ g n − 1 X n ( f ) , (53) l ( g 1 e , … , g n e ) = ( ∑ i = 1 n ( ∏ k ≠ i g k ) X n ( g i ) + ρ n g 1 ⋯ g n ) e . (54) l(g_1e,\ldots,g_ne)=\left(\sum_{i=1}^{n}\left(\prod_{k\ne i}g_k\right)X_n(g_i)+\rho_n g_1\cdots g_n\right)e. \tag*{(54)} l ( g 1 e , … , g n e ) = i = 1 ∑ n k = i ∏ g k X n ( g i ) + ρ n g 1 ⋯ g n e . (54) The pair ( X n , ρ n ) (X_n,\rho_n) ( X n , ρ n ) is then unique, and l = ( D Z ( n − 1 ) ) n l=(D_{Z_{(n-1)}})_n l = ( D Z ( n − 1 ) ) n for the vector field of weight n − 1 n-1 n − 1
Z ( n − 1 ) = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ( n − 1 ) ! y n − 1 X n + ( − 1 ) n n ! ρ n y n ∂ ∂ y . (55) Z_{(n-1)}=\frac{(-1)^{n-1}}{(n-1)!}y^{n-1}X_n+\frac{(-1)^n}{n!}\rho_n y^n\frac{\partial}{\partial y}. \tag*{(55)} Z ( n − 1 ) = ( n − 1 )! ( − 1 ) n − 1 y n − 1 X n + n ! ( − 1 ) n ρ n y n ∂ y ∂ . (55)
Proof. In a c [ 1 ] \mathfrak{a}_c[1] a c [ 1 ] , functions have degree − 1 -1 − 1 and sections of ν N c \nu_{N_c} ν N c degree 0 0 0 , so l l l vanishes on tuples with at least two arguments in a c 0 \mathfrak{a}^0_c a c 0 , and permuting arguments gives no sign when at most one is a function.
Let l l l be a multiderivation. For g , h ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) g,h\in C^\infty(N_c) g , h ∈ C ∞ ( N c ) and a 2 , … , a n ∈ a c [ 1 ] a_2,\ldots,a_n\in\mathfrak{a}_c[1] a 2 , … , a n ∈ a c [ 1 ] , (2.3) with d = 0 d=0 d = 0 gives
l ( g h , a 2 , … , a n ) = l ( g , a 2 , … , a n ) h + g l ( h , a 2 , … , a n ) , l(gh,a_2,\ldots,a_n)=l(g,a_2,\ldots,a_n)h+g\,l(h,a_2,\ldots,a_n), l ( g h , a 2 , … , a n ) = l ( g , a 2 , … , a n ) h + g l ( h , a 2 , … , a n ) ,
l ( g e , a 2 , … , a n ) = ± l ( g , a 2 , … , a n ) e + g l ( e , a 2 , … , a n ) , l(ge,a_2,\ldots,a_n)=\pm l(g,a_2,\ldots,a_n)e+g\,l(e,a_2,\ldots,a_n), l ( g e , a 2 , … , a n ) = ± l ( g , a 2 , … , a n ) e + g l ( e , a 2 , … , a n ) ,
with the sign + + + when all the a k a_k a k are sections, while the first term of the second identity vanishes if some a k a_k a k is a function. By the first identity, the map f ↦ l ( f , e , … , e ) f\mapsto l(f,e,\ldots,e) f ↦ l ( f , e , … , e ) is a derivation of C ∞ ( N c ) C^\infty(N_c) C ∞ ( N c ) , and hence defines a vector field X n X_n X n . Define ρ n \rho_n ρ n by l ( e , … , e ) = ρ n e l(e,\ldots,e)=\rho_n e l ( e , … , e ) = ρ n e . The second identity in each argument gives (53) and (54) .
Conversely, since a c 0 = C ∞ ( N c ) e \mathfrak{a}^0_c=C^\infty(N_c)e a c 0 = C ∞ ( N c ) e , a graded symmetric map of degree 0 0 0 satisfying (53) and (54) is determined by ( X n , ρ n ) (X_n,\rho_n) ( X n , ρ n ) , and taking g i = 1 g_i=1 g i = 1 recovers ( X n , ρ n ) (X_n,\rho_n) ( X n , ρ n ) from it. For Z ( n − 1 ) Z_{(n-1)} Z ( n − 1 ) given by (55) , (20) and (19) give
( D Z ( n − 1 ) ) n ( e , … , e , x ) = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ∂ n − 1 ∂ y n − 1 ( ( − 1 ) n − 1 ( n − 1 ) ! y n − 1 X n x ) = X n x , (D_{Z_{(n-1)}})_n(e,\ldots,e,x)=(-1)^{n-1}\frac{\partial^{n-1}}{\partial y^{n-1}}\left(\frac{(-1)^{n-1}}{(n-1)!}y^{n-1}X_n^x\right)=X_n^x, ( D Z ( n − 1 ) ) n ( e , … , e , x ) = ( − 1 ) n − 1 ∂ y n − 1 ∂ n − 1 ( ( n − 1 )! ( − 1 ) n − 1 y n − 1 X n x ) = X n x ,
( D Z ( n − 1 ) ) n ( e , … , e ) = ( − 1 ) n ∂ n ∂ y n ( ( − 1 ) n n ! ρ n y n ) e = ρ n e . (D_{Z_{(n-1)}})_n(e,\ldots,e)=(-1)^n\frac{\partial^n}{\partial y^n}\left(\frac{(-1)^n}{n!}\rho_n y^n\right)e=\rho_n e. ( D Z ( n − 1 ) ) n ( e , … , e ) = ( − 1 ) n ∂ y n ∂ n ( n ! ( − 1 ) n ρ n y n ) e = ρ n e .
By §2.2, ( D Z ( n − 1 ) ) n (D_{Z_{(n-1)}})_n ( D Z ( n − 1 ) ) n is a multiderivation. So, by the first part and these two identities, it satisfies (53) and (54) for the pair ( X n , ρ n ) (X_n,\rho_n) ( X n , ρ n ) . Hence every map satisfying (53) and (54) equals ( D Z ( n − 1 ) ) n (D_{Z_{(n-1)}})_n ( D Z ( n − 1 ) ) n and is a multiderivation. □
Let ψ , ψ ′ \psi,\psi' ψ , ψ ′ be tubular neighbourhoods of N c N_c N c , and let F : ( a c , λ ψ ) ⟶ ( a c , λ ψ ′ ) F:(\mathfrak a_c,\lambda^\psi)\longrightarrow(\mathfrak a_c,\lambda^{\psi'}) F : ( a c , λ ψ ) ⟶ ( a c , λ ψ ′ ) be an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism. If F 1 = id F_1=\operatorname{id} F 1 = id , then log F ∈ Coder ≥ 2 ( a c ) \log F\in\operatorname{Coder}_{\ge2}(\mathfrak a_c) log F ∈ Coder ≥ 2 ( a c ) . So, by Theorem A and Proposition 6.18 , F F F is induced by a change of tubular neighbourhood if and only if F 1 = id F_1=\operatorname{id} F 1 = id and every ( log F ) n (\log F)_n ( log F ) n , n ≥ 2 n\ge2 n ≥ 2 , is given by (6.9)–(6.10) for some ( X n , ρ n ) (X_n,\rho_n) ( X n , ρ n ) . In that case, log F = D Z \log F=D_Z log F = D Z by Lemma 2.6 (1), and F = e D Z = Φ ( e Z ) F=e^{D_Z}=\Phi(e^Z) F = e D Z = Φ ( e Z ) , with Z = ∑ n ≥ 2 Z ( n − 1 ) Z=\sum_{n\ge2}Z^{(n-1)} Z = ∑ n ≥ 2 Z ( n − 1 ) given by (6.11). For n = 2 n=2 n = 2 , Z ( 1 ) = − y X 2 + 1 2 ρ 2 y 2 ∂ ∂ y Z^{(1)}=-yX_2+\frac{1}{2}\rho_2y^2\frac{\partial}{\partial y} Z ( 1 ) = − y X 2 + 2 1 ρ 2 y 2 ∂ y ∂ , that is, κ = − X 2 x \kappa=-X_2^x κ = − X 2 x and ρ = 1 2 ρ 2 \rho=\frac{1}{2}\rho_2 ρ = 2 1 ρ 2 in Lemma 6.3 , so, by (6.6), the coefficients υ 1 \upsilon_1 υ 1 of σ ψ \sigma_\psi σ ψ and υ ~ 1 \widetilde{\upsilon}_1 υ 1 of σ ψ ′ \sigma_{\psi'} σ ψ ′ satisfy
υ ~ 1 = υ 1 − X 2 ( υ 0 ) + ( ∂ X 2 x ∂ x − ρ 2 ) υ 0 . (56) \widetilde{\upsilon}_1=\upsilon_1-X_2(\upsilon_0)+\left(\frac{\partial X_2^x}{\partial x}-\rho_2\right)\upsilon_0. \tag*{(56)} υ 1 = υ 1 − X 2 ( υ 0 ) + ( ∂ x ∂ X 2 x − ρ 2 ) υ 0 . (56)
To apply the criterion to linearization, we also need to specify when the target complex is realized geometrically. We say that an L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism
F : ( a c , λ ψ ) ⟶ ( a c , λ 1 ) F:(\mathfrak a_c,\lambda^\psi)\longrightarrow(\mathfrak a_c,\lambda_1) F : ( a c , λ ψ ) ⟶ ( a c , λ 1 )
is induced by a change of tubular neighbourhood if there is a tubular neighbourhood ψ ′ ′ \psi'' ψ ′′ with λ n ψ ′ ′ = 0 \lambda_n^{\psi''}=0 λ n ψ ′′ = 0 for all n ≥ 2 n\ge2 n ≥ 2 , and if F = Φ ( φ ) F=\Phi(\varphi) F = Φ ( φ ) for some φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ψ , ψ ′ ′ ) \varphi\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\psi,\psi'') φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ψ , ψ ′′ ) . The unary bracket is then automatically λ 1 \lambda_1 λ 1 , by Remark 2.7.
Corollary 6.19. Let N c ⊄ D N_c\not\subset D N c ⊂ D , and let ψ \psi ψ be a tubular neighbourhood of N c N_c N c .
If N c N_c N c has a tangential contact with D D D , then no L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism ( a c , λ ψ ) ⟶ ( a c , λ 1 ) (\mathfrak a_c,\lambda^\psi)\longrightarrow(\mathfrak a_c,\lambda_1) ( a c , λ ψ ) ⟶ ( a c , λ 1 ) , in particular not the one of Proposition 6.16(2), is induced by a change of tubular neighbourhood. More generally, Φ ( φ ) ∘ Q ψ ∘ Φ ( φ ) − 1 ≠ Q l i n \Phi(\varphi)\circ Q_\psi\circ\Phi(\varphi)^{-1}\ne Q^{\mathrm{lin}} Φ ( φ ) ∘ Q ψ ∘ Φ ( φ ) − 1 = Q lin for every φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) \varphi\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu_{N_c}) φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) .
If every contact of N c N_c N c with D D D is transverse, then Q l i n = Q ψ ′ ′ Q^{\mathrm{lin}}=Q_{\psi''} Q lin = Q ψ ′′ for some tubular neighbourhood ψ ′ ′ \psi'' ψ ′′ , and Φ ( φ ψ ψ ′ ′ ) \Phi(\varphi_{\psi\psi''}) Φ ( φ ψ ψ ′′ ) is an induced L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism ( a c , λ ψ ) ⟶ ( a c , λ 1 ) (\mathfrak a_c,\lambda^\psi)\longrightarrow(\mathfrak a_c,\lambda_1) ( a c , λ ψ ) ⟶ ( a c , λ 1 ) with identity linear part.
Proof. (1) By Proposition 6.14 , the binary bracket of Q ψ ′ Q_{\psi'} Q ψ ′ is nonzero for every tubular neighbourhood ψ ′ \psi' ψ ′ , so Q l i n ≠ Q ψ ′ Q^{\mathrm{lin}}\ne Q_{\psi'} Q lin = Q ψ ′ . For φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) \varphi\in\operatorname{Diff}_1(\nu_{N_c}) φ ∈ Diff 1 ( ν N c ) , Proposition 2.8 (1) gives Φ ( φ ) ∘ Q ψ ∘ Φ ( φ ) − 1 = Q φ ∗ σ ψ \Phi(\varphi)\circ Q_\psi\circ\Phi(\varphi)^{-1}=Q_{\varphi^*\sigma_\psi} Φ ( φ ) ∘ Q ψ ∘ Φ ( φ ) − 1 = Q φ ∗ σ ψ . With φ ∗ σ ψ = υ ~ ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y \varphi^*\sigma_\psi=\widetilde{\upsilon}\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y} φ ∗ σ ψ = υ ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ in an adapted chart near a tangential contact p p p , Lemma 6.3 with m = 1 m=1 m = 1 and Z = log φ Z=\log\varphi Z = log φ gives υ ~ 1 ( p ) = υ 1 ( p ) ≠ 0 \widetilde{\upsilon}_1(p)=\upsilon_1(p)\ne0 υ 1 ( p ) = υ 1 ( p ) = 0 , as in the proof of Proposition 6.14 . By the computation of Proposition 6.1 for the formal bivector φ ∗ σ ψ \varphi^*\sigma_\psi φ ∗ σ ψ , the binary bracket of Q φ ∗ σ ψ Q_{\varphi^*\sigma_\psi} Q φ ∗ σ ψ is ( f , g e ) ↦ υ ~ 1 ∂ f ∂ x g e (f,g e)\mapsto\widetilde{\upsilon}_1\frac{\partial f}{\partial x}g e ( f , g e ) ↦ υ 1 ∂ x ∂ f g e near p p p , which is nonzero.
(2) By Proposition 6.12, λ n ψ ′ ′ = 0 \lambda_n^{\psi''}=0 λ n ψ ′′ = 0 for n ≥ 2 n\ge2 n ≥ 2 for some tubular neighbourhood ψ ′ ′ \psi'' ψ ′′ , and ( Q ψ ′ ′ ) 1 = ( Q ψ ) 1 (Q_{\psi''})_1=(Q_\psi)_1 ( Q ψ ′′ ) 1 = ( Q ψ ) 1 by Remark 2.7, so Q ψ ′ ′ = Q l i n Q_{\psi''}=Q^{\mathrm{lin}} Q ψ ′′ = Q lin . The last claim is Corollary 2.9. □
Example 6.20. Let M = ( R / Z ) × R M=(\mathbb R/\mathbb Z)\times\mathbb R M = ( R / Z ) × R with coordinates ( x , y ) (x,y) ( x , y ) and the symplectic Poisson structure σ = ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y \sigma=\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y} σ = ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ , and let N = { y = 0 } N=\{y=0\} N = { y = 0 } . This is the local model of a component contained in Σ ∖ D \Sigma\setminus D Σ ∖ D . Then ν N = N × R \nu_N=N\times\mathbb R ν N = N × R , with frame e = ∂ ∂ y e=\frac{\partial}{\partial y} e = ∂ y ∂ . The maps ψ ( x , y ) = ( x , y ) \psi(x,y)=(x,y) ψ ( x , y ) = ( x , y ) and ψ ′ ( x , y ) = ( x , y + y 2 ) \psi'(x,y)=(x,y+y^2) ψ ′ ( x , y ) = ( x , y + y 2 ) , for ∣ y ∣ < 1 2 |y|<\frac{1}{2} ∣ y ∣ < 2 1 , are tubular neighbourhoods, and the transition φ = φ ψ ψ ′ \varphi=\varphi_{\psi\psi'} φ = φ ψ ψ ′ is the expansion of ( x , y ) ↦ ( x , y + y 2 ) (x,y)\mapsto(x,y+y^2) ( x , y ) ↦ ( x , y + y 2 ) . With y ~ = y + y 2 \widetilde y=y+y^2 y = y + y 2 , we have ∂ ∂ y ~ = ( 1 + 2 y ) − 1 ∂ ∂ y \frac{\partial}{\partial\widetilde y}=(1+2y)^{-1}\frac{\partial}{\partial y} ∂ y ∂ = ( 1 + 2 y ) − 1 ∂ y ∂ , so
σ ψ = ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y , \sigma_\psi=\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}, σ ψ = ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ ,
σ ψ ′ = 1 1 + 2 y ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y = ∑ k ≥ 0 ( − 2 ) k y k ∂ ∂ x ∧ ∂ ∂ y . \sigma_{\psi'}=\frac{1}{1+2y}\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}
=\sum_{k\ge0}(-2)^ky^k\frac{\partial}{\partial x}\wedge\frac{\partial}{\partial y}. σ ψ ′ = 1 + 2 y 1 ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ = k ≥ 0 ∑ ( − 2 ) k y k ∂ x ∂ ∧ ∂ y ∂ .
By (6.1), λ n ψ = 0 \lambda_n^\psi=0 λ n ψ = 0 for n ≥ 2 n\ge2 n ≥ 2 , while
λ n ψ ′ ( f , g 1 e , … , g n − 1 e ) = ( n − 1 ) ! ( − 2 ) n − 1 ∂ f ∂ x g 1 ⋯ g n − 1 e . \lambda_n^{\psi'}(f,g_1e,\ldots,g_{n-1}e)=(n-1)!(-2)^{n-1}\frac{\partial f}{\partial x}g_1\cdots g_{n-1}e. λ n ψ ′ ( f , g 1 e , … , g n − 1 e ) = ( n − 1 )! ( − 2 ) n − 1 ∂ x ∂ f g 1 ⋯ g n − 1 e .
So the two P ∞ P_\infty P ∞ -structures differ, although λ 1 ψ = λ 1 ψ ′ \lambda_1^\psi=\lambda_1^{\psi'} λ 1 ψ = λ 1 ψ ′ .
Let Z = log φ = z ( y ) ∂ ∂ y Z=\log\varphi=z(y)\frac{\partial}{\partial y} Z = log φ = z ( y ) ∂ y ∂ . The condition e Z ( y ) = y + y 2 e^{Z}(y)=y+y^2 e Z ( y ) = y + y 2 reads y + z + 1 2 z z ′ + ⋯ = y + y 2 y+z+\frac{1}{2}zz'+\cdots=y+y^2 y + z + 2 1 z z ′ + ⋯ = y + y 2 . It determines the coefficients of z = ∑ k ≥ 2 z k y k z=\sum_{k\ge2}z_ky^k z = ∑ k ≥ 2 z k y k successively and gives the iterative logarithm z ( y ) = y 2 − y 3 + 3 2 y 4 − ⋯ z(y)=y^2-y^3+\frac{3}{2}y^4-\cdots z ( y ) = y 2 − y 3 + 2 3 y 4 − ⋯ . In Proposition 6.18 , X n = 0 X_n=0 X n = 0 and ρ n = ( − 1 ) n n ! z n \rho_n=(-1)^nn!z_n ρ n = ( − 1 ) n n ! z n , so ( log Φ ( φ ) ) n ( e , … , e ) = ρ n e (\log\Phi(\varphi))_n(e,\ldots,e)=\rho_ne ( log Φ ( φ ) ) n ( e , … , e ) = ρ n e , with ρ 2 = 2 \rho_2=2 ρ 2 = 2 , ρ 3 = 6 \rho_3=6 ρ 3 = 6 and ρ 4 = 36 \rho_4=36 ρ 4 = 36 .
By Proposition 6.18 with X n = 0 X_n=0 X n = 0 , the coderivation D Z D_Z D Z vanishes on every tuple containing an element of C ∞ ( N ) C^\infty(N) C ∞ ( N ) , and it is C ∞ ( N ) C^\infty(N) C ∞ ( N ) -multilinear on sections of ν N \nu_N ν N . By (2.2), the same holds for the component of length one of every power of D Z D_Z D Z . Hence the coefficients Φ ( φ ) n \Phi(\varphi)_n Φ ( φ ) n , n ≥ 2 n\ge2 n ≥ 2 , are multiderivations, given by (6.10) with X n = 0 X_n=0 X n = 0 . In rank at least two, the coefficients of an induced isomorphism need not be multiderivations (Remark 2.14).
Example 6.21. On the sphere of Example 5.6, let N ′ N' N ′ be the circle of angular radius π / 4 \pi/4 π /4 centred at the point of latitude π / 4 \pi/4 π /4 on the meridian θ = 0 \theta= 0 θ = 0 . It passes through the north pole, it meets D D D only at p = ( 0 , 0 ) p = (0, 0) p = ( 0 , 0 ) , and away from the north pole
N ′ = { z = h ( θ ) , ∣ θ ∣ < π 2 } , N' = \left\{ z = h(\theta),\ |\theta| < \frac{\pi}{2} \right\}, N ′ = { z = h ( θ ) , ∣ θ ∣ < 2 π } , h ( θ ) = sin 2 θ 1 + cos 2 θ = 1 2 θ 2 + O ( θ 4 ) , h(\theta) = \frac{\sin^2\theta}{1+\cos^2\theta} = \frac{1}{2}\theta^2 + O(\theta^4), h ( θ ) = 1 + cos 2 θ sin 2 θ = 2 1 θ 2 + O ( θ 4 ) , so m p = 2 m_p = 2 m p = 2 . The meridian N 1 N_1 N 1 of Example 5.6 has two transverse contacts with D D D , so its total multiplicity is also 2. By Proposition 6.16(3), the homotopy Poisson algebras of N ′ N' N ′ and N 1 N_1 N 1 are L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphic. By Proposition 6.12, N 1 N_1 N 1 has a tubular neighbourhood in which λ n = 0 \lambda_n = 0 λ n = 0 for n ≥ 2 n \ge2 n ≥ 2 . By Proposition 6.14 and (27) , N ′ N' N ′ has none, and λ 2 ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v \lambda_2(f,v) = X(f)\,v λ 2 ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v with X ( p ) = − ∂ ∂ θ X(p) = -\frac{\partial}{\partial\theta} X ( p ) = − ∂ θ ∂ for every tubular neighbourhood.
Proof of Theorem D. Part (1) is Proposition 6.16(2) and (3). In part (2), an induced L ∞ L_\infty L ∞ -isomorphism ( a c , λ ψ ) → ( a c , λ 1 ) (\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda^\psi) \to(\mathfrak{a}_c,\lambda_1) ( a c , λ ψ ) → ( a c , λ 1 ) exists if all contacts are transverse, by Corollary 6.19 (2), and none exists otherwise, by Corollary 6.19 (1). At a tangential contact p p p , λ 2 ψ ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v \lambda^\psi_2(f,v) = X(f)\,v λ 2 ψ ( f , v ) = X ( f ) v for the vector field X X X of Corollary 6.2 , and X ( p ) = X v o l ( p ) X(p) = X_{\mathrm{vol}}(p) X ( p ) = X vol ( p ) by (52) . □
References
Département de mathématiques, Université de Sherbrooke, 2500 Bd de l’Université, Sherbrooke, QC, J1K 2R1, Canada
Email address: yassine.ait.mohamed@usherbrooke.ca
Département de mathématiques, Université de Sherbrooke, 2500 Bd de l’Université, Sherbrooke, QC, J1K 2R1, Canada
Email address: maxence.mayrand@usherbrooke.ca